Operating Manual
Hybrid IP-PBX
Model No.
KX-NS700
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.
Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
In particular, be sure to read "1.1.1 For Your Safety, page 16" before using this product.
KX-NS700: PFMPR Software File Version 006.00000 or later
Manuals and supporting information are provided on the Panasonic Web site at:
https://panasonic.net/cns/pcc/support/pbx/
Feature Highlights
Feature Highlights
Easy Operation
IP Communication
This PBX supports IP communication using
a variety of IP telephones, such as the KX-NT300/
KX-NT500 series with Self Labelling and/or
Bluetooth wireless headsets, Panasonic IP
Softphones, and SIP phones.
R
IP Proprietary
Telephone
If you are using a certain Panasonic telephone
that is equipped with a Navigator Key/Jog Dial
and a display, it helps you to access the desired
feature easily. Also, you will be informed of the
arrival of an incoming call or a message waiting
by the lamp if it is equipped.
ENTER
Navigator Key
IP Softphone
SIP phone
Consult your dealer
Jog Dial
Message/Ringer Lamp
1.1 Before Operating the Telephones
(page 16)
Remote Office
Cellular Phone Features
This PBX supports the use of SIP phones
connected from a remote office over an IP network
through an SBC (session border controller).
SIP phones can be set up by simply connecting
the phones to the LAN at the remote office.
This PBX supports the use of cellular phones
with the PBX. Cellular phones can make and
receive calls as if they were registered
extensions.
IP Network
Consult your dealer
2
Operating Manual
1.15 Cellular Phone Features (page 243)
Feature Highlights
Wireless System
Built-in Unified Messaging
This PBX optionally supports a Portable Station
(PS) system. PSs can be used in the PBX
with other wired telephones.
You can set incoming calls to be redirected
to your mailbox to let callers leave voice
messages when you are unable to answer
the phone. You can access your mailbox to
listen to the messages when you are away from
the office as well.
Hello, this
is John Smith.
Please
leave your
message.
1.9.12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a Wired
Telephone (Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
(page 199)
Call Centre
1.8 Using the Unified Messaging Features
(page 131)
Communication Assistant (CA)
This PBX offers a built-in Call Centre feature
called Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group.
Incoming calls to an ICD Group can be queued
or redirected to a preprogrammed destination,
answered in order of priority and monitored by
a supervisor extension.
CA Client users can connect to the PBX without
using an external server. CA Client users can
make calls by clicking in a phonebook on their
PC, as well as use many other features.
PC
(Client)
ICD Group
Customers
Queuing
1.10 Utilising the Call Centre (page 202)
PC
(Client)
Consult your dealer
Operating Manual
3
Feature Highlights
CA Call Accounting
This application can calculate call cost estimates
and track call activity for calls that are made
through the PBX. Installing the CA Call
Accounting web server software allows you to
access CA Call Accounting from any PC by using
a web client. You can sort and view, print, or
export call information with the web client.
In addition, reports can be created based on
exported data.
PC
(Client)
PC
(Web Server)
PC
(Client)
Consult your dealer
In This Manual,
• The following abbreviations are used:
APT → Analogue Proprietary Telephone
Display PT → Proprietary Telephone with a Display
DPT → Digital Proprietary Telephone
IP-PT → IP Proprietary Telephone
PS → Portable Station
P-SIP → Panasonic SIP Phone
– KX-HDV series
– KX-TGP600
– KX-NTV150 (Communication IP camera)
– KX-NTV160 (Video door phone)
– KX-UCMA (Mobile Softphone)
PT → Proprietary Telephone
SIP extension/SIP Extn. → Extensions of the PBX which uses Session Initiation Protocol for
communication.
SLT → Single Line Telephone
• "PT" is used as a generic term to represent IP-PT, DPT, APT and Display PT.
• The suffix of each model number (e.g., KX-NS700NE) is omitted.
• The following icons are used frequently.
!!
Hints
Conditions
Functional Limitation
Depending on the PBX’s software version, some features may not function. For details about which versions
support these features, consult your dealer.
Mobile Softphone (KX-UCMA) will be supported at PBX software version 005.00000 and later.
4
Operating Manual
Feature Highlights
Notice
• This PBX supports SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) phones. However, some PBX features may not be
available for SIP phones, depending on your telephone type.
• Under power failure conditions, the connected telephones may not operate. Please ensure that a
separate telephone, not dependent on local power, is available for emergency use.
• Prior to connection of this product, please verify that the intended operating environment is supported.
Satisfactory performance cannot be guaranteed for the following:
– interoperability and compatibility with all devices and systems connected to this product
– proper operation and compatibility with services provided by telecommunications companies over
connected networks
NOTES
• Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some countries/areas, or for some
PBX models. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information.
• This manual provides basic information on how you can access commonly used PBX functions with
proprietary telephones (PTs), single line telephones (SLTs), portable stations (PSs), SIP phones, and
DSS Consoles. For detailed information about each feature or setting, consult your dealer.
• In this manual, several kinds of PTs appear, as follows:
– IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
– Digital Proprietary Telephone (DPT)
– Analogue Proprietary Telephone (APT)
– Proprietary Telephone with a Display (Display PT)
"PT" is used as a generic term to represent all of these PTs. If a PBX feature only supports specific PTs,
such as IP-PTs, the available telephone types are clearly indicated.
• IP-PTs/SIP extensions may become busy and you may not be able to make or receive calls, depending
on the network status.
• The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the cover of
this manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, consult your dealer.
• Product specifications are subject to change without notice.
• The preset melodies in this product are used with permission of © 2010 Copyrights Vision Inc.
• In this manual P-SIP phones are treated as non-KX-UT series SIP phones.
Notes for SIP Phone Users
Before using a SIP phone, please read the following notes.
For All SIP phone users
A tone may not be heard during an operation depending on the type of SIP phone being used. The following
operation is an example. However, for KX-UT series SIP phones, a tone may be heard depending on the
system settings. For details, consult your administrator.
Operating Manual
5
Feature Highlights
[Example]
To use an account code (Account Code Entry)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
(Account)
account code
OR
4
D.Tone
9
Press Account or
enter 49.
Off-hook.
Enter account code
(max. 10 digits).
Enter #.
SIP phone users will not
hear this tone.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside
phone number.
Seize an outside line before
entering an outside phone number.
For KX-UT series SIP phone users
a.
Operations that use feature numbers are limited. Also, flexible buttons are only available for certain
KX-UT series SIP phone models. Refer to the telephone types displayed at the top left of each
operation.
b.
A maximum of 32 digits can be input on a KX-UT series SIP phone at one time, including feature
numbers, etc.
c.
To execute certain operations, you may be required to press the ENTER button on a KX-UT series SIP
phone during the operation.
The following 5 operations are examples.
[Examples]
To select an idle outside line automatically
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
(L-CO)
OR
0
Off-hook.
6
Operating Manual
/ 9
Press L-CO or
enter automatic
line access number.
For KX-UT series:
Press ENTER.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
Feature Highlights
To call with a verification code
PIN: Personal Identification Number
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
4
verification code PIN
verification code
Enter
47.
Enter
Off-hook.
7
.
Enter verification code
(max. 4 digits).
For KX-UT series:
Press ENTER.
desired
phone no.
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter verification code
PIN (max. 10 digits).
Dial desired
phone number.
If a wrong verification code PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
Seize an outside line before
entering an outside phone number.
To transfer to an outside party using the PBX service
For KX-UT series:
Press ENTER.
SIP Extn.
During a conversation
XFER
outside line
C.Tone
OR
*
outside
phone no.
KX-UT series
only.
HOLD
Seize outside line.
KX-UT series:
Press TRANSFER.
Other than KX-UT series:
Press HOLD.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted
(KX-UT series only).
To establish a conference call
KX-UT series
For KX-UT series:
Press ENTER.
During a conversation
C.Tone
Press CONFERENCE.
desired
phone no.
Dial desired phone
number.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
C.Tone
Talk to the
new party.
Press CONFERENCE.
Talk with multiple
parties.
For KX-UT670:
Press Conference Start.
Operating Manual
7
Feature Highlights
To set/cancel Call Forwarding
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
Both Calls
0
OR
7
1
1
2
Outside Calls
3
OR
2
Off-hook.
Enter
71.
4
Intercom Calls
5
Enter 0 to 2 as
you desire.
Cancel
All Calls
Busy
No Answer
Busy/No Answer
Enter required
number.
After entering 0 for "Cancel",
for KX-UT series:
Press ENTER.
Go on-hook
For "Cancel", go on-hook
directly after entering 0.
destination
extension no.
For KX-UT series:
Press ENTER.
OR
outside line
access no.
outside
phone no.
C.Tone
(max. 32 digits)
Enter destination extension number.
Or enter outside line access number
and then outside phone number.
Enter #.
On-hook.
For KX-UT series:
max. 26 digits
For non-KX-UT series SIP phone users
a.
The following features are available for SIP phone users:
– Making calls
– Answering calls
– Holding calls
– Transferring calls (You cannot go on-hook before the transferred party answers.)
b.
The available operations using feature numbers are limited. Refer to the telephone types displayed at
the top left of each operation.
c.
The tones listed in "5.4.1 What is This Tone?" are not available for SIP phone users. Tones or the tone
types may vary depending on the type of telephone being used. For example, when you put a call on
hold, a specific tone for the SIP phone may be heard, or no tone may be heard.
d.
Any number pressed while hearing a Busy/DND/Reorder tone, such as the feature number to activate
Automatic Callback Busy, will be ignored.
e.
The operations for SIP phones may differ from the steps in this manual, and may vary depending on
the type of telephone being used.
f.
To execute an operation, some SIP phones may require that the OK button is pressed after pressing all
the buttons of the operation.
Notes for KX-WT115 PS Users
The operation and display of the KX-WT115 may differ from KX-TCA series PSs. For example, when the
KX-WT115 is not answered while using it in parallel with a wired telephone, the display of incoming call log
is different from that of the display of KX-TCA series PSs.
Notes for KX-NT300 Series, KX-NT500 Series, and KX-UT Series Users
If the primary PBX to which your telephone is connected fails, the extension may automatically switch its
connection to a secondary PBX.
8
Operating Manual
Feature Highlights
• The time required to switch to the secondary PBX or back to the primary PBX is different depending on
the type of your telephone.
• When the extension switches its connection to the secondary PBX, your call will be disconnected if you
are on a call.
• Even if the primary PBX becomes available again, your telephone will not reconnect to it if you are on a
call.
• For KX-NT300 series and KX-NT500 series users, if background music (BGM) is being played through
your telephone while it is connected to the secondary PBX, it will not reconnect to the primary PBX when
it becomes available.
Notes for KX-NT543, KX-NT546, and KX-NT560 IP-PT Users
• While using a KX-NT543, KX-NT546, or KX-NT560 IP-PT in ECO mode, IP network transmission speed
is relatively slow and the secondary Ethernet port cannot be used. To disable ECO mode, consult your
dealer.
Trademarks
• Microsoft and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under licence.
• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
• Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
Open Source Software
This product uses Open Source Software. For details, click the Information button in Web Maintenance
Console.
Operating Manual
9
Feature Highlights
10
Operating Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Operation ............................................................................................... 15
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.1.5
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.2.8
1.2.9
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.3.6
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7
1.4.8
1.5
1.5.1
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.7
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.8
1.8.1
1.8.2
1.8.3
1.8.4
1.8.5
Before Operating the Telephones ................................................................................ 16
For Your Safety ............................................................................................................. 16
Important Safety Instructions ........................................................................................ 19
Precautions ................................................................................................................... 19
Data Security ................................................................................................................ 20
Before Operating the Telephones ................................................................................. 21
Making Calls .................................................................................................................. 30
Basic Calling ................................................................................................................. 30
Easy Dialling ................................................................................................................. 34
Redial ........................................................................................................................... 37
When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer ................................................. 38
Accessing the ISDN Service (ISDN Service Access) ................................................... 45
Alternating the Calling Method (Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice) ................................... 46
Calling without Restrictions .......................................................................................... 47
To Access Another Party Directly from Outside (Direct Inward System Access [DISA])
....................................................................................................................................... 48
Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA (Remote Setting) ... 51
Receiving Calls .............................................................................................................. 53
Answering Calls ............................................................................................................ 53
Answering Hands-free (Hands-free Answerback) ........................................................ 53
Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup) ..................................... 54
Answering a Call via an External Speaker (Trunk Answer From Any Station [TAFAS]) ....
56
Using the ANSWER/RELEASE Button ......................................................................... 56
Identifying Malicious Calling Parties (Malicious Call Identification [MCID]) .................. 58
During a Conversation .................................................................................................. 59
Transferring a Call (Call Transfer) ................................................................................ 59
Holding a Call ............................................................................................................... 65
Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting) ......................................................... 71
Answering Call Waiting ................................................................................................. 73
Multiple Party Conversation .......................................................................................... 79
Mute .............................................................................................................................. 89
Letting Other People Listen to the Conversation (Off-hook Monitor) ............................ 89
Using the Headset (Headset Operation) ...................................................................... 90
Using a PDN/SDN Button .............................................................................................. 93
Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension ...... 93
Before Leaving Your Desk ............................................................................................ 97
Forwarding Calls ........................................................................................................... 97
Showing a Message on the Caller’s Telephone Display (Absent Message) .............. 106
Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone (Extension Dial Lock) ............. 108
Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM]) ........................... 109
Making/Answering an Announcement ...................................................................... 120
Paging ........................................................................................................................ 120
Answering/Denying a Paging Announcement ............................................................ 122
Making a Conference Group Call ............................................................................... 123
Using the Unified Messaging Features ..................................................................... 131
What is the Unified Messaging system? ..................................................................... 131
Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox ............................................................... 132
Message Playback and Related Features .................................................................. 141
Sending Messages ..................................................................................................... 149
Transferring Calls ....................................................................................................... 159
Operating Manual
11
Table of Contents
1.8.6
1.8.7
1.9
1.9.1
1.9.2
1.9.3
1.9.4
1.9.5
1.9.6
1.9.7
1.9.8
1.9.9
1.9.10
1.9.11
1.9.12
1.9.13
1.9.14
1.10
1.10.1
1.10.2
1.10.3
1.10.4
1.11
1.11.1
1.11.2
1.11.3
1.11.4
1.11.5
1.12
1.12.1
1.12.2
1.13
1.13.1
1.13.2
1.14
1.14.1
1.14.2
1.14.3
1.14.4
1.15
1.15.1
Other Features ........................................................................................................... 168
Quick Reference ......................................................................................................... 185
Setting the Telephone According to Your Needs ..................................................... 189
Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder) .......................................................................... 189
Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND]) ....................................................... 190
Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]/Whisper
OHCA) ........................................................................................................................ 193
Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller’s Telephone (Calling/
Connected Line Identification Presentation [CLIP/COLP]) ......................................... 194
Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller’s Telephone
(Connected Line Identification Restriction [COLR]) .................................................... 195
Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party’s Telephone (Calling Line
Identification Restriction [CLIR]) ................................................................................. 196
Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation (Executive Busy Override
Deny) .......................................................................................................................... 196
Turning on the Background Music (BGM) .................................................................. 197
Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones (Data Line Security) ........................ 197
Checking the Time Service Status ............................................................................. 197
Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring (Parallelled Telephone) ............................. 198
Using Your PS in Parallel with a Wired Telephone (Wireless XDP Parallel Mode) .... 199
Using Your phone in Parallel with a Wired Telephone (One-numbered extension) .... 199
Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension Feature Clear) ......................... 200
Utilising the Call Centre .............................................................................................. 202
Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution Group (Log-in/Log-out, Wrap-up) ................... 202
Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group
(Incoming Call Distribution Group Monitor) ................................................................ 204
Forwarding a Waiting Call (Manual Queue Redirection) ............................................ 207
Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control ............................................................................ 207
Using User-supplied Equipment ................................................................................ 210
If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected ................................................................ 210
If an External Relay is Connected .............................................................................. 211
If an External Sensor is Connected ............................................................................ 212
If a Host PBX is Connected ........................................................................................ 212
If a Voice Processing System is Connected ............................................................... 213
Administrative Features ............................................................................................. 220
Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type Environment (Hospitality Features) ................ 220
Recording Information Using Preprogrammed Messages (Printing Message) .......... 226
Exchanging the Settings between Extensions ......................................................... 227
Walking Extension ...................................................................................................... 227
Enhanced Walking Extension ..................................................................................... 227
Using a Telephone with a Display .............................................................................. 230
Using the Call Log ...................................................................................................... 230
Using the Directories .................................................................................................. 233
Accessing System Features (System Feature Access) .............................................. 239
Self Labelling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
..................................................................................................................................... 240
Cellular Phone Features ............................................................................................. 243
Cellular Phone Features ............................................................................................. 243
2 Manager Operation ............................................................................. 247
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
12
Control Features .......................................................................................................... 248
Extension Control ....................................................................................................... 248
Time Service Mode Control ........................................................................................ 248
Restriction Level Control (Dial Tone Transfer) ............................................................ 249
Turning on the External Background Music (BGM) .................................................... 250
Operating Manual
Table of Contents
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
Recording Outgoing Messages (OGM) ...................................................................... 250
Allowing Users to Seize an Unavailable Outside Line (Trunk Busy Out) ................... 252
Releasing Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Monitor ..................................... 253
Configuring Unified Messaging Features ................................................................. 254
System Manager Features ......................................................................................... 254
Message Manager Features ....................................................................................... 267
3 Customising Your Phone & System ................................................. 285
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.2
3.2.1
Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming) ................................................. 286
Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming) .................................................... 286
Settings on the Programming Mode ........................................................................... 287
Customising the Buttons ............................................................................................. 297
System Programming Using Web Maintenance Console ........................................ 303
User Programming ..................................................................................................... 303
4 Customising Extensions and the System–for Managers ............... 329
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
Manager Programming ............................................................................................... 330
Programming Information ........................................................................................... 330
Manager Programming ............................................................................................... 330
5 Appendix ............................................................................................. 333
5.1
5.1.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.3
5.3.1
5.4
5.4.1
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
5.5.6
5.5.7
List of Operations by Telephone Type ...................................................................... 334
List of Operations by Telephone Type ........................................................................ 334
Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................... 342
Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................... 342
Feature Number Table ................................................................................................. 346
Feature Number Table ................................................................................................ 346
What is This Tone? ...................................................................................................... 357
What is This Tone? ..................................................................................................... 357
Revision History .......................................................................................................... 361
PFMPR Software File Version 004.01xxx ................................................................... 361
PFMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx ................................................................... 361
PFMPR Software File Version 004.2xxxx ................................................................... 361
PFMPR Software File Version 004.3xxxx ................................................................... 361
PFMPR Software File Version 004.4xxxx ................................................................... 361
PFMPR Software File Version 004.6xxxx ................................................................... 362
PFMPR Software File Version 006.0xxxx ................................................................... 362
Operating Manual
13
Table of Contents
14
Operating Manual
Section 1
Operation
This section shows you step by step how to use each
feature. Read this chapter to become familiar with the
many useful features of this PBX.
Operating Manual
15
1.1 Before Operating the Telephones
1.1 Before Operating the Telephones
1.1.1 For Your Safety
To prevent personal injury and/or damage to property, be sure to observe the following safety precautions.
The following symbols classify and describe the level of hazard and injury caused when this unit is
operated or handled improperly.
WARNING
This notice means that misuse could result in death
or serious injury.
CAUTION
This notice means that misuse could result in injury
or damage to property.
The following types of symbols are used to classify and describe the type of instructions to be
observed.
This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must not be
performed.
This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must be followed in
order to operate the unit safely.
WARNING
For All Telephone Equipment
• Do not allow rain to fall on the product or expose the product to moisture. Do not let water, oils, or other
liquids to splash onto the product. Such conditions can lead to fire or electric shock, and may impair the
performance of the product.
• Do not place the product on an unstable or uneven surface. If the product were to fall over, it may cause
injury or damage to the product.
• Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate the product where the power cord may be
stepped on or tripped on.
• Do not supply power to a combination of devices that exceeds the total rated capacity of the wall outlets
or extension cables used. If outlets, power strips, extension cords, etc. are used in a manner that exceeds
their rated capacity, they emit large amounts of heat, which could cause a fire.
16
Operating Manual
1.1.1 For Your Safety
• The product must only be installed and serviced by qualified service personnel. The product should be
used as-is from the time of purchase; it should not be disassembled or modified. Disassembly or
modification can cause a fire, electric shock, or damage to the product.
• Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
• Products that require a power source should only be connected to the type of electrical power supply
specified on the product label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your
dealer or local power company.
• For safety purposes some products are equipped with an earthed plug. If you do not have an earthed
outlet, please have one installed. Do not bypass this safety feature by tampering with the plug.
• Regularly clean dust off of all equipment. Excessive amounts of dust can lead to fire or electric shock,
and may impair the performance of the product.
• Unplug the product from the wall outlet and contact your dealer in the following cases:
a.
When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.
b.
If liquid has been spilled into the product.
c.
If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
d.
If the product does not operate according to the operating instructions. Adjust only the controls that
are explained in the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and may require service by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.
e.
If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
f.
If product performance deteriorates.
For the PBX
• Do not insert foreign objects of any kind into this product, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or
short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock.
• Do not pull, bend, rest objects on, or chafe the power cord and plug. Damage to the power cord or plug
can cause fire or electric shock.
• Do not attempt to repair the power cord or plug. If the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed, contact
an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre for a replacement.
• When mounting the PBX on a 19-inch rack, only use the 19-inch rack mounting equipment (attachment
bracket, screws) made for use with the PBX.
• If damage to the unit exposes any internal parts, disconnect the power supply cord immediately and
return the unit to your dealer.
• Unplug this unit from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. These
conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorised
Panasonic Factory Service Centre.
• This unit is equipped with an earthed plug. For safety reasons this plug must only be connected to an
earthed outlet that has been installed according to applicable regulations.
Operating Manual
17
1.1.1 For Your Safety
• Plug the power cord firmly into an AC outlet. Otherwise, it can cause fire or electric shock.
CAUTION
For All Telephone Equipment
• The product should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 ℃), and vibration, and
should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Unplug the product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Wipe the product with a soft cloth. Do not clean
with abrasive powders or with chemical agents such as benzine or thinner. Do not use liquid cleaners or
aerosol cleaners.
For the PBX
• When relocating the equipment, first disconnect the telecom connection before disconnecting the power
connection. When the unit is installed in the new location, reconnect the power first, and then reconnect
the telecom connection.
• The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device. Ensure that the AC outlet is located near
the equipment and is easily accessible.
• Slots and openings in the front, back and bottom of the cabinet are provided for ventilation; to protect it
from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be
blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface while in use. The product
should never be placed near or over a radiator or other heat source. This product should not be placed in
a sealed environment unless proper ventilation is provided.
• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the rack or wall.
• To protect this unit from static electricity, do not touch any external connectors of the unit.
Notice
For All Telephone Equipment
• Read and understand all instructions.
• When using a Panasonic proprietary telephone (PT), use only the correct Panasonic handset.
For the PBX
• Keep the unit away from heating appliances and devices that generate electrical noise such as
fluorescent lamps, motors and televisions. These noise sources can interfere with the performance of
the PBX.
• If you are having problems making calls to outside destinations, follow this procedure to test the
outside lines:
18
1.
Disconnect the PBX from all outside lines.
2.
Connect known working single line telephones (SLTs) to those outside lines.
3.
Make a call to an external destination using those SLTs.
Operating Manual
1.1.2 Important Safety Instructions
If a call cannot be carried out correctly, there may be a problem with the outside line that the SLT is
connected to. Contact your telephone company.
If all SLTs operate properly, there may be a problem with your PBX. Do not reconnect the PBX to the
outside lines until it has been serviced by an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre.
Note
For All Telephone Equipment
• Never attempt to insert wires, pins, etc. into the vents or holes of the product.
1.1.2 Important Safety Instructions
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the
risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
• Do not use the product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub,
in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.
• Avoid using wired telephones during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
• Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak to report the leak.
• Rack Mount Instructions—The following or similar rack-mount instructions are included with the
installation instructions:
a.
Elevated Operating Ambient—If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating ambient
temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient. Therefore, consideration
should be given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient
temperature (Tma) specified by the manufacturer.
b.
Reliable Earthing—Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained. Particular
attention should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit
(e.g., use of power strips).
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
1.1.3 Precautions
For users in the European Union only
Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries
Only for European Union and countries with recycling systems
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that
used electrical and electronic products and batteries must not be mixed with general
household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and batteries, please take
them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation.
By disposing of them correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any
potential negative effects on human health and the environment.
For more information about collection and recycling, please contact your local
municipality.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with
national legislation.
Operating Manual
19
1.1.4 Data Security
Note for the battery symbol (bottom symbol)
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it
complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.
The KX-NS700NE and KX-NS700UK are designed to interwork with the:
• Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of European countries
• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate access
• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN primary rate access
For information of Compliance with EU relevant Regulatory Directives,
Contact to Authorised Representative:
Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
1.1.4 Data Security
In order to use the PBX safely and correctly, the Security Requirements below must be observed. Failure to
do so may result in:
• Loss, leakage, falsification or theft of user information.
• Illegal use of the PBX by a third party.
• Interference or suspension of service caused by a third party.
What is User Information?
User Information is defined as:
1.
Information stored in the System Memory:
System data, error data and activation key files.
2.
Information sent from the PBX to a PC or a USB memory device:
System data, sound files for MOH (Music on Hold) and OGM (Outgoing Messages), and activation key
files.
Requirements
20
1.
The System Memory contains software for all the processes of the PBX and all the customer data.
Therefore, do not allow unauthorised access to prevent data leakage.
2.
Always make backups of data stored in the System Memory and/or perform regular system data
backups to a USB memory device or a NAS. For details, consult your dealer.
3.
To prevent illegal access from the Internet, activate a Firewall.
4.
To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, we strongly recommend:
a.
Keeping the password secret.
b.
Selecting a complex, random password that cannot be easily guessed.
c.
Changing your password regularly.
Operating Manual
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
5.
Perform the following when sending the PBX for repair or handing it over to a third party.
a.
6.
Make a backup of data stored in the System Memory.
When user information is sent from the PBX to a PC or a USB memory device, the confidentiality of
that information becomes the responsibility of the customer. Before disposing of the PC or the USB
memory device, ensure that data cannot be retrieved from it by formatting the hard disk and/or
rendering it physically unusable.
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
What Kind of Telephone Can Be Used?
You can use the following types of telephone with this PBX:
• Panasonic IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
(e.g., KX-NT300 series, KX-NT500 series)
• Panasonic Digital Proprietary Telephone (DPT)
(e.g., KX-T7600 series, KX-DT300 series, KX-DT500 series)
• Panasonic Analogue Proprietary Telephone (APT)
(e.g., KX-T7700 series)
• Panasonic Portable Station (PS)
(e.g., KX-TCA364, KX-WT115)
• SIP phone
(e.g., KX-UT series SIP phones, Third party SIP phones, P-SIP)
• Single Line Telephone (SLT)
(e.g., rotary pulse telephone)
Which features are available depend on the type of telephone being used. If you are using a Panasonic
telephone with a special feature button such as
or a display or both, you can follow the operations
using the buttons or displayed messages for easy programming. If you use a large display telephone (e.g.,
KX-NT346 or KX-T7636), you can follow the displayed messages to use the features. If your telephone does
not have feature buttons and/or a display, you may operate the PBX by entering a feature number instead.
Follow the operation for your type of telephone.
• If you use a Panasonic proprietary
telephone which does not have feature
buttons, you may change one of the
unused flexible buttons to a feature
button. Refer to "3.1.3 Customising the
Buttons".
Registration for your Portable Station (PS)/SIP Phone
Your PS or SIP phone must be registered with the PBX and assigned an extension number before initial
use, through system programming. To confirm the extension number of your PS, refer to "Your extension
information" in "3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode". For SIP phone users, follow the instructions for
your phone.
Feature Numbers
To use certain features, you need to enter specified feature numbers (and an additional parameter, if
required).
Operating Manual
21
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
There are two types of feature numbers as follows:
• Flexible feature number
• Fixed feature number
Fixed feature numbers cannot be changed. However, you can change the flexible numbers to other
numbers for easier use. In this manual, the default numbers (factory installed) are used for operations.
A flexible number is shown as
(half-shaded key). Use the new programmed number if you have
changed the feature number. Write the new number in "5.3.1 Feature Number Table" (Appendix).
Notice
The default value of a flexible feature number may vary depending on country/area.
If you use a single line telephone which does not have the " " or "#" keys;
it is not possible to access features that have " " or "#" in their feature numbers.
Tone
You will hear various tones, during or after an operation, for confirmation. Refer to "5.4.1 What is This
Tone?" (Appendix).
Display
In this manual, "the display …" refers to the display of a Panasonic telephone. If your telephone is not a
Panasonic display telephone, the message will not be displayed. If you use a Panasonic display telephone,
the display helps you confirm the settings. Some telephones also give you easy access to features.
Messages are displayed according to the feature used. By pressing the corresponding button on the side or
at the bottom of the display, or by pressing the Navigator Key, you can access various features.
Furthermore, depending on the display telephone used, you can operate features or make calls using the
displayed message. Refer to "1.14 Using a Telephone with a Display".
Notice
In this manual, the display messages are described in English.
Your Extension Number
If you use a Panasonic display proprietary telephone, you can check your own extension number on the
display. Press the TRANSFER button or Soft (S1) button while on-hook.
ECO mode
If you use a KX-NT543, KX-NT546, or KX-NT560 IP-PT in ECO mode, the "ECO" icon is shown on the
display during programming mode (refer to "3.1.3 Customising the Buttons"). For more information, consult
your dealer.
Using a Navigator Key/Jog Dial/Volume Key
The Navigator Key can be used for the display contrast and the volume control or you can search for
desired items on the display. Press the Navigator Key/Volume Key or rotate the Jog Dial in the desired
direction.
The contrast or the volume level and the items will change as follows:
22
Operating Manual
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
Navigator Key
Up
Up
Up
(Level increases)
(Level increases)
(Level increases)
Left
Right
ENTER
Left
Right
Left
Right
Down
Down
Down
(Level decreases)
(Level decreases)
(Level decreases)
Jog Dial
Volume Key
Up
Left
(anti-clockwise)
Right
(clockwise)
Level decreases
Level increases
(Level increases)
Up
(Level increases)
Down
Down
(Level decreases)
(Level decreases)
Examples
The displays and the illustrations shown as examples are from a telephone connected to the PBX.
Restrictions
Some features may be restricted at your extension depending on system programming and the type of
telephone being used.
Icon Descriptions
The following icons show you the feature availability, notes and action to use the features.
This feature cannot be used with a
single line telephone.
Seize an outside line (One of
the following).
(CO)
OR
0 /
See "Programming" for Related
Programming if necessary.
9
OR
8
outside line
group no.
• Press the CO button.
• Dial automatic line access
number 0/9.
• Dial outside line group
access number and outside
line group number.
Off-hook (One of the following).
• Lift the handset.
Press the Call button on the
Doorphone.
• Press the SP-PHONE button.
• Press the MONITOR button. (To
start talking, lift the handset.)
• Press TALK button.
Operating Manual
23
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
On-hook (One of the following).
Press the hookswitch lightly.
• Hang up.
• Press the SP-PHONE button.
• Press the MONITOR button.
• Press CANCEL button.
desired no.
Press the corresponding feature
button on the proprietary telephone
or KX-UT series SIP phone.
Talk or make an
announcement.
Enter the required number.
<Example>
You will hear a busy,
confirmation, dial, ring or
ringback tone.
B. Tone: Busy Tone
C. Tone: Confirmation Tone
D. Tone: Dial Tone
R. Tone: Ring Tone
R. B. Tone: Ringback Tone
account code
Enter the account code.
extension no.
Dial an extension number.
phone no.
Dial the telephone number.
HOLD
Press the HOLD button on your
SIP phone.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside phone number.
dial key
Press any dial key (0–9,
#).
,
REDIAL
Press the REDIAL button on
your SIP phone.
When You Use a Panasonic Proprietary Telephone or KX-UT Series SIP
Phone
Panasonic proprietary telephones and KX-UT series SIP phones have useful feature buttons that simplify
some operations. For details, refer to the "Location of Controls" or equivalent section in the documentation
for your phone.
Customised Buttons
If the term is in parentheses like (Account) in this manual, it means a flexible button has been made into an
"Account" button. For more information, refer to "3.1.3 Customising the Buttons" when using a PT or PS, or
"Customising the Flexible Buttons" when using Web Maintenance Console.
Note
For KX-UT series SIP phone users:
• KX-UT113/KX-UT123: Customised buttons are not available.
• Other than KX-UT113/KX-UT123: The following buttons can be customised:
– Single-CO (S-CO)
– Headset
– DN
– Wrap-up
– One-touch Dialling
– Call Park
– Log-in/Log-out
– Call Park (Automatic Park Zone)
– DSS
24
Operating Manual
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
Button
Feature
Loop-CO (L-CO)
Used to access an idle outside line for making outside calls.
Incoming outside calls from any outside line arrive at this button.
Group-CO (G-CO)
Used to access an idle outside line in a specified outside line group for
making outside calls.
Incoming calls from outside lines in the assigned outside line group arrive
at this button.
Single-CO (S-CO)
Used to access a specified outside line for making or receiving outside
calls.
Direct Station Selection
(DSS)
Used to access an extension with one touch.
It is also possible to be changed to the other feature button.
For KX-UT series SIP phones (except KX-UT113/KX-UT123), unlike a
One-Touch button, this type of button cannot be used to dial feature
numbers.
One-touch Dialling
Used to access a desired party or system feature with one touch.
Incoming Call Distribution
Group (ICD Group)
Used to access a specified incoming call distribution group for making or
receiving calls.
Message
Used to leave a message waiting indication or call back the party who left
the message waiting indication.
Message for Another
Extension
Used to have a Message button for another extension.
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND)—Both
calls
Used to forward all calls to a specified destination or refuse.
FWD/DND—Outside calls
Used to forward outside calls to a specified destination or refuse.
FWD/DND—Intercom calls
Used to forward intercom calls to a specified destination or refuse.
Group FWD—Both calls
Used to forward all the calls to your group to a specified destination.
Group FWD—Outside calls
Used to forward the outside calls to your group to a specified destination.
Group FWD—Intercom calls
Used to forward the intercom calls to your group to a specified
destination.
Account
Used to enter an account code.
Conference
Used to establish a multiple party conversation.
Terminate
Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without
hanging up.
External Feature Access
(EFA)
Used to access special features offered by a host PBX or a telephone
company.
Call Charge Reference
Used to check the total call charge for your own extension.
Call Park
Used to park or retrieve a call in a preset parking zone.
Operating Manual
25
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
Button
26
Feature
Call Park (Automatic Park
Zone)
Used to park a call in an idle parking zone automatically.
For KX-UT series SIP phones (except KX-UT113/KX-UT123), pressing
this button selects an idle parking zone from among the Call Park (preset
parking zone) buttons configured on the phone. Set both the Call Park
(Automatic Park Zone) button and the Call Park (Preset Parking Zone)
button.
Call Log
Used to show the incoming call information.
Call Log for ICD Group
Used to have a Call Log button for incoming call distribution group.
Log-in/Log-out
Used to switch between the log-in and log-out mode.
Log-in/Log-out of a specified
group
Used to have a Log-in/Log-out button for another incoming call
distribution group.
Log-in/Log-out for all groups
Used to have a Log-in/Log-out button for all groups.
Hurry-up
Used to transfer the longest waiting call in the queue of an incoming call
distribution group to the overflow destination.
Wrap-up
Used to switch the wrap-up status, Ready and Not Ready mode.
System Alarm
Used to confirm a PBX error.
Time Service (Day/Night/
Lunch/Break)
Used to switch the time service mode.
Answer
Used to answer an incoming call.
Release
Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation or to complete
a Call Transfer.
Toll Restriction/Call Barring
Used to change the toll restriction/call barring level of other extension
users temporarily.
ISDN Service
Used to access an ISDN service.
Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
Used to switch between the CLIP and CLIR services.
Connected Line Identification
Restriction (COLR)
Used to switch between the COLP and COLR services.
ISDN-Hold
Used to transfer a call using telephone company.
Headset
Used to talk using the headset.
Time Service Switching
Mode (Automatic/Manual)
Used to switch the time service mode, Automatic or Manual.
Two-way Record
Used to record a conversation into your own mailbox.
Two-way Transfer
Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specific extension.
One-touch Two-way Transfer
Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specific extension
with one touch.
Live Call Screening (LCS)
Used to monitor your own voice mailbox while an incoming caller is
leaving a message and, if desired, intercept the call.
Voice Mail Transfer
Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension. Also used
to access the Unified Messaging system or the voice mail features of a
VPS with one touch.
Operating Manual
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
Button
Feature
Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)
Used to access an extension connected to other PBXs in the network
with one touch.
CTI
Used to access CTI features.
Check-in
Used to switch the room status of extensions from Check-out to Checkin.
Check-out
Used to switch the room status of extensions from Check-in to Checkout.
Cleaned-up
Used to switch the room status of extensions between Ready and Not
Ready.
Primary Directory Number
(PDN)
Used to make and receive both outside and intercom calls.
Secondary Directory Number
(SDN)
Used to show the current status of another extension, call the extension,
and pick up or transfer calls to it.
Directory Number (DN)
(KX-UT series SIP phones
[except KX-UT113/
KX-UT123] only)
Used to make intercom or outside calls.
How to Follow the Steps
An example of system operation is shown below.
Operating Manual
27
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
Calling Another Extension
Feature title
To call an extension (Intercom Call)
Telephone types
The abbreviations of
telephone types
are explained in
"Telephone types in
procedures" below.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
extension no.
OR
(DSS)
Dial extension number
or press DSS.
Off-hook.
Talk.
Operation steps
The description of the
icons are explained on
"Icon Descriptions".
The DSS button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: The extension is idle.
Red on: Your or another extension is using the line.
Conditions
To call using a directory, refer to "1.14.2 Using the Directories".
For quick operation
If you are an operator or dial some extensions frequently, DSS buttons are useful.
Hints
Hands-free Operation
You can make an intercom call and have a conversation in hands-free mode using the SPPHONE button.
Customising Your Phone
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Direct Station Selection (DSS) button.
Programming References: The related or required programming is noted.
Telephone types in procedures
The following abbreviations are displayed at the top left of each procedure and indicate which types of
telephones support the operation. However, in some cases a specific model number is given instead (e.g.,
KX-UT136, KX-UT series).
Abbreviation
PT
28
Telephone Type
Proprietary Telephone (e.g., KX-NT300 series, KX-NT500 series, KX-NT265,
KX-T7700 series)
DPT
Digital Proprietary Telephone (e.g., KX-T7600 series, KX-DT300 series,
KX-DT500 series)
Display PT
Proprietary Telephone with a Display (e.g. KX-NT346, KX-NT546,
KX-DT346, KX-DT546, KX-T7636)
PS
Portable Station (e.g., KX-TCA364, KX-WT115)
SIP Extn.
SIP phone (e.g., KX-UT series SIP phones, Third party SIP phones, P-SIP)
SLT
Single Line Telephone (e.g., KX-T7710)
Operating Manual
1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
Connection Example
This diagram shows you a connection example.
Telephone Company
IP-PBX
SLT
ITSP*1
Network
Private
IP Network
Fax Machine
WAN
DCE*2
(e.g., ADSL
Modem)
Router
PC
CS
PS
Remote PC
APT DSS Console
IP-PT
External Sensor
IP Softphone,
CA*3 Client PC
Doorphone & Door Opener
SIP Phone
DPT
DSS Console
CTI Server
BGM/Music On Hold (MOH)
IP-CS
Pager/ Amplifier
Speaker
PS
Voice Processing
System
PC
*1
ITSP: Internet Telephony Service Provider
*2
DCE: Data Circuit Terminating Equipment
*3
CA: Communication Assistant
Operating Manual
29
1.2 Making Calls
1.2 Making Calls
1.2.1 Basic Calling
–
Calling Another Extension
–
Calling an Outside Party
–
Making a Call to a Private Network (TIE Line Access)
–
Using an Account Code (Account Code Entry)
Calling Another Extension
To call an extension (Intercom Call)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
extension no.
OR
(DSS)
OR
*
(SDN)
Dial extension number,
or press DSS or SDN.
Off-hook.
Talk.
• The DSS button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: The extension is idle.
Red on: Your or another extension is using the line.
• * You have to press the SDN button once or twice depending on the mode of the SDN
button. For details, refer to "1.5.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory
Number (SDN) Extension".
• To call using a directory, refer to "1.14.2 Using the Directories".
• For quick operation
If you are an operator or dial some extensions frequently, DSS buttons are useful.
• Hands-free Operation
You can make an intercom call and have a conversation in hands-free mode using the SPPHONE button.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing Select
the seized line when going off-hook.
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Direct Station Selection (DSS) button.
To call an operator (Operator Call)
You can call an extension or a group assigned as the operator.
30
Operating Manual
1.2.1 Basic Calling
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
9
OR
0
Off-hook.
Enter 9 or 0.
• The operator call number (default) varies depending on country/area.
Calling an Outside Party
You have to seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number because external calls are made
via your PBX.
Select one of the following methods:
To select an idle outside line automatically (Automatic Line Access)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
(L-CO)
OR
0
Off-hook.
/ 9
Press L-CO or
enter automatic
line access number.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
• The automatic line access number (default) varies depending on country/area.
To select an idle outside line in the specified outside line group automatically
(Outside Line Group Access)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
(G-CO)
OR
8
Off-hook.
outside line
group no.
Press G-CO or enter outside line
group access number and then
outside line group number (2 digits).
outside
phone no.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
Operating Manual
31
1.2.1 Basic Calling
To select the specified outside line
PT/PS/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
outside
phone no.
(S-CO)
Press S-CO.
Off-hook.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
• Each of the S-CO button or G-CO button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: The line is idle.
Red on: The line is in use.
• You may be restricted from making a call to the specified outside party. To make a call, refer
to "1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions".
• To confirm number before dialling, you can enter a phone number and confirm it on the
display and then go off-hook. (Predialling)
• Call Charge Reference
You can confirm your total call charges by pressing the Call Charge Reference button.
• To make a call to another party without going on-hook, press the FLASH/RECALL
button. It will re-access the outside line and provide external dial tone. Pressing the
Terminate button will provide intercom dial tone. You can dial the new phone number without
going on/off-hook.
• Hands-free Operation
You can make an outside call and have a conversation in hands-free mode using the SPPHONE button.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing Select
the seized line when going off-hook.
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Loop-CO (L-CO) button, a Group-CO (G-CO) button, a Single-CO (S-CO)
button, a Terminate button or a Call Charge Reference button.
Making a Call to a Private Network (TIE Line Access)
You can access extensions connected to other PBXs in a private network.
To call
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
extension no.
*
OR
7
Off-hook.
32
Operating Manual
private phone no.
*
Dial extension number or
enter 7 and then dial private phone number.
Talk.
1.2.1 Basic Calling
• * Which type of telephone number must be entered depends on the settings of your PBX.
To call with one touch
PT/PS
(NDSS)
Off-hook.
Talk.
Press NDSS.
• To start monitoring another PBX extension after customising an NDSS button, go offhook, press the NDSS button, and go on-hook.
The NDSS button light will show the current status as follows:
Off: The extension is idle.
Red on: The extension is busy.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) button.
Using an Account Code (Account Code Entry)
You may give a specified account code to extension users and check their telephone usage. You can specify
an account code for each client and check the call duration.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
(Account)
account code
OR
4
Press Account or
enter 49.
Off-hook.
D.Tone
9
Enter account code
(max. 10 digits).
Enter #.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside
phone number.
Seize an outside line before
entering an outside phone number.
Operating Manual
33
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
• A Panasonic proprietary telephone extension user can enter an account code during a
conversation and when hearing reorder tone after the other party hangs up.
• Account codes may use the digits "0" through "9".
• Depending on the settings of your PBX, you may be required to enter an account code to
make an outside call.
• If you enter the wrong code, press the " " key and re-enter the account code.
• For your convenience, you can store the code with the phone number in the memory (e.g.,
Speed Dialling).
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit an Account button.
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
This is convenient for frequently dialled phone numbers.
–
With a One-touch Button (One-touch Dialling)
–
Using Numbers Stored at Your Extension (Personal Speed Dialling)
–
Using Numbers Stored in the PBX (System Speed Dialling)
–
To a Preset Number by Going Off-hook (Hot Line)
–
Using a Preprogrammed Number (Quick Dialling)
With a One-touch Button (One-touch Dialling)
You can store a phone number into the flexible button for one-touch operation.
PT/PS/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
(One-touch
Dialling)
Press One-touch
Dialling.
Off-hook.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a One-touch Dialling button, store the desired phone number or feature
number.
Using Numbers Stored at Your Extension (Personal Speed Dialling)
You can store up to 100 numbers at your extension for your personal use.
34
Operating Manual
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
This feature is also known as Station Speed Dialling.
To store a phone number
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
3
Off-hook.
Enter
personal speed
dialling no.
desired
phone no.
Enter personal speed
dialling number
(2 digits).
Enter desired
phone number
(max. 32 digits).
0
30.
C.Tone
On-hook.
Enter #.
Enter outside line access number
before outside phone number.
To dial
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
personal speed
dialling no.
OR
Off-hook.
Press AUTO DIAL
or enter
.
Enter
.
Dial personal speed
dialling number (2 digits).
• To call using a directory, refer to "1.14.2 Using the Directories".
• For SIP phone users: Telephones display only personal speed dialling numbers.
Using Numbers Stored in the PBX (System Speed Dialling)
You can make calls using speed dialling numbers stored in the PBX.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
Off-hook.
Press AUTO DIAL
or enter
.
system speed
dialling no.
Dial system speed
dialling number (3 digits).
• To call using a directory, refer to "1.14.2 Using the Directories".
• For SIP phone users: Telephones display only system speed dialling numbers.
To a Preset Number by Going Off-hook (Hot Line)
You can make an outside call simply by going off-hook if you have preprogrammed your phone.
This feature is also known as Pickup Dialling.
Operating Manual
35
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
To store a phone number
PT/SLT/PS
4
7
Off-hook.
Enter
0
2
740.
Enter 2.
desired
phone no.
Enter desired
phone number
(max. 32 digits).
C.Tone
Enter #.
On-hook.
Enter outside line access number
before outside phone number.
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/PS
1
7
4
0
0
Off-hook.
Enter
740.
Set
OR
Cancel
Enter 1 to set
or 0 to cancel.
C.Tone
On-hook.
To dial
PT/SLT/PS
Off-hook.
• To call another party, dial the desired party’s phone number before the preprogrammed
number is dialled.
• You should assign the intercom line as the seized line when going off-hook. (Preferred Line
Assignment—Outgoing)
• It is possible to increase the delay before Hot Line is activated through system programming.
This can be useful if you require more time after going off-hook to dial another telephone
number or extension number.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
36
Operating Manual
1.2.3 Redial
Using a Preprogrammed Number (Quick Dialling)
You can make a call simply by pressing the preprogrammed number for quick dialling.
PT
and SLT
PT/SLT/PS/SIP
Extn.
quick dialling no.
Dial quick dialling
number (max. 8 digits).
Off-hook.
• This is a useful feature for hotels.
For example, to dial Room Service, dial the digit "3", not the full extension number.
1.2.3 Redial
This is convenient when calling the same outside party again.
–
Redialling the Last Number You Dialled (Last Number Redial)
Redialling the Last Number You Dialled (Last Number Redial)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
OR
REDIAL
Off-hook.
Press REDIAL or enter #.
• Up to 32 digits can be stored and redialled.
• After pressing REDIAL, if you hear a busy tone again, press REDIAL to retry.
• If you want to log outgoing intercom calls to the outgoing call log, consult your System
Installer.
• If you have seized a trunk, pressing the REDIAL button will be ignored if the last number you
dialled was an extension.
• Automatic Redial
To redial automatically, press the SP-PHONE button and then the REDIAL button, or press
the REDIAL button directly. It will keep trying the busy number until the called party answers
or until a specified timeout.
You can perform other tasks during dialling. To cancel, press the FLASH/RECALL button.
Some outside lines may not support this feature.
This feature is not available for the KX-T7665 or PS.
Operating Manual
37
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
–
Reserving a Busy Line (Automatic Callback Busy)
–
Setting Callback on an ISDN Line (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber [CCBS])
–
Sending a Call Waiting Notification (Call Waiting)
–
Leaving a Message Waiting Indication/Calling Back the Caller Who Left an Indication (Message
Waiting)
–
Joining an Existing Call (Executive Busy Override)
–
Monitoring Another Extension (Call Monitor)
–
To an Extension Refusing the Call (DND Override)
Reserving a Busy Line (Automatic Callback Busy)
You can set the telephone to receive callback ringing:
• when a dialled extension becomes idle.
• when your desired outside line that is in use by another extension becomes idle.
You cannot set Automatic Callback Busy for a busy party outside of the PBX.
When you answer the callback ringing:
• For an outside call: The line is seized.
• For an intercom call: The called extension starts ringing automatically.
To set (for both extension and outside line)
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a busy tone
6
C.Tone
Enter 6.
On-hook.
To answer the callback ringing from an idle extension
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a callback ringing
R.B.Tone
Off-hook.
38
Operating Manual
Talk.
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
To answer the callback ringing from an idle outside line
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a callback ringing
outside
phone no.
Off-hook.
Talk.
Dial outside phone
number.
• If you do not answer the callback ringing within 10 seconds, this feature will be cancelled.
To cancel callback ringing (Automatic Callback Busy Cancel)
PT/SLT/PS
4
6
C.Tone
Enter
Off-hook.
46.
On-hook.
Setting Callback on an ISDN Line (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber
[CCBS])
You can set the telephone to receive callback ringing when a busy called party on an ISDN line becomes
free.
When you answer the callback ringing, the called party’s telephone number is automatically dialled.
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a busy tone
6
C.Tone
Enter 6.
On-hook.
Operating Manual
39
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
To answer while hearing a callback ringing
PT/SLT/PS
Off-hook.
To cancel (CCBS Cancel)
PT/SLT/PS
4
6
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Enter
46.
On-hook.
• If you do not answer within a specified time period, this feature will be cancelled.
• Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company.
Sending a Call Waiting Notification (Call Waiting)
You can inform the called party that your call is waiting.
This feature is also known as Busy Station Signalling (BSS).
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a busy tone
1
Enter 1.
• Depending on the type of the other party’s telephone, you may be able to talk to the
other party using the speaker and the microphone (Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]), or
you can send a call announcement through the handset (Whisper OHCA), if they are having
another conversation using the handset.
Refer to "1.9.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]/
Whisper OHCA)".
• Depending on system programming and the called extension’s setting, a call waiting tone
may be sent automatically without performing the operation above.
40
Operating Manual
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
Leaving a Message Waiting Indication/Calling Back the Caller Who Left an
Indication (Message Waiting)
For an extension leaving a message waiting indication
When the called extension is busy or does not answer your call, you
can leave a notification so that the called party may call you back.
For an extension receiving a message waiting indication
As a message receiver, the Message button light or Message/Ringer
Lamp lets you know that a call has been received. If you receive
notification, you can call the caller back by a simple operation.
For an extension leaving a message waiting indication
To leave a message waiting indication
PT/SLT/PS
When the called extension is busy or does not answer
OR
C.Tone
4
On-hook.
Press MESSAGE
or enter 4.
To leave/cancel a message waiting indication
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn./KX-UT series
1
7
0
0
Off-hook.
Enter
70.
Leave
OR
Cancel
Enter 1 to leave
or 0 to cancel.
desired
extension no.
Enter desired
extension number.
C.Tone
On-hook.
For an extension receiving a message waiting indication
To check the left message and call back
PT/PS
While on-hook
Press MESSAGE
until the desired
extension appears.
Off-hook.
Talk.
To call back
Operating Manual
41
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
PT/SLT/PS
OR
7
2
0
Press MESSAGE or enter
Off-hook.
Talk.
70 and then 2.
KX-UT series
While on-hook
Off-hook.
Press MESSAGE.
Talk.
SIP Extn.
7
2
Talk.
Enter 2.
70.
Enter
Off-hook.
0
• Performing this operation after receiving multiple waiting indications will call back the
extension that left the most recent message waiting indication.
To clear message waiting indications left on your extension
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
7
Off-hook.
42
Operating Manual
Enter
0
70.
0
Enter 0.
your
extension no.
Dial your
extension number.
C.Tone
On-hook.
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
• The Message button light or Message/Ringer Lamp shows the current status as follows:
Off: No message
Red on: You have a message.
• The display shows the messages starting with the most recent call.
• At a called extension, the MESSAGE button allows you to clear message waiting indications
if you do not want to call the callers back. To clear, press the MESSAGE button and then
press the soft button. This operation cannot be performed using KX-UT series SIP phones.
• On your PT, you can establish one or more Message for Another Extension buttons. These
buttons can accept the message waiting notification of other extensions or various incoming
call distribution groups.
In other words, you can monitor the message waiting notifications of other telephones.
• A single line telephone extension user will receive a special dial tone as message waiting
notification when going off-hook.
• The message waiting lamp of a single line telephone can also let you know that you have a
message in the same way as the Message button.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Message button or Message for Another Extension button.
Joining an Existing Call (Executive Busy Override)
The preprogrammed extension can call someone who is busy on the telephone and establish a three-party
conversation. After pressing a DSS button, you can check the caller information of the call to another
extension on the display before establishing a three-party conversation.
To join an intercom call
PT/SLT/PS
Party joining the call
(DSS)
A busy tone is heard and the caller
information of the call to another
extension is displayed.
3
OR
C.Tone
(SDN)
OR
Off-hook.
extension no.
B. Tone
Talk.
Enter 3.
Press red DSS or SDN, or dial extension number.
A three-party conversation
is now established.
Parties in the conversation
During a conversation
C.Tone
Talk.
Operating Manual
43
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
To join an outside call
PT/PS
Party joining the call
(CO)
3
OR
B. Tone
C.Tone
(SDN)
Off-hook.
Press red CO or SDN.
Talk.
Enter 3.
A three-party conversation
is now established.
Parties in the conversation
During a conversation
C.Tone
Talk.
• SIP phone users cannot use this feature, but other extensions can call them using Executive
Busy Override.
• To join another conversation, you must have Executive Busy Override enabled at your
extension through COS programming.
• It is possible for an originating extension to leave a three-party conversation with an outside
party and let the two other parties talk by simply going on-hook.
For the originating extension
To talk to each party alternately
PT/PS
During a conversation
To continue
Press TRANSFER.
Talk to the
other party.
• You can also deny others the possibility of joining your conversation (Default: Allow). Refer
to "1.9.7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation (Executive Busy Override
Deny)".
Monitoring Another Extension (Call Monitor)
The preprogrammed extension can monitor another extension. After pressing a DSS button, you can check
the caller information of the call to another extension on the display. Then, you can choose to monitor the
call, if necessary.
44
Operating Manual
1.2.5 Accessing the ISDN Service (ISDN Service Access)
To monitor
PT/SLT/PS
(DSS)
A busy tone is heard and the caller
information of the call to another
extension is displayed.
OR
5
(PDN)
(SDN)
Off-hook.
Monitoring starts
C.Tone
OR
B. Tone
Enter 5.
OR
extension no.
Press red DSS, PDN, or SDN, or dial extension number.
• SIP phone users cannot use this feature, but they can be monitored by other extensions.
To an Extension Refusing the Call (DND Override)
The preprogrammed extension can call someone who has set the DND feature.
PT/SLT/PS
1
extension no.
DND Tone
Off-hook.
Dial extension
number.
R.B.Tone
Enter 1.
Talk.
• SIP phone users cannot use DND Override to call someone who has set the DND feature,
but can let other extensions call them using DND Override when the DND feature is set.
1.2.5 Accessing the ISDN Service (ISDN Service Access)
You can access services provided by the ISDN.
Operating Manual
45
1.2.6 Alternating the Calling Method (Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice)
To access
PT/PS
(ISDN Service)
OR
outside line
(ISDN Service)
Off-hook.
(If all required digits are stored.)
Seize outside line.
service code
(ISDN Service)
(Requires to dial
additional digits.)
Press ISDN service.
Or press ISDN service and then enter service code and
then press ISDN service again.
On-hook.
• Availability of features depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit an ISDN Service button.
1.2.6 Alternating the Calling Method (Alternate Calling—Ring/
Voice)
The caller can alternate the alerting method, either ring or
voice, when making an intercom call.
On the other hand, any extension can set the alerting
method, either ring or voice, when receiving an intercom call.
Ringing (Default): You can call the other party with a ring
tone.
Voice-calling: You can talk to the other party immediately
after confirmation tone.
To change the method
PT/SLT/PS
After dialling
C.Tone
Enter
46
.
Operating Manual
Talk.
Ring
Ring
Hello
OR
1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions
• Voice-calling from a SIP extension is not available.
• If the called party uses a SIP extension, single line telephone (SLT) or portable station (PS),
Voice-calling is not available.
• This feature is not available when the called party’s telephone is in the Voice Call Deny
mode.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
Select the alerting method, either ring or the other party’s voice.
1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions
–
Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension (Remote COS Access)
Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension (Remote COS Access)
You can use your calling privileges (Class of Service) at another extension. You may override restrictions
which have been set. To use this feature, an original extension number and an extension PIN (Personal
Identification Number) are required. You can make a call by entering a verification code and verification
code PIN.
To call (Walking COS)
PIN: Personal Identification Number
PT/SLT/PS
4
Off-hook.
Enter
7
47.
your
extension no.
extension no.
extension PIN
Dial your
extension number.
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
desired
phone no.
extension no.
C.Tone &
D.Tone
If a wrong extension PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
Dial desired
phone number.
Seize an outside line before
entering an outside phone number.
Operating Manual
47
1.2.8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside (Direct Inward System Access [DISA])
To call with a verification code (Verification Code Entry)
PIN: Personal Identification Number
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
4
Off-hook.
Enter
verification code PIN
7
47.
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter verification code
PIN (max. 10 digits).
If a wrong verification code PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
verification code
Enter
.
Enter verification code
(max. 4 digits).
desired
phone no.
Dial desired
phone number.
Seize an outside line before
entering an outside phone number.
1.2.8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside (Direct
Inward System Access [DISA])
–
Calling through DISA
Calling through DISA
When outside callers access extensions in the PBX, a
prerecorded message greets the caller and gives information
about how to access an extension. You do not need the
operator’s assistance.
You may be able to access system features or call an
outside party with your password depending on the security
mode.
48
Operating Manual
1.2.8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside (Direct Inward System Access [DISA])
To call an extension
From Outside Telephone
PIN: Personal Identification Number
In No Security Mode/Trunk Security Mode
DISA
phone no.
Off-hook.
desired
extension no.
R.B.Tone &
DISA message
Dial DISA
phone number.
Dial desired
extension number.
In All Security Mode *
DISA
phone no.
Off-hook.
your
extension no.
4
7
R.B.Tone &
DISA message
Dial DISA
phone number.
OR
verification
code
Enter
47.
Dial your extension number,
or enter and then verification code.
extension PIN
OR
verification code PIN
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter extension PIN or
verification code PIN (max.10 digits).
desired
extension no.
Dial desired
extension number.
Operating Manual
49
1.2.8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside (Direct Inward System Access [DISA])
To call an outside party
PIN: Personal Identification Number
From Outside Telephone
In No Security Mode
DISA
phone no.
Off-hook.
outside
phone no.
R.B.Tone &
DISA message
Dial outside phone
number.
Dial DISA
phone number.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
In Trunk Security Mode/All Security Mode*
DISA
phone no.
Off-hook.
your
extension no.
4
R.B.Tone &
DISA message
OR
verification
code
Enter
Dial DISA
phone number.
7
47.
Dial your extension number,
or enter and then verification
code.
extension PIN
OR
verification code PIN
Enter extension PIN or
verification code PIN
(max.10 digits).
C.Tone &
D.Tone
outside
phone no.
Dial outside phone
number.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
• * Callers from preprogrammed outside numbers can access the PBX through DISA without a
password (extension PIN/verification code PIN) (DISA Automatic Walking COS).
• When making an outside call using Walking COS through DISA, the CLIP number for that
call will be that of the extension seized by Walking COS.
50
Operating Manual
1.2.9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA (Remote Setting)
To retry
From Outside Telephone
To dial a different number during a conversation with an outside party or
while hearing the ringback, reorder, or busy tone
phone no.
DISA
message
Enter
.
Dial phone number.
Dial a line access number as the first
digit when calling an outside party.
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the Outside-to-Outside
Call feature of DISA.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a.
Enabling DISA security (Trunk Security or All Security).
b.
Keeping your passwords (verification code PIN/extension PIN) secret.
c.
Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
d.
Changing PINs regularly.
• Time limit
Both parties will hear an alarm tone fifteen seconds before the specified time limit. To
extend, press any dial button except .
• If Built-in Automated Attendant service is set, you can access the desired extension
simply by pressing a single digit (0–9) from the options given the prerecorded message.
1.2.9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through
DISA (Remote Setting)
You can set the following features on your telephone from another extension or through DISA.
• Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
• Changing the Log-in/Log-out Status of Extensions
• Absent Message
• Extension Dial Lock
• Time Service—Changing the Time Mode (Day/Night/Lunch/Break)
Operating Manual
51
1.2.9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA (Remote Setting)
From another extension
PT/SLT/PS
PIN: Personal Identification Number
4
Off-hook.
Enter
7
47.
your
extension no.
extension no.
extension PIN
Dial your
extension number.
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
desired
feature no.
extension no.
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Dial desired
feature number.
If a wrong extension PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
Through DISA
PIN: Personal Identification Number
From Outside Telephone
DISA
phone no.
Off-hook.
Dial DISA
phone number.
extension PIN
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
If a wrong extension PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
Operating Manual
Enter
desired
feature no.
extension no.
C.Tone &
D.Tone
52
4
R.B.Tone &
DISA message
Dial desired
feature number.
7
47.
your
extension no.
extension no.
Dial your
extension number.
1.3 Receiving Calls
1.3 Receiving Calls
1.3.1 Answering Calls
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Off-hook.
Talk.
Select one of the following methods:
· Lift the handset to receive the preferred line.
(Default: Ringing line is selected.)
· Press the SP-PHONE button.
· Press the flashing CO, INTERCOM, ICD Group, PDN, SDN, or DN button directly.
· Press the ANSWER button.
• Hands-free Operation
You can receive a call and have a conversation in hands-free mode using the SP-PHONE
button. KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248 users can have a conversation in hands-free mode
by pressing the flashing CO or DN button.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—
Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
Select the alerting method, either ring or the other party’s voice.
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit an Incoming Call Distribution Group (ICD Group), Primary Directory Number
(PDN), or Secondary Directory Number (SDN) button.
1.3.2 Answering Hands-free (Hands-free Answerback)
You can answer an incoming call without going off-hook as soon as the line is
connected. When an intercom call arrives, you will hear the caller talking without the
phone ringing. When an outside call arrives, you will hear the caller talking after a
preprogrammed number of rings. Hands-free Answerback for outside calls requires
system programming.
Operating Manual
53
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
To set/cancel
PT/KX-UT113/KX-UT123/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248
While on-hook
Press
AUTO ANS.
• PT users: The AUTO ANS button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Not set
Red on: Set
• KX-UT series SIP phone (except KX-UT670) users: When Hands-free Answerback is set,
the AUTO ANS icon appears on the display.
• PS and KX-UT670 users: Refer to the documentation for your phone.
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call
Pickup)
–
Answering a Call from Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
–
Answering a Call from Another Telephone (Call Pickup Group Monitor)
–
Denying Other People the Possibility of Picking Up Your Calls (Call Pickup Deny)
Answering a Call from Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
You can answer an incoming call that is ringing at another extension or group from your phone without
leaving your desk.
The following types of pickup are available:
Group Call Pickup: Picks up a call within your group.
Directed Call Pickup: Picks up a specified extension’s call.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
(DSS)
OR
4
0
group no.
Group
OR
4
1
extension no.
C.Tone
Directed
Talk.
Off-hook.
Press flashing DSS.
Enter 40 and then dial group number (2 digits).
Or enter 41 and then dial extension number.
Caller Information Display before Call Pickup using DSS button
Depending on system programming, you can confirm the caller information of a call to another extension
using the DSS button before picking up the call. Pressing the corresponding DSS button will call the
extension receiving the call rather than picking up the call. While hearing the busy tone, you can check the
caller information on the display. You can pick up the call by pressing the same DSS button again.
54
Operating Manual
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
PT/PS
A busy tone is heard and the caller
information of the call to another
extension is displayed.
(DSS)
Press flashing DSS.
Off-hook.
(DSS)
Press DSS again.
Talk.
• If you receive a call waiting tone, you can ask a third party to pick up your second call with
Directed Call Pickup.
Answering a Call from Another Telephone (Call Pickup Group Monitor)
Depending on system programming, PT users such as colleagues can view the caller information of a call to
another extension which belongs to the same call pickup group. The user can view the caller’s information
on the LCD while their PT is idle. You can pick up the call by pressing the ANSWER soft button.
To pickup a call
PT
While displaying monitoring information for a call pickup group
ANSWER
Press ANSWER.
Talk.
• Available telephones are as follows:
– IP-PTs*1
– DPTs*1
• While the caller information is displayed on the LCD, going off-hook will not answer the call.
*1
Except models with a single line display.
Denying Other People the Possibility of Picking Up Your Calls (Call Pickup
Deny)
You can deny or allow other people to pick up your calls.
Operating Manual
55
1.3.4 Answering a Call via an External Speaker (Trunk Answer From Any Station [TAFAS])
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
7
2
0
0
Off-hook.
Enter
720.
Deny
OR
Allow
C.Tone
On-hook.
Enter 1 to deny
or 0 to allow.
1.3.4 Answering a Call via an External Speaker (Trunk Answer
From Any Station [TAFAS])
You can be notified of incoming outside calls through an external speaker. These calls can be answered
from any extension.
Through an external speaker
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a tone
4
Off-hook.
Enter
2
42.
external pager no.
C.Tone
Dial external pager
number (1 digit).
Talk.
• You can also receive a paging announcement via a speaker with this operation.
1.3.5 Using the ANSWER/RELEASE Button
The ANSWER and RELEASE buttons are convenient for operators using headsets.
With the ANSWER button, you can answer all incoming calls.
With the RELEASE button, you can disconnect the line during or after a conversation,
or complete transferring a call.
To answer
PT
ANSWER
Press ANSWER.
56
Operating Manual
Talk.
1.3.5 Using the ANSWER/RELEASE Button
To transfer a call
PT
During a conversation
(DSS)
OR
TRANSFER
desired
phone no.
RELEASE
The called
party answers.
Press TRANSFER. Press DSS or dial desired
phone number.
Press RELEASE.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
To talk to a waiting caller
PT
While hearing a call waiting tone
ANSWER
Press ANSWER.
Talk.
To transfer an outside call to an extension with a one-touch operation
PT
During a conversation
(DSS)
The called
party answers.
Press DSS.
RELEASE
Press RELEASE.
The other party is placed on hold and the
destination extension is called immediately.
Operating Manual
57
1.3.6 Identifying Malicious Calling Parties (Malicious Call Identification [MCID])
To end a conversation
PT
During a conversation
RELEASE
Press RELEASE.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit an Answer button or a Release button.
1.3.6 Identifying Malicious Calling Parties (Malicious Call
Identification [MCID])
You can ask your telephone company to trace a malicious calling party during a conversation or after the
calling party hangs up.
You will receive the information on the malicious call later on.
To request MCID
PT/SLT/PS
During a conversation or when hearing a reorder tone after the calling party hangs up.
OR
OR
7
3
C.Tone
Press TRANSFER or
Recall/hookswitch.
Enter
7 3.
OR
Talk or on-hook.
• Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company.
58
Operating Manual
1.4 During a Conversation
1.4 During a Conversation
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
–
Transferring to an Extension in the PBX
–
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the PBX Service
–
Transferring a Call Using the ISDN Service (Call Transfer [CT]—by ISDN)
–
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the SIP Service
• You can transfer a held call without talking, and go on-hook even if the transferred party
does not answer the call.
If a transferred call is not answered within a specified time, it will ring at a preprogrammed
extension, if set, or at your extension again. If you are off-hook at that time, you will hear an
alarm tone. If an outside call is not answered within a specified time, it is automatically
disconnected.
• For users of KX-UT series SIP phones:
When using a transfer feature on a KX-UT series SIP phone, the operation is different to that
of other PTs, as follows.
– When the transferring party presses the TRANSFER button to transfer a call, the Caller ID
of the transferring party is sent to the transfer destination party.
– When pressing the TRANSFER button to transfer a call received from an outside line, if
the transfer destination is using a PT, the transferred call will be received to the
INTERCOM button. The call will be recorded as an intercom call from the transferrer, in
the transfer destination's call log.
• For users of non-KX-UT series SIP phones:
– Even if your telephone has a TRANSFER button, you cannot use it to transfer calls.
Please make sure to use the HOLD button.
– The transfer operation for SIP extension users may differ from the steps in this section,
and may vary depending on the type of telephone being used.
– Blind Transfer
Blind Transfer may be available on your phone. For details about using Blind Transfer,
refer to the documentation for your SIP phone. (This feature is not available when
transferring to an outside party using the SIP service.)
Operating Manual
59
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
Transferring to an Extension in the PBX
To transfer
PT/PS
During a conversation
(DSS)
OR
C.Tone
Press
TRANSFER.
extension no.
Press DSS or dial
extension number.
On-hook.
Talk.
This step can be omitted.
SLT
During a conversation
OR
extension no.
C.Tone
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Dial
extension number.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted.
SIP Extn.
During a conversation
XFER
*
extension no.
OR
C.Tone
HOLD
KX-UT series:
Press TRANSFER.
Other than KX-UT series:
Press HOLD.
KX-UT series
only.
Dial extension number.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted
(KX-UT series only).
• * For SIP phone users, instead of going on-hook, if you press the TRANSFER button (KX-UT
series [except KX-UT670]), Transfer Cancel button (KX-UT670) once, or the HOLD button
(non-KX-UT series) once or twice (depending on the telephone being used), you can return
to the held call. The call with the transferred party will be disconnected.
• For all types of telephone users, if the call is not transferred within a specified time, you will
hear an alarm (Transfer Recall).
60
Operating Manual
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
• For the transfer operation using an SDN button, refer to "1.5.1 Primary Directory Number
(PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension".
To transfer with one touch (One-touch Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation with an outside party
(DSS)
Press DSS.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted.
• System programming is required to use the One-touch Transfer feature during a
conversation with an extension.
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the PBX Service
Some extensions may be restricted from performing this feature.
PT/PS
During a conversation
outside line
outside
phone no.
Seize outside line.
Dial outside phone
number.
C.Tone
Press TRANSFER.
Talk.
On-hook.
Operating Manual
61
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
SLT
During a conversation
OR
outside line
C.Tone
Press Recall/hookswitch.
Seize outside line.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
On-hook.
SIP Extn.
During a conversation
XFER
C.Tone
OR
HOLD
outside line
*
outside
phone no.
KX-UT series
only.
KX-UT series:
Press TRANSFER.
Seize outside line.
Dial outside phone
number.
Other than KX-UT series:
Press HOLD.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted
(KX-UT series only).
• * For SIP phone users, instead of going on-hook, if you press the TRANSFER button (KX-UT
series [except KX-UT670]), Transfer Cancel button (KX-UT670) once, or the HOLD button
(non-KX-UT series) once or twice (depending on the telephone being used), you can return
to the held call. The call with the transferred party will be disconnected.
• Time limit
Both the caller and the transferred party will hear an alarm tone fifteen seconds before a
specified time period, and the call will be disconnected.
• To return to the held call before the destination answers, press the TRANSFER button,
the corresponding CO, ICD Group, INTERCOM, or DN button, or the hookswitch.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Direct Station Selection (DSS) button.
62
Operating Manual
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
Transferring a Call Using the ISDN Service (Call Transfer [CT]—by ISDN)
PT/PS
During a conversation
phone no.
(ISDN-Hold)
Press ISDN-Hold.
Dial phone number.
On-hook.
Talk.
This step can be omitted.
PT/PS
During a conversation
C.Tone
Press
TRANSFER.
6
Enter
2
62.
phone no.
Talk.
Dial phone number.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted.
SLT
During a conversation
C.Tone
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
6
Enter
2
62.
phone no.
Talk.
Dial phone number.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted.
• To retrieve the held call, press the TRANSFER button, Recall/hookswitch.
• Even if you go on-hook while transferring a call, it is transferred.
• After the call is transferred, the line becomes idle.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit an ISDN-Hold button.
Operating Manual
63
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the SIP Service
To transfer a call with announcement (Attended Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
outside line
outside
phone no.
Seize outside line.
Dial outside phone
number.
outside line
outside
phone no.
TRANSFER
C.Tone
Press TRANSFER.
Talk.
On-hook.
Talk.
On-hook.
SIP-Extn.
During a conversation
TRANSFER
C.Tone
KX-UT series only.
Seize outside line.
Press TRANSFER.
Dial outside phone
number.
SLT
During a conversation
C.Tone
Press Recall/hookswitch.
64
Operating Manual
outside line
Seize outside line.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
On-hook.
1.4.2 Holding a Call
To transfer a call without announcement (Blind Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
TRANSFER
6
C.Tone
Press
TRANSFER.
61.
Enter
outside
phone no.
1
Dial outside phone
number.
Enter #.
On-hook.
SLT
During a conversation
C.Tone
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
6
Enter
outside
phone no.
1
61.
Dial outside phone
number.
Enter #.
On-hook.
• The availability of this feature depends on your SIP service provider.
• You cannot return to the held call after dialling the destination’s number.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a One-touch Dialling button, store the Blind Transfer feature number.
1.4.2 Holding a Call
–
Holding
–
Holding in a System Parking Zone (Call Park)
• For users of non-KX-UT series SIP phones:
The holding operation for SIP extension users may differ from the steps in this section, and
may vary depending on the type of telephone being used.
Holding
There are two types of hold. The difference between them is that other people can retrieve your held call
(Regular Hold) or not (Exclusive Call Hold). As they can be alternated, ask your manager what the current
mode is.
Operating Manual
65
1.4.2 Holding a Call
To hold (Call Hold)
PT/PS
During a conversation
OR
5
C.Tone
C.Tone
0
On-hook.
Press HOLD, or press TRANSFER and
then enter 50.
SLT
During a conversation
5
0
C.Tone
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Enter
50.
SIP Extn.
During a conversation
OR
HOLD
Press HOLD.
66
Operating Manual
On-hook.
On-hook.
1.4.2 Holding a Call
To retrieve a call (Call Hold Retrieve)
PT/SLT/PS
At the holding extension (Call Hold Retrieve)
(CO)
OR
OR
0
5
Off-hook.
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Press flashing CO or INTERCOM,
or enter 50.
Talk.
To retrieve an outside call from another extension—only Regular Hold
(Call Hold Retrieve–Specified with a held line number)
(CO)
OR
5
Off-hook.
3
Press CO, or enter
held line no.
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Talk.
53 and then held line number (3 digits).
To retrieve an intercom call or outside call from another extension—only Regular Hold
(Call Hold Retrieve–Specified with a holding extension number)
(DSS)
5
1
OR
holding
extension no.
Off-hook.
Enter
51.
Press DSS or dial
holding extension
number.
C.Tone
Talk.
Operating Manual
67
1.4.2 Holding a Call
SIP Extn.
At the holding extension (Call Hold Retrieve)
(S-CO)
OR
(DN)
OR
OR
Off-hook.
Talk.
HOLD
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670:
Press flashing S-CO or DN.
Other than KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670:
Press HOLD.
To retrieve an outside call from another extension—only Regular Hold
(Call Hold Retrieve–Specified with a held line number)
5
Off-hook.
Enter
held line no.
3
53.
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Dial held line number (3 digits).
Talk.
To retrieve an intercom call or outside call from another extension—only Regular Hold
(Call Hold Retrieve–Specified with a holding extension number)
5
Off-hook.
68
Operating Manual
Enter
1
51.
holding
extension no.
Dial holding extension
number.
C.Tone
Talk.
1.4.2 Holding a Call
• For PT users: The CO or INTERCOM button light shows the current status as follows:
– Regular Hold mode
Flashing green slowly: Your held call
Flashing red: Another extension’s held call
– Exclusive Call Hold mode
Flashing green moderately: Your held call
Red on: Another extension’s held call
• For KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 SIP phone users: The S-CO button light
shows the current status as follows:
– Regular Hold mode
Flashing green slowly: Your held call
Flashing red: Another extension’s held call
• If a call is not retrieved within a specified time, you will hear an alarm as a reminder
(Hold Recall).
If an outside call is not answered within a specified time, it is automatically disconnected.
• Hold Mode Change (PT only)
After pressing the HOLD button, if you press the HOLD button again, the status switches
from the Regular Hold mode to the Exclusive Call Hold mode or from the Exclusive Call Hold
mode to the Regular Hold mode.
• If Automatic Call Hold has been preprogrammed, you can put the current call on hold
automatically by pressing another CO, ICD Group, INTERCOM, or DN button to make or
answer another call.
• For the Call Hold Retrieve operation using a PDN/SDN button, refer to "1.5.1 Primary
Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension".
Holding in a System Parking Zone (Call Park)
You can put a call on hold in a common parking zone of the PBX so that any extension can retrieve the
parked call. You can use this feature as a transferring feature.
A call can be put into either a specified parking zone (Specified) or any idle parking zone (Auto). If a Call
Park button and Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button have been established, you can select either way
to park by simply pressing the corresponding button.
When a call is parked automatically, or more than one call has been parked at the same time, you need to
specify the parking zone number to retrieve the required call.
To set
PT/PS/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
During a conversation
(Call Park)
Press Call Park.
Operating Manual
69
1.4.2 Holding a Call
PT/PS
During a conversation
parking zone no. Specified
5
2
OR
C.Tone
Auto
On-hook.
Press TRANSFER.
Enter
52.
Enter a specified parking
zone number (2 digits) or press
to park at an idle parking zone
automatically.
If you hear a busy tone, enter another
parking zone number or press again.
SLT
During a conversation
OR
5
Enter
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
parking zone no.
2
52.
C.Tone
Enter a specified parking
zone number (2 digits).
If you hear a busy tone, enter another
parking zone number.
To retrieve (Call Park Retrieve)
PT/PS/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
(Call Park)
Press a flashing Call Park.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
5
Off-hook.
70
Operating Manual
Enter
2
52.
stored parking
zone no.
Dial stored parking
zone number (2 digits).
C.Tone
Talk.
On-hook.
1.4.3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
• If a call is parked automatically, confirm the parking zone number on the display.
• If a call is not retrieved within a specified time, you will hear an alarm as a reminder (Call
Park Recall).
If an outside call is not answered within a specified time, it is automatically disconnected.
• For SIP phone users: Any SIP phone user can retrieve a parked call, but only KX-UT133/
KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 SIP phone users can put a call into a parking zone.
• The Call Park button light shows the current status as follows:
Flashing red (for PT): You or another extension has a call parked.
Flashing red (for KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670): Another extension has a
call parked.
Flashing green (for KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670): You have a call parked.
• If you hear a reorder tone when retrieving a parked call, there is no held call. Confirm the
stored parking zone number.
• After you park a call, you can perform other operations.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Call Park button or Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button.
1.4.3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
When talking to one party while the other party is on hold, you can swap the calls back and forth
(alternately).
• KX-UT series SIP phone users: You cannot leave the conversation and let the two remaining
parties talk.
To alternate between the parties leaving one party on hold temporarily
PT/PS/KX-UT series
During a conversation
(DSS)
XFER
XFER
OR
C.Tone
Press TRANSFER.
extension no.
Press DSS or dial the other
party's extension number.
Talk to the
other party.
Press TRANSFER.
For KX-UT670:
Press Swap.
Talk to the
original party.
The other party will be on hold.
Operating Manual
71
1.4.3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
SLT
During a conversation
OR
OR
extension no.
C.Tone
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Dial the other party's
extension number.
Talk to the
other party.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Talk to the
original party.
The other party will be on hold.
KX-UT113/KX-UT123
During a conversation
extension no.
C.Tone
Press HOLD.
Dial the other
party's extension
number.
Talk to the
other party.
Press HOLD.
Talk to the
original party.
The other party will be on hold.
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
During a conversation
extension no.
C.Tone
Press HOLD.
Dial the other
party's extension
number.
Talk to the
other party.
Press HOLD.
This step can be omitted if Automatic
Call Hold is enabled on your telephone.
(DN)
OR
(S-CO)
Press the flashing DN
or S-CO.
Talk to the
original party.
The other party will be on hold.
72
Operating Manual
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
To leave the conversation and then let the two parties talk
PT/PS
During a conversation
(DSS)
OR
C.Tone
Press TRANSFER.
extension no.
Press DSS or dial the other
party's extension number.
Talk to the
other party.
Press TRANSFER.
On-hook.
SLT
During a conversation
OR
OR
extension no.
C.Tone
Dial the other party's
extension number.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Talk to the
other party.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
On-hook.
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
–
Answering Call Waiting in the PBX
–
Answering Call Waiting from the Telephone Company
Answering Call Waiting in the PBX
During a conversation, a call waiting tone or voice announcement through the speaker or the handset
occurs when an outside call has been received or another extension is letting you know a call is waiting. You
must activate this feature to use it. (Default: Disable—No call [Intercom calls]/No tone [Outside calls])
You can answer the second call by disconnecting (1) or holding (2) the current call.
1. To disconnect the current call and then talk to the new party
PT/SLT/PS/KX-UT series
While hearing a tone
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Talk to the
new party.
Operating Manual
73
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
2. To hold the current call and then talk to the new party
PT/PS
While hearing a tone
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
Press HOLD.
Talk to the
new party.
OR
Disregard this step if both
parties are extensions.
Press CO, ICD Group, PDN,
SDN, or INTERCOM.
SLT
While hearing a tone
0
5
C.Tone
Press Recall/hookswitch.
Enter
50.
KX-UT113/KX-UT123
While hearing a tone
C.Tone
Press HOLD.
74
Operating Manual
Talk to the new party.
Talk to the
new party.
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
While hearing a tone
(DN)
C.Tone
OR
(S-CO)
Press HOLD.
Talk to the new party.
Press the flashing DN,
or S-CO.
After talking to the new party (second call), you can disconnect (2.1) or hold (2.2) it and then retrieve
the first call.
2.1 To disconnect the second call and then talk to the original party
PT/PS
During a conversation
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
On-hook.
Off-hook.
OR
Talk to the
original party.
Press CO, ICD Group, PDN,
SDN, or INTERCOM.
KX-UT113/KX-UT123
During a conversation
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Press HOLD.
Talk to the
original party.
Operating Manual
75
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
During a conversation
(DN)
OR
(S-CO)
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Talk to the
original party.
Press the flashing DN or S-CO.
PT/SLT/PS
During a conversation
0
5
C.Tone
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Enter
50.
Talk to the
original party.
2.2 To hold the second call and then talk to the original party
After holding it, you can talk to the original party. Then, you can disconnect it and then talk to the new party
again.
76
Operating Manual
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
PT/PS
During a conversation
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
Press HOLD.
Talk to the
original party.
OR
Press CO, ICD Group, PDN,
SDN, or INTERCOM.
Disregard this step if both
parties are extensions.
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Talk to the
new party.
(SDN)
OR
Press CO, ICD Group, PDN,
SDN, or INTERCOM.
KX-UT113/KX-UT123
During a conversation
Press HOLD.
Talk to the
original party.
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Press HOLD.
Talk to the
new party.
Operating Manual
77
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
During a conversation
(DN)
OR
(S-CO)
Press HOLD.
Press the flashing DN or S-CO.
Talk to the
original party.
(DN)
OR
(S-CO)
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Press the flashing DN or S-CO.
Talk to the
new party.
SLT
During a conversation
0
5
C.Tone
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Enter
Talk to the
original party.
50.
5
0
C.Tone
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Enter
50.
Talk to the
new party.
• Depending on the type of your telephone, you may be able to talk to the other party using
the speaker and the microphone (Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]), or you can receive
an announcement through the handset (Whisper OHCA) if you are having a conversation
using the handset.
Refer to "1.9.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]/
Whisper OHCA)".
• The caller’s name or number is displayed for five seconds in fifteen second intervals while
waiting to be answered.
78
Operating Manual
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Call Waiting Tone Type Selection
If you select "Tone 1", you will hear the same tone for Call Waiting from an outside party and
an extension. If you select "Tone 2", you will hear different tones for Call Waiting from an
outside party and an extension.
15 s
Default
(Tone 1)
5s
Special Tones
(Tone 2)
OR
• Only tone 1 is available for KX-UT series SIP phones.
Answering Call Waiting from the Telephone Company
This is an optional telephone company service. You can receive a call waiting tone and the caller’s
information. For details, consult your telephone company.
PT/PS/KX-UT series
While hearing a tone
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a tone
OR
OR
OR
6
0
(EFA)
Press FLASH/RECALL
or EFA.
Press TRANSFER
or Recall/hookswitch.
Enter
60.
• To return to the original party, repeat the operation.
• In this case, the FLASH/RECALL button on a proprietary telephone or KX-UT series SIP
phone must be set to External Feature Access (EFA) mode through system programming.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit an External Feature Access (EFA) button.
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
–
Adding Other Parties during a Conversation (Conference)
–
Leaving a Conference (Unattended Conference)
–
Leaving a Conference (Leaving Three-party Conference)
–
Letting a Third Party Join Your Call (Privacy Release)
Operating Manual
79
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
–
Adding a Third Party during a Conversation Using the ISDN Service (Three-party Conference
[3PTY]—by ISDN)
Adding Other Parties during a Conversation (Conference)
You can add one or more parties to your conversation.
• For KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 SIP phone users:
When you press the CONFERENCE/CONF/Conference button for the first time to establish
a conference call, the DN/S-CO button for the call will turn off and a new DN button will light
green for the conference call. Even if you add more parties, only the newly lit DN button is lit
up for the call.
To establish a conference call
PT/PS
During a conversation
desired
phone no.
OR
C.Tone
Press CONF
or TRANSFER.
Dial desired phone
number.
C.Tone
Talk to the
new party.
Press CONF.
Talk with multiple
parties.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
KX-UT series
During a conversation
C.Tone
Press CONFERENCE.
desired
phone no.
Dial desired phone
number.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
80
Operating Manual
C.Tone
Talk to the
new party.
Press CONFERENCE.
For KX-UT670:
Press Conference Start.
Talk with multiple
parties.
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation
desired
phone no.
Press TRANSFER.
Dial desired
phone number.
3
Talk to the
new party.
Press TRANSFER.
C.Tone
Enter 3.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
Talk with multiple parties.
SLT
During a conversation
desired
phone no.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Dial desired
phone number.
3
Talk to the
new party.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
C.Tone
Enter 3.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
Talk with multiple parties.
Operating Manual
81
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
To establish a conference call when receiving a call from an outside party during a
two-party conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation
(CO)
OR
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
Press the flashing
CO, PDN, or SDN.
Press HOLD.
Talk to the
new party.
Press CONF
or TRANSFER.
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
C.Tone
OR
OR
(SDN)
3
OR
Press the flashing CO, ICD Group,
PDN, SDN, or INTERCOM
corresponding to the original party.
Talk to the
original party.
Press CONF, or press
TRANSFER and then enter 3.
Talk with
multiple parties.
To add four or more parties to a conference
PT/PS/KX-UT series
During a conversation
To continue
desired
phone no.
Press CONF.
Dial desired
phone number.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
82
Operating Manual
C.Tone
Talk.
Press CONF.
For KX-UT670:
Press Conference Start.
Talk.
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
To add another party on hold to a conference
PT/PS
During a 3- to 7-party conference
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
C.Tone
(PDN)
OR
Press CONF.
(SDN)
Press CONF.
Talk with
multiple parties.
Press the flashing CO, ICD Group,
PDN, or SDN corresponding to
the party on hold.
To talk to two parties alternately in a three-party conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation
Press TRANSFER.
SLT
During a conversation
Press Recall/hookswitch.
Operating Manual
83
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
To disconnect one party and then talk to the other in a three-party conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
Press TRANSFER once
or twice to establish a
conversation with the
party to be disconnected.
Press FLASH/RECALL.*
The other party will be put on hold.
(SDN)
Talk.
OR
Press the flashing CO, ICD Group,
PDN, SDN, or INTERCOM
corresponding to the party on hold.
• * In this case, the FLASH/RECALL button on a proprietary telephone must be set to Flash/
Recall mode through system programming.
• During a three-party conversation, pressing the TRANSFER button or Recall/hookswitch
alternates between the other parties in the conversation.
• You can have a conference with a maximum of eight parties (comprising intercom or outside
lines) simultaneously.
• During a conversation involving four or more parties, you cannot disconnect one party and
maintain the conversation with the other parties.
• Non-KX-UT series SIP phone users cannot originate a conference call, but can be added as
a member.
• When a KX-UT series SIP phone user originates a conference call and one of the other
parties leaves the conference, the KX-UT series SIP phone user will still be able to talk to
the remaining party but will not be able to hold the call.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Conference button.
Leaving a Conference (Unattended Conference)
The person who originated a conference can leave the conference, and allow the
other parties to continue the conversation.
• KX-UT series SIP phone users: If you originated a conference, you cannot leave the
conference and allow the other parties to continue the conversation. When you go on-hook,
the conference is terminated and the other parties are disconnected.
84
Operating Manual
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
To leave a conference
PT/PS
During 3- to 7-party conference
Press CONF.
On-hook.
To return while others are talking
PT/PS
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
OR
Press flashing green CO, ICD Group, PDN, SDN, or INTERCOM.
To complete a conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation
On-hook.
• Time limit
Both parties will hear an alarm tone before a specified timeout. The originating extension
user will hear an alarm tone before timeout. The call is disconnected when the timer runs out
unless the originating extension returns to the conference.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Conference button.
Leaving a Conference (Leaving Three-party Conference)
The person who originated a conference with two other parties can leave the conference, and allow the
other parties to continue the conversation.
Operating Manual
85
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
To leave a conference involving at least one other extension
PT/SLT/PS/KX-UT series
During a three-party conference
On-hook.
To leave a conference involving two outside parties
PT/PS
During a three-party conference
Press TRANSFER.
On-hook.
SLT
During a three-party conference
Press Recall/hookswitch.
On-hook.
• To leave a conference call involving two outside parties and have the conversation continue,
your extension must be enabled to transfer calls to outside lines through COS programming.
Letting a Third Party Join Your Call (Privacy Release)
You can let a third party join your current outside call and establish a three-party
conversation. You can also leave the conversation and then let the two other parties
talk.
86
Operating Manual
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
To let a third party join your conversation and establish a three-party conversation
PT/PS
Your extension (on the outside call)
Wait for an answer.
To prolong, press
the S-CO again.
(S-CO)
C.Tone
Press green
S-CO.
Other extension
Talk.
The S-CO button will flash
at all extensions that have
that S-CO button.
A three-party conversation
is now established.
(S-CO)
C.Tone
Press the flashing
S-CO within 5 seconds.
Talk.
Off-hook.
• Only an S-CO button can be used for this operation.
• You can leave a three-party conversation and let the two other parties talk by simply going
on-hook.
Adding a Third Party during a Conversation Using the ISDN Service (Threeparty Conference [3PTY]—by ISDN)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(ISDN-Hold)
Press ISDN-Hold.
desired
phone no.
Dial desired phone
number.
C.Tone
Talk to the
new party.
Press CONF.
Talk with multiple
parties.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
Operating Manual
87
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation
6
C.Tone
Enter
Press TRANSFER.
desired
phone no.
2
62.
Talk to the
new party.
Dial desired
phone number.
Press TRANSFER.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
3
C.Tone
Enter 3.
Talk with multiple parties.
SLT
During a conversation
6
desired
phone no.
2
C.Tone
Enter
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
62.
Dial desired
phone number.
Seize an outside line before
dialling an outside phone number.
3
Enter 3.
88
Operating Manual
C.Tone
Talk with multiple parties.
Talk to the
new party.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
1.4.6 Mute
To complete a conversation
PT/SLT/PS
During a conversation
On-hook.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit an ISDN-Hold button.
1.4.6 Mute
You can disable the microphone or the handset to consult privately with others in the
room while listening to the other party on the phone through the speaker or the
handset.
To set/cancel
PT/KX-UT series
During a conversation
VOICE CALL
OR
OR
MUTE
Press MUTE.
• The AUTO ANS/MUTE or VOICE CALL/MUTE button light for PTs, or the SP-PHONE button
light for KX-UT series SIP phones shows the current status as follows:
Off: Normal
Flashing red: Mute
• If mute is used during OHCA, it will become Handset Mute.
• PS users: Refer to the documentation for your phone.
1.4.7 Letting Other People Listen to the Conversation (Off-hook
Monitor)
You can let other people in the room listen to the conversation through the speaker
while continuing the conversation using the handset.
Operating Manual
89
1.4.8 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)
To set/cancel
PT/KX-UT series
During a conversation using the handset
Press SP-PHONE.
• The SP-PHONE button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: The voice is heard through the handset.
On: The voice is heard through the speaker and the handset.
• This feature requires system programming.
• Hands-free operation
You can have a conversation in hands-free mode using the SP-PHONE button. You can
perform other tasks simultaneously.
• Helpful hints for hands-free operation:
– If it is difficult to hear the other party’s voice,
Increase the volume using the Navigator Key, Jog Dial, or Volume Key.
– If the other party has difficulty hearing you,
Decrease the volume.
– If the other party reports that your voice echoes,
Use the telephone in a room that has curtains, carpeting or both.
– If parts of the conversation cannot be heard,
If you and the other party speak at the same time, parts of your conversation may be lost.
To avoid this, try to speak alternately.
1.4.8 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)
You can have a conversation using a headset.
In this case, you must select "Headset on" in programming mode or set the Headset
button on (red) in advance. However, for the KX-UT113/KX-UT123, Headset mode is
enabled automatically when a headset is connected to the headset jack of the telephone.
This feature is also known as Handset/Headset Selection.
To talk using the headset
PT/KX-UT series
Press SP-PHONE.
90
Operating Manual
1.4.8 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)
To use the handset during a conversation using the headset
PT/KX-UT series
Off-hook.
To talk in hands-free mode during a conversation using the headset
PT/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
(Headset)
Press red Headset.
• The Headset button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Headset mode off
Red on: Headset mode on
• This feature is not available for the KX-T7665.
• For KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT560/KX-DT343/KX-DT346/KX-UT248
telephone users:
– With KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT560/KX-DT343/KX-DT346/KX-UT248
telephones, you can use a Bluetooth wireless headset registered on your extension as a
headset.
– Operating Distance
Please keep the telephones with connected Bluetooth Modules, 3 m or more apart from
each other. Also, if a Bluetooth headset is in use near a telephone with a connected
Bluetooth Module, other than the one it is registered to, noise may be heard. Move away
from the telephone and closer to the one it is registered to, to improve the signal.
– Noise
Signals are transmitted between this module and the Bluetooth headset using radio
waves. For maximum distance and noise free operation, it is recommended that the
module is situated away from electrical appliances such as faxes, radios, PCs, or
microwaves.
• Systems using the 2.4GHz ISM (Industrial, Scientific and Medical) band may interfere
with this product. Examples of such systems are cordless telephones, wireless LAN,
Home RF, microwave ovens and other ISM devices. These systems may cause minor
noise.
Operating Manual
91
1.4.8 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)
• For KX-UT248 and KX-NT560 users:
– You may not be able to use all of the functionality available on a Bluetooth headset. For
example, redialling will not work with a REDIAL button on a Bluetooth headset, and,
during hands-free mode, you cannot switch the call to the Bluetooth headset through
headset operation.
• For KX-NT500 series (except KX-NT551), KX-DT543, KX-DT546, KX-UT133, KX-UT136,
KX-UT248, and KX-UT670 telephone users:
– You can use Electric Hook Switch (EHS) headsets. For the latest information about
headsets that have been tested with this unit, consult your dealer.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Headset Operation
Select the equipment to use.
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Headset button.
92
Operating Manual
1.5 Using a PDN/SDN Button
1.5 Using a PDN/SDN Button
1.5.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory
Number (SDN) Extension
Primary Directory Number (PDN) buttons and Secondary Directory Number (SDN)
buttons are useful when extension users will handle calls for other extensions. For
example, a secretary or multiple secretaries can handle calls and check the call status
of a boss or multiple bosses. The functions of PDN and SDN buttons are as follows:
PDN button: This button can be used to make and receive all calls (including both
outside and intercom calls). Having multiple PDN buttons allows multiple calls to be
queued at the extension. Extensions that have a PDN button are called PDN
extensions.
SDN button: The light of an SDN button displays the current call status of the
registered extension, similar to a DSS button. In addition, this button can be used to
perform the following operations:
• call the PDN extension (
SDN Direct Dial)
• answer calls ringing at the PDN extension
• hold calls and retrieve calls held by the PDN extension (
Call Hold and Call
Hold Retrieve)
• transfer calls to the PDN extension (
Call Transfer Using SDN Button)
Extensions that have an SDN button are called SDN extensions.
• The extension that is registered as the destination of an SDN button must have at least one
PDN button.
• One extension can have up to 8 PDN buttons.
• An extension can have only one SDN button for each PDN extension.
• The button light of each PDN/SDN button shows the current status as follows:
Light Pattern
Off
PDN Button Status
SDN Button Status
The PDN extension is idle.
Green on
The extension is on a call using the PDN
button.
The extension is on a call using an
SDN button.
Flashing green
slowly
A call is on hold at the PDN extension
(Regular Hold).
A call answered with the SDN button is
on hold (Regular Hold).
Flashing green
moderately
A call is on hold temporarily or on Exclusive
Call Hold.
A call answered with the SDN button is
on hold temporarily or on Exclusive
Call Hold.
Flashing green
rapidly
The PDN extension is receiving an
incoming call.
An SDN extension is receiving a Hold
Recall or callback ringing from a call
answered with the SDN button.
Red on
A corresponding SDN extension is using the
line.
The corresponding PDN extension or
another corresponding SDN extension
is using the line.
Operating Manual
93
1.5.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Light Pattern
PDN Button Status
SDN Button Status
Flashing red
slowly
A corresponding SDN extension is holding a
call.
Another corresponding SDN extension,
or the PDN extension itself, is holding a
call.
Flashing red
rapidly
The PDN extension is receiving an
incoming call to an incoming call distribution
(ICD) group.
The corresponding PDN extension is
receiving an incoming call.
SDN Direct Dial
Using an SDN button, you can easily call the corresponding PDN extension. SDN buttons are in one of two
modes depending on system programming, and the operation procedure differs as follows:
Enhanced DSS Key Mode
PT/PS
(SDN)
Off-hook.
Talk.
Press corresponding
SDN.
Standard SDN Key Mode
PT/PS
(SDN)
Off-hook.
D.Tone
Press corresponding
SDN.
(SDN)
Press the SDN again.
Talk.
• When performing SDN Direct Dial to call the corresponding PDN extension, the SDN button
light shows the current status of the destination extension as follows:
Green on: You are using the line.
Red on: The line is being used. (The PDN extension, or another SDN extension when
multiple extensions have SDN buttons to a same PDN extension, is using the line.)
• Even if a PDN extension has set Do Not Disturb (DND), you can call the extension as normal
by pressing the SDN button.
• When an SDN button is in Standard SDN Key Mode, you can dial a telephone number while
hearing a dial tone, instead of pressing the SDN button again. Depending on system
programming, your call will be made using either your normal calling privileges (Class of
Service) or those of the corresponding PDN extension (SDN Walking COS).
Call Hold and Call Hold Retrieve
You can put calls answered with a PDN or SDN button on hold normally (→1.4.2 Holding a Call).
94
Operating Manual
1.5.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
You can also retrieve a call held at your extension/another extension with a simple operation, regardless of
the call type.
Call Hold Retrieve
PT/PS
To retrieve a call at the holding extension
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
Off-hook.
Press flashing green
PDN or SDN.
Talk.
To retrieve a call from another extension—only Regular Hold
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
Off-hook.
Press flashing red
PDN or SDN.
Talk.
• If a call is not retrieved within a specified time, you will hear an alarm as a reminder
(Hold Recall).
If an outside call is not answered within a specified time, it is automatically disconnected.
• If Automatic Call Hold has been preprogrammed, you can put the current call on hold
automatically by pressing another PDN button to make or answer another call.
Call Transfer Using SDN Button
You can transfer a call to a PDN extension with a simple operation using a corresponding SDN button.
Operating Manual
95
1.5.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
To transfer a call to a PDN extension
PT/PS
During a conversation
*
(SDN)
Press SDN.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted.
• System programming is required to use this feature during a conversation with an extension.
• * When an SDN button is in Standard SDN Key Mode, you have to press the SDN button
twice to transfer the call, unless you used that SDN button to answer an incoming call.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Primary Directory Number (PDN) or Secondary Directory Number (SDN)
button.
96
Operating Manual
1.6 Before Leaving Your Desk
1.6 Before Leaving Your Desk
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
–
Forwarding Your Calls (Call Forwarding [FWD])
–
FWD/DND Settings Using Fixed FWD/DND Button
–
Forwarding Your Calls Using ISDN Service (Call Forwarding [CF]—by ISDN)
Forwarding Your Calls (Call Forwarding [FWD])
You can have your incoming calls forwarded to a specified
destination.
All Calls:
All calls are forwarded. Preset extensions may also forward
from their own receiving group.
Busy:
All calls are forwarded when your extension is busy.
No Answer:
All calls are forwarded when you do not answer the call
within a specified time period.
Busy/No Answer (BSY/NA):
All calls are forwarded when you do not answer within a
specified time period or when your extension is busy.
Follow Me (From):
If you fail to set the above-mentioned "All Calls" to forward
before you leave your desk, you can set the same feature
from the destination extension.
• Incoming calls can be forwarded up to four times.
• You can set the UM group’s floating extension number as a forward destination.
• You can set the floating extension number of a voice mail group or the SVM feature as a
forward destination.
• You can set your cellular phone as the forward destination.
• Boss & Secretary feature
The extension which has been set as the destination can call the forwarding extension.
<Example>
Call
Forwarding
extension
Forward
set
destination
Operating Manual
97
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
Both Calls
0
OR
7
1
1
2
Outside Calls
3
OR
2
Off-hook.
71.
Enter
4
Intercom Calls
5
Enter 0 to 2 as
you desire.
Cancel
All Calls
Busy
No Answer
Busy/No Answer
Enter required
number.
For "Cancel", go on-hook
directly after entering 0.
destination
extension no.
OR
outside
phone no.
outside line
access no.
C.Tone
(max. 32 digits)
Enter destination extension number.
Or enter outside line access number
and then outside phone number.
On-hook.
Enter #.
To set Follow Me from another extension
PT/SLT/PS
0
Both Calls
OR
7
1
1
2
Off-hook.
Enter
your
extension no.
Dial your
extension number.
Outside Calls
OR
71.
7
8
Follow Me
Follow Me Cancel
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as
you desire.
Enter 7 or 8.
C.Tone
On-hook.
• When using a proprietary telephone, you can set or cancel Call Forwarding by pressing the
FWD/DND button (fixed button) instead of " 710".
When using a KX-UT series SIP phone (except KX-UT670), you can also press the
FWD/DND button and then press up or down with the Navigator Key to set or cancel Call
Forwarding for all calls. For KX-UT670, there is no physical FWD/DND button on the phone.
For details, refer to the documentation for your phone.
98
Operating Manual
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To set the timer for "No Answer" and "Busy/No Answer"
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
7
1
time
3
C.Tone
Enter
Off-hook.
713.
On-hook.
Enter time
(seconds [2 digits]).
To set/cancel (Call Forwarding [FWD] for your Incoming Call Distribution Group)
ICD Group: Incoming Call Distribution Group
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
4
Both Calls
1
OR
7
1
5
Outside Calls
OR
6
Off-hook.
Enter
71.
Set
ICD Group
extension no.
OR
0
Cancel
Intercom Calls
Enter 4 to 6 as
you desire.
Enter 1 to set
or 0 to cancel.
Enter ICD Group
extension number.
For "Cancel", go on-hook
directly after entering ICD
Group extension number.
destination
extension no.
OR
outside line
access no.
outside
phone no.
C.Tone
(max. 32 digits)
Enter destination extension number.
Or enter outside line access number
and then outside phone number.
Enter #.
On-hook.
• For KX-UT series SIP phones (except KX-UT670), when Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb
is enabled, FWD/DND appears on the display in stand-by mode. For KX-UT670, when Call
Forwarding or Do Not Disturb is enabled, a status icon appears on the display. For details,
refer to the documentation for your phone.
• The FWD/DND button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Both features are not set.
Red on: FWD mode
Flashing red slowly: DND mode
For KX-UT series SIP phones, you can see the current status on the display.
• The Group FWD button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: No set
Red on: FWD mode
Operating Manual
99
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
• The system has two modes: (1) FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode and (2) FWD/DND Setting
Mode. Ask your manager what mode your system is in if you are not sure.
For KX-UT series SIP phones, only FWD/DND Setting Mode is supported.
(1) When in FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode:
Pressing the FWD/DND button (fixed button) while in idle status will cycle the setting as
shown below:
FWD
DND
Off
(2) When in FWD/DND Setting Mode:
Pressing the FWD/DND button (fixed button) while in idle status allows you to switch the
FWD/DND status and set the FWD destination (refer to "
FWD/DND Settings Using
Fixed FWD/DND Button").
Note
A FWD/DND button (customised button) is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode: the
mode cannot be changed.
• Transferred outside calls are also forwarded to the destination assigned for outside calls.
• When intercom calls are set to be handled differently from outside calls (forwarding type,
forward destination), we recommend establishing buttons for both FWD/DND—Outside calls
and FWD/DND—Intercom calls, and/or Group FWD—Outside calls and Group FWD—
Intercom calls, because:
a.
the light patterns of the FWD/DND—Both calls button (including FWD/DND button
[fixed button]) and the Group FWD—Both calls button will indicate the setting for either
outside calls or intercom calls, but not both.
Note
The FWD icon on PS display reflects the setting for outside calls only.
b.
pressing the FWD/DND—Both calls button (including FWD/DND button [fixed button])
or the Group FWD—Both calls button will not change the FWD or DND mode for
intercom calls and outside calls separately.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit FWD/DND (Both calls, Outside calls, Intercom calls) buttons, or Group FWD
(Both calls, Outside calls, Intercom calls) buttons.
Remote FWD Settings Using Group FWD Button
Using a proprietary telephone (PT), you can easily switch the FWD status of another
phone. First, the extension that will allow remote forwarding operation must specify an
extension to perform remote forwarding. Then, the extension to perform remote
forwarding can assign a Group FWD button for this purpose. The forwarding status of
the target extension can be checked via the LED of the button. This feature allows
users to forward calls to themselves from another extension.
100
Operating Manual
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To set/cancel (Remote FWD setting)
PT
On the other
extension
While on-hook
(Group FWD)
The forwarding status of the
target extension changes
accordingly.
FWD status
changed remotely
Press Group FWD.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit Group FWD (Both calls, Outside calls, Intercom calls) buttons.
FWD/DND Settings Using Fixed FWD/DND Button
Using a proprietary telephone (PT) or KX-UT series SIP phone (except KX-UT670),
you can easily switch the FWD/DND status, and set the forward destination for
outside/intercom calls with the FWD/DND button (fixed button). For PT users, it is also
possible to set outside telephone numbers (e.g., your cellular phone) as forward
destinations for up to 4 Virtual PSs* in an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group, to
ring together with other ICD Group members for calls to the group.
The following settings are available:
• Switching the FWD/DND status and setting FWD destination for outside/intercom calls
• Timer for "No Answer" and "Busy/No Answer"
• Forwarding status (on/off) and outside destinations to ring in parallel for outside calls for up to 4 virtual
PSs in an ICD Group
* Virtual PS
A virtual PS is a dedicated
extension number assigned to a
non-existent portable station
(PS) to allow access to outside
destinations such as a cellular
phone.
3 Talk
2 Forward to
outside destination
Extn. 101
1 Dials 301
Virtual PS
(Extn. No. 301)
• For KX-UT670 SIP phone users: There is no physical FWD/DND button on the phone. To set
and clear the FWD/DND status, refer to the documentation for your phone.
Operating Manual
101
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To switch FWD/DND status for outside calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
The current FWD/DND status
for outside calls is displayed.
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Press the fixed FWD/DND
button again to switch the status.
To switch FWD/DND status for intercom calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
2
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Enter 2.
The current FWD/DND status
for intercom calls is displayed.
Press the fixed FWD/DND
button again to switch
the status.
• When you switch the FWD/DND status, any FWD destination that was set previously is not
cleared.
102
Operating Manual
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To set and clear FWD/DND for outside/intercom calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
1
Outside Calls*
OR
2
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Intercom Calls
Enter 1 or 2.
0
1
Press STORE.
FWD/DND off
DND on
Enter 0 or 1.
OR
2
3
4
5
destination
extension no.
FWD–All Calls
FWD–Busy
FWD–No Answer
FWD–Busy/No Answer
OR
outside line
access no.
outside
phone no.
Press STORE
to set.
(max. 32 digits)
Enter 2 to 5.
Enter destination extension number,
or outside line access number
and then outside phone number.
A confirmation tone will
be heard.
• * This step can be omitted.
Operating Manual
103
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To set and clear FWD/DND for all calls
KX-UT113/KX-UT123/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248
While on-hook
: FWD/DND off
FWD/DND Off
Do Not Disturb : DND on
OR
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
FWD(All) : FWD–All Calls
FWD(BSY) : FWD–Busy
FWD(NA) : FWD–No Answer
FWD(B/NA) : FWD–Busy/No Answer
destination
extension no.
OR
outside
phone no.
outside line
access no.
#
(max. 32 digits)
Press UP or DOWN with
the Navigator Key
to select the desired item.
Enter destination extension number,
or outside line access number
and then outside phone number.
Enter #.
Press ENTER
to set.
A confirmation tone will
be heard.
To set the timer for "No Answer" and "Busy/No Answer"
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
time
3
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Enter 3.
Press STORE.
*
Enter time
(seconds [0–120]).
Press STORE
to set.
A confirmation tone will
be heard.
• * You can enter the time as a 1–3 digit number. For example, 15 seconds can be entered as
"15" or "015".
104
Operating Manual
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
To set forwarding status and outside destinations to ring in parallel for outside calls
to an ICD Group
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
Virtual PS 1
Virtual PS 2
Virtual PS 3
Virtual PS 4
4
5
6
7
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Enter 4 to 7.
Press STORE.
To cancel ringing
0
FWD off
Enter 0.
OR
To set ringing
1
FWD–All Calls
outside line
access no.
outside
phone no.
(max. 32 digits)
Enter 1.
Enter outside line access number
and then outside phone number.
Press STORE
to set.
A confirmation tone will
be heard.
• Only one extension assigned as member 1 in each ICD group can perform the settings for
virtual PSs.
• It is possible to switch the forwarding status (on/off) of a virtual PS by entering the number
(4–7) of that extension, then pressing the fixed FWD/DND button, instead of pressing the
AUTO DIAL/STORE button.
Forwarding Your Calls Using ISDN Service (Call Forwarding [CF]—by ISDN)
All calls are forwarded to an outside party using ISDN. The following types of call forwarding are provided by
the ISDN service.
– Unconditional (Call Forwarding Unconditional [CFU])
– When your extension is busy (Call Forwarding Busy [CFB])
– When you do not answer (Call Forwarding No Reply [CFNR])
Operating Manual
105
1.6.2 Showing a Message on the Caller’s Telephone Display (Absent Message)
To set
PT/SLT/PS
7
Off-hook.
#
Enter #.
Enter
5
7 5.
2 Unconditional
3 Busy
4 No Reply
Enter required number.
outside
line no.
#
Enter outside line
number (3 digits).
Enter #.
your MSN
desired phone no.
Enter your multiple
subscriber number
(MSN).
#
Enter desired
phone number.
C.Tone
On-hook.
Enter #.
To cancel
PT/SLT/PS
7
Off-hook.
Enter
#
0
Enter #.
Enter 0.
5
7 5.
outside
line no.
#
Enter outside line
number (3 digits).
Enter #.
your MSN
Enter your multiple
subscriber number
(MSN).
C.Tone
On-hook.
To confirm the condition
PT/PS
7
Off-hook.
Enter
#
1
Enter #.
Enter 1.
5
7 5.
C.Tone
outside
line no.
#
Enter outside line
number (3 digits).
Enter #.
your MSN
Enter your multiple
subscriber number
(MSN).
The display shows
the selected type.
On-hook.
1.6.2 Showing a Message on the Caller’s Telephone Display
(Absent Message)
You can show the reason you do not answer, if the caller uses a Panasonic display proprietary telephone.
There are eight preprogrammed messages and one for your personal message (16 characters). The
106
Operating Manual
1.6.2 Showing a Message on the Caller’s Telephone Display (Absent Message)
selected message is shown on the display of your telephone. For callers using KX-UT series SIP phones,
the message will not be shown on their display.
Message no.
Message (Example)
1
Will Return Soon
2
Gone Home
3
At Ext %%%% (Extension number)
4
Back at %%:%% (Hour:Minute)
5
Out until %%/%% (Month/Day)
6
In a Meeting
7
8
9
A message assigned for each extension.
(Personal Absent Message)
To set
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Off-hook.
#
7
5
Enter
750.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Will Return Soon
Gone Home
At Ext %%%% + Extension no.
Back at %%:%% + Hour : Minute
Out until %%/%% + Month / Day
In a Meeting
Enter required number.
C.Tone
Enter #.
On-hook.
To cancel
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
7
5
0
0
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Enter
750.
On-hook.
Enter 0.
• Enter the desired value in the "%" positions. You must enter the correct number of
characters as represented by the "%" using 0 to 9 or
.
• The preprogrammed messages can be changed through system programming.
• To create your personal message (Message no. 9), refer to "3.1.2 Settings on the
Programming Mode".
Operating Manual
107
1.6.3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone (Extension Dial Lock)
1.6.3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone
(Extension Dial Lock)
You can lock your extension so that other users cannot make unauthorised outside calls.
This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout.
To lock
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
7
7
1
C.Tone
Enter 1.
77.
Enter
Off-hook.
On-hook.
To unlock
PIN: Personal Identification Number
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
7
7
extension PIN
0
C.Tone
Enter
Off-hook.
77.
Enter 0.
On-hook.
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
• If you forget the extension PIN or cannot unlock your extension, consult your manager.
He can clear your extension PIN. Then, you can set the new PIN and unlock your extension
by entering it.
• If your extension is locked by this feature, it cannot perform features as follows:
– Making outside calls
– Changing the call forwarding destination
• If you do not set extension PIN, you cannot lock and unlock your extension.
To make an outside call while your extension is locked
PT/SLT/PS
PIN: Personal Identification Number
4
Off-hook.
Enter
7
47.
your
extension no.
extension no.
extension PIN
Dial your
extension number.
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
If the wrong extension PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
108
Operating Manual
desired
phone no.
extension no.
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Dial desired
phone number.
Seize an outside line before
entering an outside phone number.
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
• After you make an outside call, Extension Dial Lock is automatically activated again.
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message
[SVM])
Your PBX can provide you with answering machine service.
Your extension is assigned a message box, into which callers can leave voice messages for you.
After callers reach your message box, they will hear your personal greeting message. You can record two
kinds of personal greetings: a normal greeting message and a greeting message for each time mode. You
can also play back and clear your greeting messages and the voice messages left by callers.
–
Recording a Normal Greeting Message
–
Recording a Greeting Message for Each Time Mode
–
Redirecting Your Calls to Your Message Box
–
Leaving Voice Messages
–
Listening to Voice Messages Left by Callers
–
Accessing Your Message Box from an Outside Telephone
–
Accessing the Message Box of Another Extension from Your Extension
• This feature is not available for SIP Extensions. Even if a caller leaves a voice messages for
a SIP Extension, the Message button light or Message/Ringer Lamp will not turn on to tell
you that a voice message has been received.
• You may hear a busy tone when trying to access your message box if too many other users
are already accessing their message boxes. In that case, wait a few minutes and try again.
• If the used recording space (including greeting messages and voice messages left by
callers) for the SVM feature reaches a certain limit, the display informs you that the recording
space is almost full, and you will hear dial tone 3 when going off-hook.
Dial Tone 3
1s
• Operation Reference When Accessing Your Message Box
After entering the SVM feature number ( 38), the operations below are available by
entering the corresponding numbers.
Operation No.
Operation
0
To clear the normal greeting message
1
To record a normal greeting message
2
To play back the normal greeting message
Operating Manual
109
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
Operation No.
Operation
3
To listen to voice messages left by callers
8
To set a greeting message for each time mode
#
To leave a voice message to another extension’s message box
6
Recording a Normal Greeting Message
To record
PT/SLT/PS
8
3
1
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Enter
38.
Record
message.
Enter 1.
Example: "You have reached John. I am sorry I cannot
take your call right now. Please leave a message."
The greeting
message is
played back.
OR
C.Tone
dial key
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Clear
0
*
OR
1
Rerecord
Enter 0 or 1 while the greeting
message is being played back.
Press STORE or any
dial key (0–9, , #).
To play back
PT/SLT/PS
8
3
2
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Enter
0
38.
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Clear
Enter 2.
*
OR
1
Rerecord
Enter 0 or 1 while the greeting
message is being played back.
110
Operating Manual
On-hook.
The greeting message
is played back.
On-hook.
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
• * This step can be omitted.
To clear
PT/SLT/PS
3
8
0
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Enter
38.
On-hook.
Enter 0.
Recording a Greeting Message for Each Time Mode
In addition to a normal greeting message, you can record a specific greeting message for each time mode
(day/lunch/break/night).
To record
PT/SLT/PS
0 Day
3
1 Night
8
8
1
2 Lunch
C.Tone
3 Break
Off-hook.
Enter
38.
Enter 8.
OR
dial key
Record
message.
Enter the desired
time mode.
C.Tone
Enter 1.
The greeting message
is played back.
Press STORE or any
dial key (0–9, , #).
Example: "You have reached John. I am sorry I am
out for lunch right now. Please leave a message."
0
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Clear
*
OR
1
Rerecord
Enter 0 or 1 while the greeting
message is being played back.
On-hook.
Operating Manual
111
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
To play back
PT/SLT/PS
0 Day
8
3
1 Night
8
2
2 Lunch
C.Tone
3 Break
Off-hook.
38.
Enter
Enter 8.
0
The greeting message
is played back.
Enter the desired
time mode.
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Clear
Enter 2.
*
OR
1
Rerecord
On-hook.
Enter 0 or 1 while the greeting
message is being played back.
• * This step can be omitted.
To clear
PT/SLT/PS
0 Day
3
8
8
1 Night
2 Lunch
3 Break
Off-hook.
Enter
38.
Enter 8.
Enter the desired
time mode.
0
C.Tone
Enter 0.
On-hook.
• If both the greeting message for a certain time mode and the normal greeting message have
been recorded, callers will hear the greeting message for that time mode. However, if no
greeting message has been recorded for a certain time mode, the normal greeting message
will be played instead.
112
Operating Manual
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
Redirecting Your Calls to Your Message Box
You can set incoming calls to be redirected to your own message box so that callers can leave voice
messages when you cannot answer the phone.
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/PS
0
Both Calls
OR
7
1
1
Outside Calls
OR
2
Off-hook.
Enter
71.
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as you desire.
0
Cancel
2
All Calls
3
Busy
4
No Answer
5
Busy/No Answer
Enter required number.
For "Cancel", go on-hook
directly after entering 0.
floating extension no.
for the SVM feature
Enter the floating extension
number for the SVM feature.
#
Enter #.
C.Tone
On-hook.
• The default floating extension number (591) for the SVM feature depends on system
programming. For more information, consult your System Administrator or System Manager.
Leaving Voice Messages
If the extension user you called is not able to answer your call, and your call is redirected to the message
box, you will hear the greeting message. Then, you can leave a voice message for that extension. It is also
possible to leave a voice message directly in the message box of a desired extension by following the steps
below:
Operating Manual
113
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
To leave a voice message directly to another extension’s message box
PT/SLT/PS
3
Off-hook.
Enter
You hear the
greeting message.
8
#
38.
6
Enter #6.
extension no.
Dial extension number.
OR
C.Tone
dial key
Record
message.
On-hook or press any
dial key (0–9, , #).
• Voice message recording will stop, you will hear a notification tone, and the call will be
disconnected, in the following cases:
a.
the recording time for the voice message reaches the preprogrammed limit. (default:
120 seconds)
b.
the recording space for the SVM feature reaches the limit.
• When you are on the phone, you can transfer the call directly to the message box of a
desired extension by placing the call on hold temporarily, then pressing 38 + #6 + the
desired extension number. This allows the caller to leave a voice message in the message
box of the desired extension.
Listening to Voice Messages Left by Callers
When a caller leaves a voice message, information about that caller is also recorded as the SVM Log. The
SVM Log can be viewed using the display of a PT or PS by pressing the Message button.
To listen to voice messages
PT/PS
While on-hook
Press MESSAGE
until desired SVM Log
appears.
114
Operating Manual
Off-hook.
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
PT/SLT/PS
3
Off-hook.
Enter
8
3
38.
Enter 3.
PT/SLT/PS
OR
7
Off-hook.
0
2
Press MESSAGE
or enter 702.
To clear the voice message that you are listening to
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing the voice message
3
OR
1
Enter 3.
Press STORE or
enter 1 to confirm.
• Various operations are available by entering numbers while you are listening to a recorded
voice message using any of the methods described above. The available options are as
follows:
Operation No.
1
/
#
Operations
#
To play back the voice message from the beginning
2
To go to the next voice message
3
To clear the voice message
(Press the AUTO DIAL/STORE button or enter 1 to confirm.)
4
To call back the caller who left the voice message
5
To go back to the previous voice message
6
To leave a voice message directly in the message box of another extension
(Enter desired extension number.)
If you cannot input the desired extension number within the specified time,
play back the voice message from the beginning. If you enter an incorrect
number for the desired extension number, you will hear a reorder tone.
Operating Manual
115
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
Operation No.
Operations
#
8
To play back your greeting message and record a voice message in your
own message box
#
9
To end the call
The operation numbers above may be changed to other numbers. If you cannot activate these operations,
consult your system administrator.
• In addition to the caller information that is recorded in the Call Log, the following SVM Log information is
recorded with voice messages left by callers:
– Caller’s Name
– Caller’s Telephone Number
– Time recording started
– Voice Message Status
– "New" is displayed for voice messages that have not previously been listened to.
– "Old" is displayed for voice messages that have previously been listened to.
Please note that the information shown on the display may vary depending on the information that was
received and the type of telephone used. Only users of a 6-line display PT can view all of the above
information.
• You can lock the SVM Log display by using an extension PIN (Personal Identification Number) to prevent
other users from viewing the information and from playing back your voice messages (Display Lock).
Refer to "3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode".
• If your telephone has a Message for Another Extension button, you can access the message box of
another extension and listen to voice messages for that extension.
• If a new voice message has been left in your message box, you will hear dial tone 4 after going off-hook.
In addition, if your telephone has a Message button or Message/Ringer Lamp, the corresponding button
or lamp will light when a voice message has been left.
Dial Tone 4
1s
116
Operating Manual
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
To listen to voice messages while your display is locked
PT
PIN: Personal Identification Number
4
Off-hook.
Enter
your
extension no.
extension no.
7
Dial your
extension number.
47.
extension PIN
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
If the wrong extension PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
8
3
Enter
38.
3
Enter 3.
• When you press the Message button to play back voice messages while on-hook, Display
Lock is temporarily deactivated after you enter the extension PIN.
To clear voice messages from the SVM Log
PT
While on-hook
Press MESSAGE
until desired SVM Log
appears.
Press TRANSFER.
Press STORE.
Accessing Your Message Box from an Outside Telephone
You can remotely access your message box and perform any operations of the SVM feature through an
outside line as if you were at your own extension.
Operating Manual
117
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
From Outside Telephone
PIN: Personal Identification Number
The greeting
message is
played back.
desired phone no.
Off-hook.
4
Dial desired phone
number of a destination
that has set the SVM feature.
your
extension no.
Dial your
extension number.
Enter 47 while hearing
the greeting message.
3
extension PIN
extension no.
7
For available operations,
see "Operation Reference
When Accessing Your
Message Box".
8
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
Enter
38.
• If you hear a reorder tone when you try to leave a voice message directly in the message
box of another extension, that message box is unavailable. You can enter another extension
number by pressing " ".
• When accessing your message box from an outside telephone, you cannot call back callers
who have left voice messages, by pressing 4 while hearing the voice message.
To listen to voice messages left in the message box of another extension
From Outside Telephone
PIN: Personal Identification Number
While hearing voice messages in your message box
#
The greeting
message is
played back.
8
4
Enter #8.
Enter
7
desired extension no.
47.
Dial desired
extension number.
3
extension PIN
8
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter extension PIN for
that extension (max. 10 digits).
Enter
38.
3
Enter 3.
If the wrong extension PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
Accessing the Message Box of Another Extension from Your Extension
You can access the message box of another extension (for example, to record a greeting message for that
extension) by following the steps below:
118
Operating Manual
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
PT/SLT/PS
PIN: Personal Identification Number
4
Off-hook.
Enter
7
desired extension no.
47.
Dial desired
extension number.
3
extension PIN
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter extension PIN for
that extension (max. 10 digits).
Enter
8
For available operations, see
"Operation Reference When
Accessing Your Message Box".
38.
If the wrong extension PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
Operating Manual
119
1.7 Making/Answering an Announcement
1.7 Making/Answering an Announcement
1.7.1 Paging
–
Group Paging
–
Paging and then Transferring a Call
Group Paging
You can make a voice announcement to proprietary telephones or external speakers or both in the preset
group simultaneously.
To page
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
3
Off-hook.
Enter
3
33.
paging group
no.
Dial paging group
number (2 digits).
Wait for an
answer.
C.Tone
Announce.
Talk.
• If the group which you paged is already being used for paging, you hear a busy tone.
120
Operating Manual
1.7.1 Paging
Paging and then Transferring a Call
PT/SLT/PS
During a conversation
OR
3
OR
Enter
3
33.
paging group
no.
Dial paging group
number (2 digits).
Press TRANSFER or Recall/hookswitch.
The other party is placed on hold.
Wait for an
answer.
C.Tone
Talk.
Announce.
On-hook.
The held party and the paged extension
are connected and start a conversation.
SIP Extn.
During a conversation
XFER
3
OR
OR
3
paging group
no.
HOLD
Enter
KX-UT series:
Press TRANSFER.
Other than KX-UT series:
Press HOLD.
33.
Dial paging group
number (2 digits).
The other party is placed on hold.
Wait for an
answer.
C.Tone
Talk.
Announce.
On-hook.
The held party and the paged extension
are connected and start a conversation.
Operating Manual
121
1.7.2 Answering/Denying a Paging Announcement
• After you go on-hook, the caller can talk to the person who answers the page.
1.7.2 Answering/Denying a Paging Announcement
To answer
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
4
3
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Talk.
43.
Enter
KX-UT series
dial key
Press any dial key (0–9, , #).
Talk.
To allow/deny a paging announcement (Paging Deny)
PT/KX-UT series
1
7
2
1
0
Off-hook.
122
Operating Manual
Enter
721.
Deny
OR
Allow
Enter 1 or 0.
C.Tone
On-hook.
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
• The following are extensions that cannot receive a paging announcement:
– Portable station
– Single line telephone
– Proprietary telephone that is ringing or busy
– Proprietary telephone in Paging Deny mode
– Proprietary telephone in DND mode
– Non-KX-UT series SIP phone
• System programming may be required for some IP-PT users to receive paging
announcements.
• Even if the announcement is not paging your extension, you can answer it, if it is paging your
group.
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
You can call multiple parties, assigned as members of a group (conference group), and establish a multiple
party conversation with the called parties. You can make a conference group call to both extensions and
outside lines (including analogue lines). The following two modes are available:
• Conference Mode: the called parties can join the conversation automatically. (
Conference Mode)
• Broadcast Mode: the called parties can hear the caller’s voice announcement, and then be allowed to
join the conversation by the caller. (
Broadcast Mode)
• If you dial a conference group number that is in use for another conversation, you will hear a
busy tone and cannot establish a multiple party conversation.
• If you fail to seize idle outside lines necessary for all members assigned in the conference
group, you will hear a reorder tone and cannot make a conference group call.
• When making a conference group call to an outside party, the CLIP number for that call will
be the one you select for making calls to an outside line. Refer to "1.9.4 Displaying Your
Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller’s Telephone (Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation [CLIP/COLP])".
Conference Mode
If this mode is selected through system programming, the called parties can join the conversation simply by
going off-hook. The caller can end the conversation with a specific party manually.
Operating Manual
123
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
To make/answer a conference group call
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Caller
3
Enter
Off-hook.
2
32.
Wait for an
answer.
*
conference
group no.
entry code
Dial conference
group number
(1 digit).
Enter entry code
(max. 8 digits).
C.Tone
Talk.
Enter #.
A multiple party
conversation
is now established.
Any Telephone
Called Party
The telephone
rings.
Off-hook.
Talk.
• * If you do not enter an entry code when making the conference group call, extensions/
outside telephones can join the conversation without needing to enter an entry code.
• Entry codes can consist of the digits "0" through "9". When " " is used for an entry code, no
one can join a conversation that is already in progress. " " must be used by itself (i.e., you
may not combine it with numeric digits). For details, refer to "
Join After Time Out".
• A conversation can be established with a maximum of 8 parties (including the caller).
• If the Hands-free Answerback feature is enabled, the called extension can answer the
conference group call without going off-hook. KX-UT series SIP phones do not support the
Hands-free Answerback feature for a conference group call.
• With PTs and KX-WT125 (Canada only)/KX-TCA175/KX-TCA275/KX-TCA185/
KX-TCA285/KX-TCA385 PSs, a conference group call can be automatically answered
without going off-hook. This mode is selected through system programming.
• If using an SLT or SIP phone, the caller can only originate a conference group call and
cannot control the called parties’ call status manually.
For a caller
To end a conversation with a specific party
124
Operating Manual
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
PT/PS
During a conversation
To end a conversation with a specific party
(DSS)
Press DSS.
To end a conversation with the party who
joined the conversation last
Press TRANSFER.
To disconnect the party who joined the
conversation last from the conference group call
Press FLASH/RECALL.
• In this case, the FLASH/RECALL button must be set to Flash/Recall mode through system
programming.
Broadcast Mode
If this mode is selected through system programming, the caller can call multiple parties in a conference
group, make a voice announcement, and then establish a multiple party conversation with the called parties.
This conversation will be heard by all called parties. Called parties can listen to the announcement simply by
going off-hook. They can send a notification tone if they want to join the conversation.
Operating Manual
125
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
To make/answer a conference group call
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Caller
3
Enter
Off-hook.
2
32.
Wait for an
answer.
*
conference
group no.
entry code
Dial conference
group number
(1 digit).
Enter entry code
(max. 8 digits).
C.Tone
Enter #.
Announce.
Any Telephone
Called Party
The telephone
rings.
Off-hook.
• * If you do not enter an entry code when making the conference group call, extensions/
outside telephones can join the conversation without needing to enter an entry code.
• Entry codes can consist of the digits "0" through "9". When " " is used for an entry code, no
one can join a conversation that is already in progress. " " must be used by itself (i.e., you
may not combine it with numeric digits). For details, refer to "
Join After Time Out".
• With PTs and KX-WT125 (Canada only)/KX-TCA175/KX-TCA275/KX-TCA185/
KX-TCA285/KX-TCA385 PSs, a conference group call can be automatically answered
without going off-hook. This mode is selected through system programming.
• If the Hands-free Answerback feature is enabled, the called extension can answer the
conference group call without going off-hook. KX-UT series SIP phones do not support the
Hands-free Answerback feature for a conference group call.
• If using an SLT or SIP phone, the caller can only originate a conference group call and
cannot control the called parties’ call status manually.
For a caller
To make a conversation with a specific party
126
Operating Manual
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
PT/PS
During an announcement
(DSS)
Press DSS.
To make a conversation with a party in the group’s preassigned order
PT/PS
During an announcement
Press CONF.
• When you press the CONFERENCE/CONF/Conference button after pressing a DSS Key,
you will make a conversation with the party who registered after the current party on call in
the Conference Group.
To end a conversation with a specific party
PT/PS
During a conversation
To end a conversation with a specific party
(DSS)
Press DSS.
To end a conversation with the party who
joined the conversation last
Press TRANSFER.
To disconnect the party who joined the
conversation last from the conference group call
Press FLASH/RECALL.
Operating Manual
127
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
• In this case, the FLASH/RECALL button must be set to Flash/Recall mode through system
programming.
• If the maximum number of parties who can actively participate in the conversation is set to
32 through system programming, the keys on the conference originator’s telephone (DSS,
CONFERENCE, TRANSFER, FLASH, etc.) will not function.
For a called extension
To send a notification tone to the caller and join a conversation
PT/SLT/PS
Called Party
During an announcement
(DSS)
Press DSS
corresponding
to the caller.
OR
Wait for reply.
Talk.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
PT/PS
Caller
During an announcement
A notification tone
occurs, and the display
shows the called party's
information.
(DSS)
Press
corresponding
DSS.
Talk.
Introduce the called party to
the conversation.
• A maximum of 32 parties (including the caller) can join the conference. Also, depending on
system settings, a maximum of 32 parties (including the caller) can join the conversation.
• Push-to-Talk for PT/SLT/PS users
If the Broadcast Mode and this mode are selected through system programming, the called
PT/SLT/PS users can join the conversation by pressing any dial key (0–9, , #) during the
voice announcement.
By assigning PSs with the Hands-free Answerback feature enabled to a conference group,
the caller can create a wireless paging system. All of the called PS users, with the Handsfree Answerback feature enabled, will hear the voice announcement. Then, any PS user can
respond by pressing any dial key, and their reply will be heard by all of the called parties.
128
Operating Manual
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
Join After Time Out
Extensions or outside telephones can join the multiple party conversation that has been already started
using this feature. For example, if the conference group members fail to answer when a conference group
call is made, they can join the multiple party conversation later using this feature. They can join the
conversation from outside telephones (through DISA or TIE Line) or extensions. This feature is available for
both modes: Conference Mode and Broadcast Mode.
For security reasons, you can set a specific entry code for the conference group call. To join the
conversation, extensions/outside telephones have to enter the same entry code. Therefore, you have to
inform the parties to be added to the conversation of the entry code in advance.
For an extension originating the conversation
To make a conference group call with an entry code
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
3
Off-hook.
Enter
32.
entry code
conference
group no.
2
Dial conference
group number (1 digit).
*
Enter entry code
(max. 8 digits).
Wait for an
answer.
C.Tone
Enter #.
Talk.
For an extension joining the conversation
To join a conversation with an entry code
Operating Manual
129
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
3
Enter
Off-hook.
conference
group no.
2
32.
Enter #.
Dial conference
group number (1 digit).
entry code
*
Enter entry code
(max. 8 digits).
C.Tone
Enter #.
Talk.
• * If you do not enter an entry code when making the conference group call, extensions/
outside telephones can join the conversation without needing to enter an entry code.
• Entry codes can consist of the digits "0" through "9". When " " is used for an entry code, no
one can join a conversation that is already in progress.
• When you are using an outside telephone (through DISA or TIE Line), it is possible to join
the conversation after accessing your extension using Walking COS.
• Extensions/outside telephones can join the conversation using this feature only when the
conference group call has already been established between the extension originating a
conversation and at least one member.
• To join a conversation that is already in progress, extensions/outside telephones must be
using an idle extension with no held calls.
• If a conversation has reached the maximum number of participants, this feature cannot be
used to join the conversation.
• Starting a Conference Group Call using Hands-free Answerback
If the Hands-free Answerback feature is enabled with at least one conference group
member, the call can be automatically answered and the conversation begins with only one
participant (the caller). Then, up to 6 participants can use the Join After Time Out feature to
join the conversation.
130
Operating Manual
1.8 Using the Unified Messaging Features
1.8 Using the Unified Messaging Features
1.8.1 What is the Unified Messaging system?
Introduction to the Unified Messaging system
Your PBX can provide you with Unified Messaging system service. You or an outside party can access the
Unified Messaging system from a telephone. As the owner of a mailbox, you can:
• Send a message to one or more people inside or outside your office.
• Transfer messages to other subscribers and add your own comments.
• Access your mailbox and listen to your messages, even when out of the office.
• Have the Unified Messaging system call or e-mail you when someone leaves you a message.
• Be notified by the message waiting lamp on your extension when new messages have been recorded in
your mailbox.
• Screen your calls.
• Create a set of options and functions exclusive to your mailbox (Personal Custom Service) that can be
selected by your callers.
• Voice and e-mail messages can be managed in a single inbox using the Communication Assistant plug-in
for Microsoft® Outlook®.
• Voice and e-mail messages can be managed via an e-mail client that supports IMAP4.
• Many other useful messaging features.
• PBX users who are assigned a mailbox in the Unified Messaging system are called
subscribers.
• Hospitality Mode:
If your service mode is set to "Hospitality Mode", available features such as listening to
messages, personal greetings, etc. may be limited according to the COS settings for your
mailbox.
Before You Begin
In order to use the Unified Messaging system as a subscriber, you need to know the following information.
The System Manager can help you if you do not know this information.
• The extension number that you should dial in order to access the Unified Messaging system.
• Your mailbox number and extension number (In many cases these are the same number, but it is possible
they are not).
• Your mailbox password (if set).
• The System Manager’s telephone number. The System Manager is the person you should refer to when
you have any problems with the Unified Messaging system.
Prompts
Prompts are recorded voice guidance messages that help you set and use Unified Messaging system
features. Prompts also help callers when the system is handing their calls. Depending on how your Unified
Messaging system is programmed, subscribers and callers can select the language they prefer for system
prompts.
<Prompt example>
"To leave a message, press 1."
"Please leave a message at the tone."
"To end recording, hang up or press 1 for more features."
Operating Manual
131
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
• Not all prompts are described in each operation.
• The prompts in each operation are not exactly the same as the actual prompts you will hear
from the Unified Messaging system.
• Follow the instructions provided by the voice guidance.
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
–
Logging in to Your Mailbox
–
Subscriber Tutorial (Easy Mailbox Configuration)
–
Changing or Deleting Your Personal Greeting Messages
–
Personal Greetings for Caller ID
–
Changing Your Password
–
Changing or Deleting Your Subscriber (Owner) Name
–
Common Service Commands and Navigation Commands
Logging in to Your Mailbox for the First Time
The first time you log in to your mailbox, there are certain mailbox settings you should perform before using
any other Subscriber Services. These settings identify you as the owner of your mailbox, and are described
Logging in to Your Mailbox".
in "
• Password
• Subscriber’s Name
• Personal Greeting Messages
Your Unified Messaging system may be programmed to initiate a "Subscriber Tutorial" the first time you log
in to your mailbox. If the Subscriber Tutorial is enabled, Unified Messaging system prompts will guide you
through the mailbox configuration process.
Logging in to Your Mailbox
In order to access Subscriber Services (to play messages, change mailbox settings, etc.), you must first log
in to your mailbox. There are 2 ways to log in to your mailbox:
Manual Log-in:
Manual Log-in is necessary when logging in to your mailbox using someone else’s extension, or when
Automatic Log-in is not enabled for your mailbox.
Automatic Log-in:
When logging in to your mailbox from your own extension, you do not need to enter any special commands
or your mailbox number.
• The UM group’s default floating extension number depends on system programming. For
more information, consult your System Administrator or System Manager.
132
Operating Manual
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
• Mailbox Capacity Warning
When your mailbox is almost full, you will receive a Mailbox Capacity Warning shortly after
logging in to your mailbox. When you hear a Mailbox Capacity Warning, you should delete
unnecessary messages to make more recording time in your mailbox available. The amount
of recording time that remains when you hear the Mailbox Capacity Warning depends on
how your mailbox is configured. This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator
or System Manager for your mailbox.
For more information, consult your System Administrator or System Manager.
• For KX-UT series SIP phone users:
When using the MESSAGE button, please press the MESSAGE button before going offhook.
Manual log-in
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
#
6
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Off-hook.
Enter #6.
OR
UM group’s floating
extension no.
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer, or enter UM group’s
floating extension number.
your mailbox no.
Enter
and your mailbox number.
your password
#
Enter your mailbox.
Enter your password and #.
You can skip this step
if your mailbox requires no password.
Automatic log-in
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Off-hook.
OR
UM group’s floating
extension no.
your password
#
Enter your mailbox.
Enter your password and #.
You can skip this step
if your mailbox requires no password.
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer, or enter UM group’s
floating extension number.
Operating Manual
133
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
CAUTION
• It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.
• To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes
known to others, the PBX may be misused.
• Change the password periodically.
Notice
• When disabling the password requirement, ensure that an unauthorised third-party is not
allowed access to your extension.
• When following audible prompts only: if Autoplay New Messages is enabled for your
mailbox, new messages will be played back automatically each time you log in to your
mailbox. Whether or not new messages will be played back one after the other automatically
depends on system programming. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
• If Message Waiting Lamp is enabled for your mailbox, the message lamp on your telephone
will light when you receive a new message. You can log in to your mailbox and play back a
new message automatically simply by going off-hook and pressing the Message button on
your telephone. The Unified Messaging system will play back the first new message only. To
play back other messages, press the appropriate button.
• After logging in, the system will announce the number of total messages, the number of new
messages, or the length of new messages. These announcements depend on the mailbox
settings and Class of Service (COS) settings of your mailbox.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Voice Mail Transfer button or a Message button.
Subscriber Tutorial (Easy Mailbox Configuration)
Your Unified Messaging system may be programmed to present a "Subscriber Tutorial" to you the first time
you log in to your mailbox. If the Subscriber Tutorial is enabled, Unified Messaging system prompts will
guide you through the mailbox configuration process. Simply by following the prompts, you can configure
the following items. You can configure these items later manually if necessary, as explained later in this
section. This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox.
• You may be asked to enter your password after logging in to your mailbox. If you do not
know this password, ask your System Administrator.
• The subscriber tutorial may be simplified or not available depending on your COS settings.
Password:
If your mailbox has a password, you must enter it using the dial keys (0–9) whenever you log in to your
mailbox. Your password can contain up to 16 digits.
Subscriber’s Name:
This is a recording of your name. Other subscribers will hear your name when they listen to messages you
left for them. It may also be heard by callers when they use the Dialling by Name feature.
Personal Greetings:
The following Personal Greeting Messages can be recorded in the subscriber tutorial. After the greeting is
played, a tone will sound, and the caller can leave a message.
134
Operating Manual
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
• No Answer Greeting: Heard by callers when you do not answer their calls. A common example might
be, "This is (name). I can’t take your call right now…".
• Busy Signal Greeting: Heard by callers when you are on another call. A common example might be,
"This is (name). I’m on another call right now…".
• After Hours Greeting: Heard by callers when the Unified Messaging system is in night mode. A common
example might be, "This is (name). I’ve gone home for the day…".
• If you do not record a greeting message, a prerecorded greeting message will be used.
To start the Subscriber Tutorial
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
The Unified Messaging system will announce,
"Welcome to the Panasonic Unified Messaging
System. This is the Subscriber Tutorial service.".
Log in to your mailbox.
To set your password for the first time
your password
#
2
Enter your password and #.
Enter 2 to accept.
OR
To change your password
your new password
1
Enter 1.
#
Enter your new password and #.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
To record the Owner’s Name
(Your Subscriber Name)
1
2
Enter 1 to end
recording.
Enter 2 to accept.
C.Tone
State your name.
To record your greeting messages
1
C.Tone
Record your greeting message.
Enter 1 to end
recording.
1
Review
2
Accept
3
Record the
message again
4
Add
Delete and exit
Enter the desired option.
To confirm the settings
1
Enter 1.
On-hook.
Operating Manual
135
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
CAUTION
• It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.
• To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes
known to others, the PBX may be misused.
• Change the password periodically.
Changing or Deleting Your Personal Greeting Messages
After callers reach your mailbox, they will hear your personal greeting message. You can record 6 kinds of
Personal Greetings; the appropriate greeting will be played for callers. If you delete or do not record a
greeting message, a prerecorded greeting message will be used.
• No Answer Greeting:
Heard by callers when you do not answer their calls. A common example might be, "This is (name). I
can’t take your call right now…".
• Busy Signal Greeting:
Heard by callers when you are on another call. A common example might be, "This is (name). I’m on
another call right now…".
• After Hours Greeting:
Heard by callers when the Unified Messaging system is in night mode. A common example might be,
"This is (name). I’ve gone home for the day…".
• Personal Greeting for Caller ID:
Heard by callers from preprogrammed telephone numbers. For details, refer to "
for Caller ID".
Personal Greetings
• Temporary Greeting:
A special greeting that, if recorded, is heard by callers instead of the other greetings. A common example
might be, "This is (name). I’m out of the office this week…".
• Absent Message:
Heard by callers when a personal greeting is set to a PBX’s absent message, and that absent message is
currently set.
136
Operating Manual
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
To record or delete your Personal Greeting Messages
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
1
Enter 41.
1
No Answer Greeting
2
Busy Signal Greeting
3
After Hours Greeting
4
Caller ID Greeting
5
Temporary Greeting
6
Absent Message
Greeting
caller ID greeting no.
OR
absent message no.
Select the desired greeting. When you select "Caller ID Greeting",
enter a Caller ID Greeting Number (1–4). When you select "Absent
Message Greeting", enter an Absent Message Number (1–9).
For Caller ID Greeting, refer to
"Personal Greetings for Caller ID".
1
Change the greeting
OR
C.Tone
3
Delete the selected
greeting
Record your greeting message.*
Follow the prompts as necessary.
The greeting will be deleted;
go on-hook to finish.
1
Enter 1 to end
recording.
1
Review
2
Accept
3
Rerecord the greeting message (repeat the steps above as necessary)
4
Add to the greeting message you just recorded
Delete the greeting message and exit
Follow the prompts as necessary.
1
No Answer Greeting
2
Busy Signal Greeting
3
After Hours Greeting
4
Caller ID Greeting
5
Temporary Greeting
6
Absent Message Greeting
If you go on-hook without accepting your new greeting,
it will not be saved.
On-hook.
Record or delete other greeting
messages as necessary by following
the prompts, or go on-hook.
• The contents of the Absent Message Greeting prompt and the absent message displayed on
telephones (refer to "1.6.2 Showing a Message on the Caller’s Telephone Display (Absent
Message)") should be programmed to match through system programming.
Operating Manual
137
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
• * We recommend stating your name in your greeting messages, so that callers will know
they have reached the correct mailbox.
• A Temporary Personal Greeting is played instead of all your other greetings until it is deleted.
Each time you log in to your mailbox, the Unified Messaging system will ask you if you want
to turn off (delete) your Temporary Personal Greeting.
• Direct Service Access
If Direct Service Access is set in Mailbox Settings, you can access Record No Answer
Greeting, Record Busy Greeting, Record After Hours Greeting and Record Temporary
Greeting features directly by dialling a specific Unified Messaging extension number from
your extension. Automatic login must be enabled to use Direct Service Access (refer to
"Automatic log-in"). For details about these Unified Messaging extension numbers, consult
your System Administrator.
Personal Greetings for Caller ID
You can record personalised greetings for specific callers. If you have assigned their telephone numbers
(Caller ID numbers) to a personalised greeting, they will hear the appropriate greeting when they call you,
instead of your other greeting messages normally played for callers.
You can record 4 personalised greetings and assign 8 callers to each greeting. Record your personalised
greetings before assigning Caller ID numbers.
This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox.
To record a personalised greeting for the first time
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
1
personalised greeting no.
4
Enter the personalised greeting number (1–4).
Enter 414.
STEP A
2
1
On-hook.
C.Tone
OR
Record your greeting
message.
Enter 1 to end
recording.
Enter 2
to accept.
To assign Caller ID Numbers to
the personalised greeting,
go to STEP B in "To assign
Caller ID numbers for the first time".
To change a personalised greeting
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
1
Enter 414.
Enter the personalised greeting number (1–4).
1
Change the greeting,
then go to STEP A in "To record a personalised
greeting for the first time".
3
Delete the greeting.
OR
On-hook.
138
personalised greeting no.
4
Operating Manual
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
To assign Caller ID numbers for the first time
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
1
4
2
personalised greeting no.
Enter the personalised
greeting number (1–4).
Enter 414.
Enter 2
to accept.
To continue
STEP B
#
caller ID no.
*
2
Enter the caller ID number
(caller’s telephone number,
20 digits max.) and #.
1
Add another caller ID number.
2
End
OR
Enter 2
to accept.
Enter 1 or 2.
On-hook.
• * While entering a Caller ID number, you can press
to enter a "wild card". This allows
several telephone numbers to match the Caller ID number that you assigned. For example, if
you store the Caller ID number as "012 … " (enter the number of s as required for
telephone numbers in your area), any telephone number that begins with "012" (for example,
all callers from the "012" area code) will hear your personalised greeting.
To add/delete/review Caller ID numbers later
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
1
4
Enter 414.
1
Enter the personalised
greeting number (1–4).
Add a Caller ID number,
then go to STEP B in "To assign Caller
ID numbers for the first time".
Delete all numbers,
then go on-hook to finish.
2
Delete one number.OR
3
OR
Delete a Caller ID number.
OR
Review all assigned Caller ID numbers,
then go on-hook to finish.
Enter 2
to accept.
1
OR
2
2
personalised greeting no.
Enter 1 or 2.
Enter the desired option.
1
Delete the announced number.
2
Keep the number and announce the next number,
then repeat this step.
OR
On-hook.
Enter 1 or 2.
Changing Your Password
You can protect your mailbox by setting a password, to prevent unauthorised access to your mailbox. If your
mailbox has a password, you must enter it using the dial keys (0–9) whenever you log in to your mailbox.
Your password can contain up to 16 digits. You can change your password at any time. When choosing a
password, avoid using obvious number combinations. If you forget your password, have your System
Administrator or System Manager clear your password. You may then set a new one.
Operating Manual
139
1.8.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
To change your password
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
2
your desired password
1
Enter 421.
#
Enter the desired password and #.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
On-hook.
CAUTION
• It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.
• To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes
known to others, the PBX may be misused.
• Change the password periodically.
Changing or Deleting Your Subscriber (Owner) Name
You can record your name in the Unified Messaging system. The system can then announce your name for
callers to let them know that they have reached the correct mailbox.
To change/delete your subscriber name
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
3
1
1
C.Tone
Enter 431.
State your name.
Enter 1 to end recording.
Enter 433 to delete your subscriber name,
then go on-hook to finish.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
On-hook.
Common Service Commands and Navigation Commands
Commands for Changing the Current Unified Messaging System Service
After going off-hook and pressing the MESSAGE button*1, Voice Mail Transfer button, or enter the UM
group’s floating extension number, you can enter a service command to access certain Unified Messaging
system features quickly. While guidance is being provided, you can also use service commands to, for
example, switch to a different Unified Messaging system service mode.
*1
140
For KX-UT series SIP phone users: When using the MESSAGE button, please press the MESSAGE button before going offhook.
Operating Manual
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
Dialling by Name
#
1
#
2
Custom Service
You will be guided to enter a Custom Service number (1–200).
#
5
Log in*1
#
6
#
7
Restart (Return to Main Menu)*2
#
8
Automated Attendant Service
#
9
Exit
Voice Mail Service
You can record a message for another subscriber by entering his or her mailbox
number when guided. You can also log in to your mailbox by entering this
command followed by and your mailbox number.
Return to Previous Menu
Help
0
#
#
Switch Service mode
If you are authorised to access a System Manager and/or Message Manager
mailbox by the System Administrator, you can switch between those services as
follows:
Subscriber service
*1
*2
Message Manager service
System Manager service
If pressed while in Subscriber Service, you will be prompted to enter the desired mailbox number.
If pressed while in Subscriber Service, you will return to the Subscriber Service Main Menu.
• Commands #5 and #7 are available only after you have accessed Subscriber Service.
• Some commands may not be available depending on the COS settings of your mailbox.
When Using Voice Prompts
The following commands can be used to help you navigate through Unified Messaging system menus.
Takes you back to the previous menu.
Repeats the current menu.
0
#
7
Takes you back to the Main Menu.
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
–
Playing Messages
–
Bookmarks (Voice Messages only)
–
Recovering Deleted Messages
–
Replying to Messages
–
Transferring Messages
Operating Manual
141
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
–
Remote Access
Playing Messages
Callers and other subscribers can leave voice messages for you, and you can play them back later after you
have logged in to your mailbox.
Messages in your mailbox are divided into 3 types:
• New Messages:
Messages in your mailbox which you have not played back yet.
• Old Messages:
Messages in your mailbox which you have played back but have not yet deleted.
• Deleted Messages:
Messages in your mailbox which you have deleted. You can "recover" your deleted messages, after which
they will be treated as old messages (refer to "
Recovering Deleted Messages"). If you do not
recover deleted messages, they will be permanently deleted at the end of the day.
When playing back a message, the Unified Messaging system can also announce the message’s
"envelope"—the date and time of the message, and the message sender’s information.
To play messages
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
Log in to your mailbox.
3
9
1
New
messages
Old
messages
Deleted
messages
Enter 1, 3 or 91.
*
1
Voice messages
#
All messages
Follow the prompts
as necessary.
Listen to the message.
Pressing during message playback
will return you to the previous menu.
You can then select another
message type to listen to.
• * This step is omitted depending on settings and COS settings of your mailbox.
Additional features are available during/after the playback of voice messages. Refer to the table below and
press the appropriate dialling key. The message types that can be used with each key a marked with a ü.
Note that certain features are not available depending on the message type (new, old, deleted).
Key
Feature
New
Old
Deleted
Repeat this message
ü
ü
ü
Replay the previous message
ü
ü
ü
2
Play the next message
ü
ü
ü
3
Delete this message
ü
ü
1
1
(+
142
Message Type
1
1
)
*1
Operating Manual
• If a confirmation message is played, press 1
to delete the message.
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
Key
Message Type
Feature
New
Old
Deleted
3
Recover this message
4
Reply to this message
ü
ü
5
Transfer this message
ü
ü
Play the message envelope
ü
ü
ü
7
<During playback only>
Rewind the voice message
ü
ü
ü
8
<During playback only>
Pause/restart message playback
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
<For voice messages only>
Start playback at the Bookmark for the voice
message
ü
ü
9
<During playback only>
Fast-forward
ü
ü
#
Save this message as new
6
*1
ü
8
4
<During playback only>
Increase playback volume
8
5
<During voice message playback only>
Set a Bookmark for the voice message
• To restart message playback, press 8.
8
6
ü
ü
• After saving the message, the next message
will be played.
*1
These keys only available when the appropriate COS settings are assigned to your mailbox. For more information, consult your
System Administrator.
• For voice messages, Unified Messaging system programming determines if the message
envelope is played before each message, after each message, or only when you press 6.
For more information, consult your System Administrator.
• The Unified Messaging system will automatically delete both new and old messages after a
specified number of days have passed. Your System Administrator or System Manager
controls how many days messages are retained for. Each time you play a new or old
message, the message retention counter resets.
• During playback, you can increase the playback volume by pressing 84. If volume is at the
highest setting, pressing 84 will select the lowest setting, as shown below.
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
(default)
Level 4
Level 5
Bookmarks (Voice Messages only)
While listening to a message in your mailbox, you can set a bookmark. A bookmark lets you easily resume
playback from a specific point in a specific message later. You can set one bookmark for each message in
your mailbox; if you set a new bookmark, the old one is deleted.
Operating Manual
143
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
• You cannot set or use bookmarks for deleted messages.
To set the Bookmark
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During message playback
8
5
Enter 85.
To start playback at the Bookmark
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During or after message playback
8
6
Enter 86.
Recovering Deleted Messages
You can delete voice messages in your mailbox. Once a message has been deleted, it is retained until the
end of the day, then it will be permanently deleted. Deleted messages can be "recovered", after which they
will be treated as old messages.
To recover a Deleted Message
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During or after voice message playback
3
Enter 3.
Replying to Messages
You can reply to messages left in your mailbox by either calling back the caller or by leaving a message in
the caller’s mailbox.
Calling back is possible when the person who left you the message is another subscriber. Calling back
outside callers is possible if their Caller ID information is received by the system, however, this feature may
be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox.
Replying by leaving a message in the caller’s mailbox is possible only if the caller is another subscriber (i.e.,
the person must have his or her own mailbox). When replying by leaving a message in the caller’s mailbox,
you can set any of the following:
• Urgent Status:
144
Operating Manual
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
The message will be heard before other messages by the recipient.
• Private Status:
The recipient will not be able to forward the message, ensuring privacy.
• Auto Receipt:
You will receive notification (receipt message) once the recipient has played back the message.
Finally, you can send your reply immediately or set a message delivery time. However, please note that you
cannot reply to receipt messages.
• Only new and old messages can be replied to. To reply to a deleted message, recover the
message first (refer to "
Recovering Deleted Messages").
To call back the message sender
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During or after voice message playback
4
Enter 4.
1
Enter 1 to call the sender.
Operating Manual
145
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
To leave a message for the sender
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During or after voice message playback
4
2
Enter 4.
1
C.Tone
Enter 2
to begin recording.
Record your message.
Enter 1
to end recording.
You can pause and resume recording
by pressing 2. If you pause for
more than 20 seconds, recording
will stop automatically.
2
1
1
1
2
Set the delivery time of the message
Send the message immediately
Accept, then go on-hook.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
Enter 11, 12 or 2.
To set the delivery time of the message
desired
delivery time
1
# *
AM
1
2
Enter the desired
delivery time and #.
*2
OR
PM
Enter 1 for AM,
2 for PM.
Make the message urgent
1
desired day of the month
for delivery
Enter the day of the month
for delivery and #.
1
Make the message private
2
Continue
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
1
Request a receipt
2
Continue
2
Enter 2
to accept.
OR
Continue
2
3
# *
Enter 1 or 2.
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
On-hook.
• *1 Example: To enter 5:00, press 5#. To enter 5:15, press 515#.
• *2 This option may not be available if the Unified Messaging system is programmed to use
24-hour time.
• *3 Example: If today is February 16 and you enter 17#, the message will be delivered
tomorrow. If today is February 16 and you enter 5#, the message will be delivered on March
5.
• Auto Receipt is not enabled by default. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
• New urgent messages are played before any other messages. However, old urgent
messages are treated like regular messages: messages are played starting with the oldest.
Transferring Messages
You can transfer (forward) messages in your mailbox to other subscribers. However, please note that you
cannot transfer receipt messages, or messages that were specified by the sender as "private".
When transferring a message, you can:
146
Operating Manual
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
• Specify the recipient by entering another subscriber’s mailbox number.
• Specify several recipients by entering a Personal Group Distribution List number (refer to "
Personal
Group Distribution Lists") or a Mailbox Group number.
• Record your own comments and send them along with the transferred message.
• No acknowledgement will be given to indicate the message has been transferred.
• Only new and old messages can be transferred. To transfer a deleted message, recover the
message first (refer to "
Recovering Deleted Messages").
To specify the recipients by number
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During or after voice message playback
mailbox no.
5
OR
personal group
distribution list no.
Enter 5.
1
Transfer the message
without recording
comments
2
Record comments
2
OR
Enter 2
to accept.
#
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
mailbox group no.
Enter the mailbox number, a personal group
distribution list number and #,
or a mailbox group number.
To record your comments
1
2
Enter 1
to end recording.
Enter 2
to accept.
C.Tone
Record your comments.
On-hook.
To specify the recipients by name (dialling by name)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During or after voice message playback
1
5
#
1
desired recipient's name
2
3
Enter #1.
Enter 5.
1
Transfer the message
without recording
comments
OR
2
Record comments
Enter 1 or 2.
Select the announced name
Hear the next name
Repeat the current name
Enter 1, 2 or 3.
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of
the desired recipient's name.
To record your comments
C.Tone
Record your comments.
1
2
Enter 1
to end recording.
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
Operating Manual
147
1.8.3 Message Playback and Related Features
Remote Access
You can call the Unified Messaging system while outside and log in to your mailbox in order to listen to your
messages. There are 2 ways to log in to your mailbox remotely:
• Automatic Log-in:
When logging in to your mailbox remotely from a preprogrammed outside telephone number (assigned as
a Caller ID number), you do not need to enter any special commands or your mailbox number. The
Unified Messaging system can recognise the telephone number you are calling from and therefore
determine you are the caller (refer to "
Assigning Your Telephone Numbers for Remote Automatic
Log-in and Toll Saver"). This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator for your mailbox.
• Manual Log-in:
Manual Log-in is necessary if logging in to your mailbox, when your mailbox is not programmed for
Automatic Log-in, or when you are calling from a telephone number not programmed for Automatic Login.
• Ask your System Administrator what telephone number you should dial in order to access
the Unified Messaging system remotely.
Remote automatic log-in
From Outside Telephone
Call the Unified Messaging system
from the preprogrammed
outside telephone number
(assigned as a Caller ID number).
your password
#
Enter your password and #.
1
Enter 1 to play back
messages.
This step can be omitted
if your mailbox requires no password.
#
8
#
8
Call an extension
OR
0
Call the operator
Follow the prompts,
or enter #8 or #80.
#
9
Enter #9
when finished.
On-hook.
• The number of rings you hear before the Unified Messaging system answers your call can
indicate whether or not you have new messages (Toll Saver feature). For more information,
consult your System Administrator.
148
Operating Manual
1.8.4 Sending Messages
Remote manual log-in
From Outside Telephone
Call the Unified
Messaging system from
an outside telephone.
your password
your mailbox no.
6
#
Enter and your
mailbox number.
Enter #6.
#
Enter your password and #.
This step can be omitted
if your mailbox requires no password.
Call an extension
#
8
#
Call the operator
Follow the prompts,
or enter #8 or #80.
1
#
OR
Enter 1 to play back
new messages.
8
0
9
Enter #9
when finished.
On-hook.
CAUTION
• It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.
• To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes
known to others, the PBX may be misused.
• Change the password periodically.
Notice
• When disabling the password requirement, ensure that an unauthorised third-party is not
allowed access to your extension.
1.8.4 Sending Messages
–
Message Delivery
–
Personal Group Distribution Lists
–
External Message Delivery
–
External Message Delivery Lists
–
Receiving External Delivery Messages
You can record messages and send them to other subscribers, to extension users who do not have
mailboxes, and even to outside parties. Messages can be sent using one of the following features:
• Message Delivery:
Sending a message to other subscribers (refer to "
Message Delivery").
• External Message Delivery:
Sending a message to parties that do not have Unified Messaging system mailboxes (extension users
External Message Delivery").
and outside parties) (refer to "
There are several ways to determine the recipients of your messages. You can specify recipients by:
• Mailbox number or subscriber name (specifies an individual recipient for Message Delivery).
Operating Manual
149
1.8.4 Sending Messages
• Personal Group Distribution List number or Mailbox Group number (specifies a group of recipients for
Message Delivery).
• Extension number or telephone number (specifies an individual recipient for External Message Delivery).
• External Message Delivery List number (specifies a group of recipients for External Message Delivery).
Message Delivery
You can send messages to other subscribers. You can specify message recipients either by number or by
subscriber name.
To specify the recipients by number:
• Enter the subscriber’s mailbox number.
• Enter a Personal Group Distribution List number (refer to "
Personal Group Distribution Lists").
• Enter a Mailbox Group number (these must be created by the System Administrator. For more
information, consult your System Administrator).
To specify the recipients by name:
• Enter the first few letters of the subscriber’s name (Dialling by Name feature).
Once you have specified the recipients, you can record a message. Before sending your message, you can
set any of the following:
• Urgent Status:
The message will be heard before other messages by the recipient.
• Private Status:
The recipient will not be able to forward the message, ensuring privacy.
• Auto Receipt:
You will receive notification once the recipient has played back the message.
Finally, you can send your message immediately or set a message delivery time.
150
Operating Manual
1.8.4 Sending Messages
To send a message
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Go to "To specify recipients by number"
or "To specify recipients by name
(dialling by name)".
2
Log in to your mailbox.
Enter 2.
To specify recipients by number
mailbox no.
OR
personal group
distribution list no.
OR
mailbox group no.
Go to
"To record your message".
2
#
Enter 2
to accept.
Enter the mailbox number, a personal group
distribution list number and #,
or a mailbox group number.
To specify recipients by name (dialling by name)
1
#
1
desired recipient's name
2
3
Enter #1.
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of
the desired recipient's name.
Select the announced name
Hear the next name
Repeat the current name
Enter 1, 2 or 3.
Go to
"To record your message".
Continued on next page
Operating Manual
151
1.8.4 Sending Messages
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Continued from previous page
To record your message
1
1
Enter 1 to record
your message.
C.Tone
You can pause and resume
recording by pressing 2.
If you pause for more than
20 seconds, recording will
stop automatically.
Press 2 to add another recipient,
then go to "To specify recipients by
number" or "To specify recipients by
name (dialling by name)". A maximum of 100
recipients can be specified.
Or, press 3 to review the recipients.
2
1
1
1
2
Enter 1
to end recording.
Record your message.
Set the delivery time of the message
Send the message immediately
Accept, then go on-hook
2
Enter 11, 12 or 2.
Enter 2
to accept.
To set the delivery time of the message
desired
delivery time
1
# *
Enter the desired
delivery time and #.
1
Make the message urgent
AM
1
Enter 1 for AM,
2 for PM.
1
Continue
Enter 1 or 2.
Enter the day of the month
for delivery and #.
Make the message private
Continue
Enter 1 or 2.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
1
Request a receipt
2
Continue
OR
2
3
# *
desired day of
the month for delivery
PM
2
OR
2
*2
OR
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
On-hook.
• *1 Example: To enter 5:00, press 5#. To enter 5:15, press 515#.
• *2 This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24-hour time.
• *3 Example: If today is February 16 and you enter 17#, the message will be delivered
tomorrow. If today is February 16 and you enter 5#, the message will be delivered on March
5.
• Auto Receipt is not enabled by default. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
• New urgent messages are played before any other messages. However, old urgent
messages are played with other messages, in the original order.
Personal Group Distribution Lists
Personal Group Distribution Lists allow you to send messages to several subscribers at once (refer to "
Message Delivery"). You can create and edit 4 Personal Group Distribution Lists, and these lists can only be
used by you. You can assign 40 group members (subscribers) to each list and record a name for each group
(for example, "Sales Team", "Department Heads", etc.).
152
Operating Manual
1.8.4 Sending Messages
To create and edit personal group distribution lists
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
4
Log in to your mailbox.
desired personal group
distribution list no.
4
Enter 44.
Enter the desired personal group
distribution list number (1–4).
C.Tone
Enter 1 to record
a name for the group.
State the group name.
2
2
1
1
Enter 1
to end recording.
Enter 2
to accept.
Enter 2 to add
group members.
To continue
mailbox no. of
the subscriber
2
Add more subscribers
to the list
2
End
OR
Enter 2 to add
the subscriber
to the list.
Enter the mailbox number of
the subscriber you wish
to add to the list.
1
On-hook.
Enter 1 or 2.
To delete members from personal group distribution lists
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
Enter 44.
1
Delete all members,
then go on-hook to finish
OR
2
Delete one member
Enter 1 or 2.
desired personal group
distribution list no.
4
Enter the desired personal group
distribution list number (1–4).
1
Delete the announced member
2
Keep the member and
announce the next member
3
Enter 3 to delete
a group member.
OR
On-hook.
Enter 1 or 2.
Repeat this step to delete other members.
Operating Manual
153
1.8.4 Sending Messages
To change personal group distribution list names
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
4
Enter 44.
1
Change (record)
the list name
3
Delete the list name,
then go on-hook to finish
desired personal group
distribution list no.
1
Enter the desired personal group
distribution list number (1–4).
Enter 1 to change
the list name.
OR
C.Tone
1
State the list name.
Enter 1 or 3.
Enter 1
to end recording.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
• The System Administrator can create "Mailbox Groups", which are similar to personal group
distribution lists except they can be used by other subscribers. For more information, consult
your System Administrator.
External Message Delivery
You can send messages to outside parties and to extension users who do not have their own mailboxes.
After you record your message, the system will dial the appropriate telephone numbers and/or extension
numbers, and once the party on the other end answers the call, your recorded message will be played back.
You can specify message recipients by:
• Extension number
• Outside telephone number
• External Message Delivery List number (refer to "
External Message Delivery Lists")
Unlike recipients who have their own mailboxes, you have no way of knowing who may answer the call
when the Unified Messaging system sends an External Delivery Message. To protect the privacy of your
messages, you may assign a password that must be entered by the other party before your message is
played back.
You can set Auto Receipt so that you will receive notification once the recipient has played back your
message. You can also send your message immediately or set a message delivery time. Finally, recipients
of an External Delivery Message can reply to your message, and can even set urgent and private message
status.
• This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator or System
Manager.
154
Operating Manual
1.8.4 Sending Messages
To send an external delivery message
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
9
3
1
Go to "To specify a single recipient"
or "To specify multiple recipients
(external message delivery list)".
Enter 931.
To specify a single recipient
*
1
outside line access no.
Outside party’s
telephone no.
Enter 1.
Enter the outside line access number
needed for making outside calls.
Dial the outside party’s telephone number
(including area code if needed).
To specify an extension instead of
an outside telephone number,
enter the extension number,
then skip the next step.
4-digit password
2
Enter 2
to accept.
C.Tone
Enter a 4-digit password
State the recipient’s name.
required for listening to the message.
Press # if you do not want
to set a password.
1
#
Enter 1
to end recording.
Enter # for immediate delivery.
Go to
"To record your message".
To set message delivery time,
go to "To set message delivery time".
Continued on next page
• * If you are using an ISDN or SIP line in en bloc dialling mode, to insert a pause or special
command in the middle of the telephone number, pause momentarily while entering the
telephone number. You will hear a list of available options, for example, "To add more digits,
press 4. To insert a pause, press 5.".
Operating Manual
155
1.8.4 Sending Messages
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Continued from previous page
To specify multiple recipients (external message delivery list)
desired list no.
2
4-digit password
Enter the desired list number (1 or 2).
Enter 2.
Enter a 4-digit password
required for listening to the message.
Press # if you do not want
to set a password.
Go to
"To record your message".
#
Enter # for immediate delivery.
To set message delivery time,
go to "To set message delivery time".
To set message delivery time
1
# *
desired delivery time
1
2
Enter the desired delivery time and #.
desired day of the month
for delivery
AM
*2
OR
PM
Enter 1 for AM, 2 for PM.
#
*3
Go to
"To record your message".
Enter the day of the month
for delivery and #.
To record your message
1
Request a receipt
2
Continue
2
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
1
Enter 1
to end recording.
156
Operating Manual
C.Tone
Enter 2
to accept.
You can pause and resume
recording by pressing 2.
If you pause for more than
20 seconds, recording will
stop automatically.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
Record your message.
On-hook.
1.8.4 Sending Messages
• *1 Example: To enter 5:00, press 5#. To enter 5:15, press 515#.
• *2 This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24-hour time.
• *3 Example: If today is February 16 and you enter 17#, the message will be delivered
tomorrow. If today is February 16 and you enter 5#, the message will be delivered on March
5.
• If you set a password required for listening to the message, make sure you notify each
recipient what the password is.
• If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of outside telephone
numbers. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
• Auto Receipt is not enabled by default. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
External Message Delivery Lists
Your external message delivery lists allow you to send messages to several outside parties and extension
users who do not have their own mailboxes at once (refer to "
External Message Delivery"). You can
create and edit 2 External Message Delivery Lists, and these lists can only be used by you. You can assign
up to 8 members to each list and record a name for each member.
• This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator.
Operating Manual
157
1.8.4 Sending Messages
To create/add to an external message delivery list
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
9
Log in to your mailbox.
3
1
List number 1
2
List number 2
OR
2
Enter 932.
1
Enter 1 or 2.
outside
telephone no.
outside line access no.
Enter the outside line access number
needed for making outside calls.
Enter 1.
*
Dial the outside telephone number
(including area code if needed).
2
Enter 2 to accept.
To store an extension number, simply
enter the extension number
then skip the next step.
1
2
C.Tone
Enter 1
to end recording.
State the member’s
name.
Enter 2 to add
the member.
To continue
1
Add more members
2
End
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
On-hook.
• * If you are using an ISDN or SIP line in en bloc dialling mode, to insert a pause or special
command in the middle of the telephone number, pause momentarily while entering the
telephone number. You will hear a list of available options, for example, "To add more digits,
press 4. To insert a pause, press 5.".
To delete members from an external message delivery list
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
9
3
1
List number 1
2
List number 2
2
OR
Enter 932.
1
Delete all members,
then go on-hook
OR
2
Delete one member
Enter 1 or 2.
Enter 1 or 2.
1
Delete the announced member
2
Keep the member and
announce the next member
Operating Manual
Enter 2.
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
Repeat this step to delete
other members.
158
2
On-hook.
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
Receiving External Delivery Messages
When you send an external delivery message, the Unified Messaging system will call each of the specified
recipients. When a recipient answers the call, the system will guide him or her through the following
procedure. After a recipient has listened to an external delivery message, he or she can send you a reply to
your message, and even set urgent or private message status.
To receive a message and reply
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
When a recipient answers the call
1
#
4-digit password
Enter 1 to receive
the message.
The message is played back.
Enter a 4-digit password and #
required for listening to the message.
If you did not set a password,
this step will be skipped.
1
2
Enter 2 to reply.
C.Tone
Enter 1
to end recording.
Record a reply.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
To end the call, press ,
then go on-hook to finish.
1
Make the message urgent
1
Make the message private
2
Continue
OR
2
Continue
Enter 1 or 2.
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
On-hook.
• If the recipient enters an incorrect password 3 times, the system will announce the following
information if it has been programmed. This information can help the recipient track down
the message or message sender (you).
– Company name
– Callback telephone number
– Your subscriber name
• The Unified Messaging system may be able to guide recipients using a different language.
For more information, consult your System Administrator.
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
–
Call Transfer
–
Incomplete Call Handling
–
Assigning Your Covering Extension
–
Remote Call Forwarding
–
Assigning and Cancelling Telephone Numbers for Call Transfer to Outside Line
Operating Manual
159
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
–
Voice Mail Transfer
Call Transfer
When a call reaches your extension via the Automated Attendant service, normally your extension will ring
and you can answer the call. If you use the Call Transfer feature, however, the Unified Messaging system
can handle the call in a number of ways. The status you set for Call Transfer determines what happens to
the call. You can set one of the following:
Call Blocking:
The call will be handled by the Incomplete Call Handling feature (refer to "
Incomplete Call Handling"),
which allows you to have your calls ring at another extension, transferred to your mailbox, transferred to the
operator, etc. The call will not ring at your extension. The call will be handled according to the settings you
have made for Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer.
Call Screening:
The system will prompt the caller to record his or her name. If you are available to answer calls, the system
will ring your extension and play back the name of the caller. You can then answer the call if you choose. If
you do not or cannot answer the call, the call will be handled according to the settings you have made for
Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer.
Intercom Paging:
The Unified Messaging system will page you using the Intercom Paging feature. The call will not ring at your
extension. Your name will be announced to alert you to the call. If you do not or cannot answer the call, the
call will be handled according to the settings you have made for Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer.
Transfer to Mailbox:
The system will transfer the caller to your mailbox where he or she can leave a message for you. The call
will not ring at your extension.
Transfer to Custom Service:
The system will transfer the caller to the custom service you specify here. The call will not ring at your
extension.
Disable Call Transfer:
Turns the Call Transfer feature off. The call will ring at your extension.
160
Operating Manual
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
To set call transfer status
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
2
3
Log in to your mailbox.
5
1
4
5
6
Enter 51.
Call Blocking
Call Screening
Intercom Paging
Transfer to Mailbox
Transfer to Custom Service
Disable Call Transfer
Enter the desired Call Transfer status.
Follow the prompts as necessary.
On-hook.
The prompts heard will vary depending
on the feature you set in the previous step.
• If Call Screening or Disable is selected, calls will be transferred to an outside telephone if a
telephone number has been programmed for call transfer to outside line (refer to "
Assigning and Cancelling Telephone Numbers for Call Transfer to Outside Line").
Incomplete Call Handling
When a call is directed to your extension via the Automated Attendant service, Incomplete Call Handling will
handle the calls if:
• You do not answer the call (These calls are considered "no answer" calls).
• You are on another call (These calls are considered "busy" calls).
• You have set Call Blocking (refer to "
Call Transfer").
The status you set for Incomplete Call Handling determines what happens to these calls. You can set one or
more of the following for no answer calls and for busy calls separately. If you select more than one option,
the caller will be prompted to select his or her desired option.
Leaving a Message:
The system will transfer the caller to your mailbox where he or she can leave a message for you.
Transfer to Covering Extension:
The system will transfer the caller to your Covering Extension (refer to "
Assigning Your Covering
Extension"). If you have not assigned your Covering Extension, this option is not available.
Intercom Paging:
The system will page you using the Intercom Paging feature. Your name will be announced to alert you to
the call.
Transfer to Custom Service:
The system will transfer the caller to the Custom Service you specify here.
Transfer to Operator:
The system will transfer the caller to the operator.
Operating Manual
161
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
Return to Top Menu:
The caller is returned to the top menu of the Automated Attendant service and can then choose to call a
different extension.
To set Incomplete Call Handling status
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
No answer calls
5
Busy calls
5
OR
Enter 4 or 5.
Enter 5.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Leaving a Message
Transfer to Covering Extension
Intercom Paging
Transfer to Custom Service
Transfer to Operator
Return to Top Menu
Enter the desired Incomplete Call
Handling status.
To continue
Follow the prompts
as necessary.
The prompts heard will vary depending
on the feature you set in the previous step.
1
Change
OR
2
Accept
Enter 1 or 2.
Select an additional status.
OR
If finished, go on-hook.
On-hook.
• When Call Blocking is enabled, blocked calls are treated by Incomplete Call Handling for no
answer calls.
Assigning Your Covering Extension
A Covering Extension is an extension that receives your calls instead of you. Your calls can be transferred to
your Covering Extension in 2 ways:
• By the Incomplete Call Handling Feature:
When the Incomplete Call Handling feature handles the call (i.e., if you do not answer, if you are on
another call, or if you have set Call Blocking), it will be transferred to your Covering Extension if you have
Incomplete Call
set Incomplete Call Handling to "Transfer to Covering Extension" (refer to "
Handling").
• By pressing the specified dialling key (0, 3–9):
If the caller presses the key assigned for "Transfer to the Specified Extension" during your greeting
message or while recording a message for you, the call will be transferred to your Covering Extension.
• You can change the dialling key that transfers your callers to your Covering Extension. If you
assign the "Transfer to Operator" option in your Personal Custom Service to a dialling key,
callers who press that dialling key will be transferred to your Covering Extension (refer to
Personal Custom Service").
"
• If you do not assign your Covering Extension, callers will be transferred to the operator
instead.
162
Operating Manual
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
To assign your Covering Extension
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
5
Log in to your mailbox.
desired extension no.
2
Enter the desired extension number.
Enter 52.
If you have already assigned your Covering Extension and want to assign
a different extension, press 1 before entering the desired extension number.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
On-hook.
• Once you assign a Covering Extension, remember to tell callers in your greeting message
that they can press the button you have assigned for transferring to your Covering
Extension. For example, "To speak with my assistant, press 0".
Remote Call Forwarding
You can programme the Unified Messaging system to forward your calls to another extension or to an
outside telephone (if authorised). You can do this even when you are away from the office. This feature may
be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox. There are 6 forwarding
settings available:
FWD All:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number.
FWD Busy:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when you are already on another call.
FWD No Answer:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when you do not answer your telephone.
FWD Busy and No Answer:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when you are on another call or do not answer
your telephone.
FWD to Outside:
Forwards all incoming calls to the specified outside telephone number if you are authorised to use this
feature.
FWD Cancel:
Cancels the forwarding setting.
Operating Manual
163
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
To assign outside telephone numbers for Remote Call Forwarding
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
1
Change telephone number 1
2
Change telephone number 2
8
OR
Enter 48.
Enter 1 or 2.
If you have already set a telephone number
and wish to change it, press 1 after selecting
telephone number 1 or 2.
outside line access no.
outside party’s
telephone no.
Enter the outside line access number Dial the outside party’s telephone
needed for making outside calls.
number (max. 32 digits including
outside line access number).
2
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
• Before you can forward your calls to an outside telephone, you should first store the
telephone numbers you plan on using with this feature. You can store 2 telephone numbers
for use with Remote Call Forwarding.
• If you change one of the outside telephone numbers for Remote Call Forwarding, you will
need to set Remote Call Forwarding to "FWD to Outside" once again before the new outside
telephone number will be used as the forward destination. If you do not do this, the old
telephone number will continue to be used.
164
Operating Manual
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
To set/cancel Remote Call Forwarding
From Outside Telephone
9
Log in to your mailbox.
4
Enter 94.
extension no. of
the transfer destination
1
FWD All
2
FWD Busy
3
FWD No Answer
4
FWD Busy or No Answer
5
FWD to Outside, then go to STEP A.*
6
Cancel call forwarding, then go to STEP B.
Enter the extension number
of the transfer destination,
then go to STEP B.
OR
Enter required number.
STEP A
1
Set telephone number 1
2
Set telephone number 2
OR
3
Enter required number.
outside party’s
telephone no.
outside line
access no.
Set another
telephone number
Enter the outside line access
number needed for making
outside calls.
Dial the outside party’s telephone
number (max. 32 digits including
outside line access number).
STEP B
2
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
• * This option is announced only if you are authorised to use it through system programming
for PBX COS (Class of Service) settings and UM COS settings. For more information,
consult your System Administrator.
Assigning and Cancelling Telephone Numbers for Call Transfer to Outside
Line
When you assign a telephone number for Call Transfer to Outside Line, your calls will be transferred to the
assigned telephone number when:
• You have set Call Screening (refer to "
Call Transfer").
• You have set Disable Call Transfer (refer to "
Call Transfer").
Operating Manual
165
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
To assign telephone numbers for call transfer to outside line
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
5
Log in to your mailbox.
outside line access no.
6
Enter the outside line access number
needed for making outside calls.
Enter 56.
If you have already stored a telephone number
and wish to change it, press 1 before continuing.
outside party's
telephone no.
2
Dial the outside party’s telephone number
(max. 32 digits including outside line access number).
Enter 2 to accept.
On-hook.
To cancel telephone numbers for call transfer to outside line
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
5
6
Enter 563.
3
On-hook.
• This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator.
• If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of outside telephone
numbers. Consult your System Administrator for more information.
Voice Mail Transfer
If you cannot answer calls, you can forward them to your mailbox. You can select the type of incoming calls
(Intercom Calls/Outside Calls/Both Calls) that are forwarded.
If your telephone has a Message button, the Message light turns on when a message is left in your mailbox.
You will hear an indication tone* when going off-hook, regardless of whether or not your telephone has a
Message button.
You can also create a Voice Mail Transfer button on your phone to transfer received outside calls to a
mailbox of another extension so that calling parties can leave messages. Using the Voice Mail Transfer
button, you can also perform operations with one touch (for PT and PS only).
166
Operating Manual
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
To forward your calls to your mailbox
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
Both Calls
OR
7
1
1
2
Outside Calls
OR
2
Off-hook.
Enter
71.
0
3
4
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as you desire.
5
Cancel
All Calls
Busy
No Answer
Busy/No Answer
Enter required number.
For "Cancel", go on-hook
directly after entering 0.
UM group’s floating
extension no.
#
Enter UM group’s floating
extension number.
Enter #.
C.Tone
On-hook.
To forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing
PT/PS
While on-hook
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Press Voice Mail
Transfer.
To transfer a call to a mailbox
PT/PS
During a conversation
(DSS)
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Press Voice Mail
Transfer.
OR
desired
extension no.
Press DSS or dial desired
extension number.
Operating Manual
167
1.8.6 Other Features
To transfer your own call to the called extension’s mailbox
PT/PS
extension no.
R.B.Tone
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
OR
OR
B.Tone
(DSS)
Off-hook.
OR
Dial extension number
or press DSS.
DND Tone
Press Voice Mail
Transfer.
• *Indication tone after going off-hook
1s
• If using a PS in parallel with a PT or SLT (in Wireless XDP Parallel mode), you cannot use
the Voice Mail Transfer button to forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Voice Mail Transfer button or a Message button.
1.8.6 Other Features
–
Interview Mailbox
–
Message Waiting Notification
–
Personal Caller Name Announcement
–
Live Call Screening (LCS)
–
Recording Your Conversation
–
Assigning Your Telephone Numbers for Remote Automatic Log-in and Toll Saver
–
Personal Custom Service
–
Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
–
Setting Absent Message Remotely
–
Call-through Service
–
Communication Assistant plug-in for Microsoft Outlook
–
IMAP
Interview Mailbox
An interview mailbox is a mailbox designed to ask questions to callers and record their answers. If you have
an interview mailbox (not all subscribers do), you can record up to 10 questions and set the answer
recording time individually for each question from 1 to 60 seconds.
168
Operating Manual
1.8.6 Other Features
Your interview mailbox can be used, for example, to allow callers to place orders or request information from
your company. You can ask them to record their names, address, and order or request information, and then
you can note their information later while playing back their messages.
• If you would like to use this feature, you must first be assigned an Interview Mailbox. For
more information, consult your System Administrator.
To record questions
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
Log in to your mailbox.
9
2
2
1
3
4
Enter 921.
Change (record or re-record) this question.
Skip to the next question, then repeat this step.
Skip to the previous question, then repeat this step.
Select a specific question.
Enter the question number and #, then repeat this step.
Enter the desired option.
To continue
Change another question.
1
C.Tone
Record the question.
2
OR
Enter 1
Enter 2
to end recording. to accept.
If finished, go on-hook.
On-hook.
To change answer lengths
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Change the answer length.
Skip to the next question, then repeat this step.
3 Skip to the previous question, then repeat this step.
4 Select a specific question.
Enter the question number and #, then repeat this step.
1
2
Log in to your mailbox.
9
2
2
Enter 922.
Enter the desired option.
To continue
answer length
Enter the answer length
(1–60) in seconds.
Change the answer length of another question.
OR
If finished, go on-hook.
On-hook.
Operating Manual
169
1.8.6 Other Features
To delete questions
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
9
Log in to your mailbox.
2
3
Enter 923.
1
2
3
4
Delete the current question.
Skip to the next question, then repeat this step.
Skip to the previous question, then repeat this step.
Select a specific question.
Enter the question number and #, then repeat this step.
On-hook.
Enter the desired option.
If finished, go on-hook.
Message Reception Mode
If you have an interview mailbox in addition to your regular mailbox, Message Reception Mode determines
which mailbox is used when:
• Calls are directed to your mailbox by the "Leaving a Message" setting of the Incomplete Call Handling
feature (refer to "
Incomplete Call Handling").
• Your extension is a Logical Extension (i.e., your mailbox receives your calls automatically, perhaps
because you do not have your own telephone for regular use).
To set a message mode
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
5
3
Enter 53.
1
Enter 1 to toggle between
Interview Mode (interview mailbox) and
Message Recording Mode (regular mailbox).
On-hook.
• Not all subscribers have interview mailboxes. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
Message Waiting Notification
The Message Waiting Notification feature lets you know you have received new messages in your mailbox
by:
Message Waiting Lamp:
The message lamp on your telephone (if it has one) will light when you receive a new message. If you have
a 6-line display PT, you can also see the number of new messages you have on your display. If your
telephone has a Message button, the Message light will also turn on when you receive a new message.
Device Notification:
Notifying you via a "device", i.e., an outside telephone, another PBX extension, your cellular phone, etc. You
can assign three different devices. For each device, you have the option of receiving notification for urgent
messages only, or for all messages. You can also choose to receive notification during certain hours only
170
Operating Manual
1.8.6 Other Features
(called "scheduling"), which is useful if you do not want to be disturbed at night, for example. For more
information on scheduling, consult your System Administrator.
If you turn device notification on for more than one device, the lowest numbered device (1, 2, or 3) will be
used first. If notification is not possible (for example, if your outside telephone is busy), the next device will
be used.
Message notification by e-mail may also be available for your mailbox. When you receive new messages in
your mailbox, you can receive notification by e-mail. The recorded message can also be added to the e-mail
as an attachment. Consult your System Administrator for more information.
• Displaying the number of new messages is only available with a 6-line Display PT. For more
information, consult your System Administrator.
To turn Message Waiting Lamp Notification On/Off
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
6
1
1
Enter 61.
Enter 1 to enable/disable lamp notification.
On-hook.
To turn Device Notification On/Off
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
1
Send notification
for all messages
OR
2
Send notification
for urgent messages only
6
2
desired device no.
Enter 62.
Enter the desired
device number (1–6).
1
2
3
Use a preprogrammed schedule
Receive notification always (continuously)
Turn off notifications
Enter 1 or 2.
On-hook.
Enter 1, 2 or 3.
• Device number 4, 5, or 6 is used to specify a device number that is "Device No. 1, 2, or 3"
for "E-mail/Text Message Device" in Web Maintenance Console.
• To use the Device Notification feature for device number 1, 2, or 3, the telephone number for
each device should first be assigned.
Operating Manual
171
1.8.6 Other Features
To change device numbers
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
3
desired device no.
Enter 63.
Enter the desired
device number (1–3).
6
1
Enter 1 to change
the assigned number.
To delete the assigned number,
press 3 then go on-hook to finish.
outside telephone no.
outside line access no.
Enter the outside line access number
needed for making outside calls.
*
Dial the outside telephone number
(including area code if needed).
To store an extension number,
simply enter the extension number
then skip the next step.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
• * If you are using an ISDN or SIP line in en bloc dialling mode, to insert a pause or special
command in the middle of the telephone number, pause momentarily while entering the
telephone number. You will hear a list of available options, for example, "To add more digits,
press 4. To insert a pause, press 5.".
• If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of outside telephone
numbers. Consult your System Administrator for more information.
Personal Caller Name Announcement
By storing caller telephone numbers and recording caller names, you can have the Unified Messaging
system announce the caller name to you when:
• You play back a message from one of the assigned callers.
• The system transfers a call to you from one of the assigned callers.
• The system pages you to inform you that you have a call from one of the assigned callers.
This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox.
172
Operating Manual
1.8.6 Other Features
To assign Caller ID numbers and recording names
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
4
Log in to your mailbox.
5
1
Enter 451.
STEP A
caller ID no.
2
#
C.Tone
Enter the caller ID number
(caller’s telephone number, 20 digits max.)
and #.
State the caller’s name.
Enter 2
to accept.
To continue
STEP B
2
1
1
To add more caller ID numbers.
2
End
OR
Enter 1 to end
recording.
Enter 2
to add.
Enter 1 or 2.
On-hook.
To change Caller ID numbers and recorded names
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
5
2
Enter 452.
1
Change the Caller ID number,
then go to STEP A in "To assign Caller ID numbers and recording names".
2
Change the caller’s name,
then go to STEP B in "To assign Caller ID numbers and recording names".
3
Accept the current item as is and skip to the next item,
then repeat this step.
OR
OR
On-hook.
Operating Manual
173
1.8.6 Other Features
To delete Caller ID numbers and recorded names
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
4
Log in to your mailbox.
5
Delete all numbers,
then go on-hook to finish.
3
Enter 453.
On-hook.
OR
2
Delete one number.
Enter 1 or 2.
1
Delete the announced number.
2
Keep the number and
announce the next number,
then repeat this step.
OR
On-hook.
Enter 1 or 2.
When finished, go on-hook.
• The number of callers you can assign for this feature is controlled by the System
Administrator.
Live Call Screening (LCS)
While a caller is leaving a message in your mailbox, you can monitor the call without
answering. If you so desire, you can answer the call while monitoring. There are two
methods available (Default: Hands-free mode).
Hands-free mode:
You can monitor the message automatically, live through the telephone speaker.
Private mode:
You will hear an alarm tone while the caller is leaving a message.
Before operating
• Create a Live Call Screening (LCS) button (Personal Programming).
• Select the mode, either Hands-free or Private (Personal Programming).
• Set the extension PIN (Personal Identification Number).
• Set the Live Call Screening feature.
174
Operating Manual
1.8.6 Other Features
To set Live Call Screening
PIN: Personal Identification Number
PT/PS
extension PIN
(Live Call
Screening)
Press Live Call
Screening.
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
This is required only when
an extension PIN is stored.
To cancel Live Call Screening
PT/PS
(Live Call
Screening)
Press red Live Call Screening.
Operation Flowchart
The operations in the shaded areas can be done hands-free.
Operating Manual
175
1.8.6 Other Features
PT
PT/PS
Hands-free Mode
Private Mode
(Alarm Tone)
Monitoring (Hands-free)
Monitoring
OR
No operation
MONITOR
OR
Monitoring (Handset)
(Live Call
Screening)
Off-hook.
Press SP-PHONE, MONITOR or Live Call
Screening.
Stop
monitoring Answering
(Live Call
Screening)
OR
Press Live Call
Screening.
Stop
monitoring
Answering
the call
Stop
monitoring
Answering
the call
MONITOR
OR
Press
SP-PHONE
or MONITOR.
OR
Off-hook.
(Live Call
Screening)
MONITOR
Press SP-PHONE or
MONITOR.
Off-hook.
On-hook.
Press
Live Call
Screening.
• The Live Call Screening (LCS) button light shows the feature status as follows:
Off: LCS is off.
Flashing green rapidly: Alerting in the Private mode.
Flashing green slowly: Monitoring.
Red on: LCS is on.
• The manager extension can clear an extension PIN.
• This feature is available for a single line telephone if it is connected to a proprietary
telephone in parallel. (Private mode only)
To answer the call while monitoring, press Recall/hookswitch.
• Only the handset monitoring in the Private mode is available for PS users.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Live Call Screening Mode Set
Select the mode, either monitoring the message through the speaker automatically or
receiving, while the caller leaves a message.
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Live Call Screening (LCS) button.
Recording Your Conversation
You can record a conversation into a mailbox while talking on the phone.
You can select the mailbox each time you record a conversation.
176
Operating Manual
1.8.6 Other Features
To record into your mailbox (Two-way Record)
PT/PS
During a conversation
To stop recording,
press this button again.
(Two-way
Record)
Press Two-way Record.
To record into another mailbox (Two-way Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(DSS)
OR
(Two-way
Transfer)
another
extension no.
Press Two-way
Transfer.
Press DSS or enter
another extension
number.
To stop recording,
press this button again.
To record into another mailbox with one touch (One-touch Two-way Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(One-touch
Two-way
Transfer)
Press One-touch Two-way Transfer.
• The Two-way Record button light, Two-way Transfer button light or One-touch Two-way
Transfer button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Not recording.
On: Recording the conversation.
Note
When you record your Two-way telephone conversations, you should inform the other party
that the conversation is being recorded.
Operating Manual
177
1.8.6 Other Features
• If all Unified Messaging system ports are busy when you try to use one of these features,
you will hear a warning tone, dial tone, or busy tone, depending on the feature you are trying
to use.
• Recording time when using these features may be limited. For more information, consult
your System Administrator.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Two-way Record button, a Two-way Transfer button and a One-touch Twoway Transfer button.
Assigning Your Telephone Numbers for Remote Automatic Log-in and Toll
Saver
When logging in to your mailbox remotely (i.e., from an outside telephone) to listen to your messages, the
Remote Automatic Log-in (refer to "
Remote Access") and Toll Saver features identify you by
recognising your telephone number (caller ID). In order to use these features, you must first store the
telephone numbers that you will use to access your mailbox remotely.
Automatic Log-in and Toll Saver may be disabled by the System Administrator for your mailbox.
To assign
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
1
Change telephone number 1
2
Change telephone number 2
9
OR
Enter 49.
Enter 1 or 2.
If you have already set a telephone number and
wish to change it, press 1 after selecting telephone
number 1 or 2.
outside telephone no.
#
Enter your outside telephone number
(max. 20 digits including area code if needed) and #.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
• The System Administrator must enable Automatic Log-in and Toll Saver for your mailbox
before it can be used.
Personal Custom Service
A Personal Custom Service is a set of options you can present to your callers, allowing them to press
buttons on their telephones in order to access certain features. You should explain the options available to
your callers in each of your personal greeting messages, for example, "This is (name). I can’t take your call
right now. Press 3 to leave me a message. Press 4 to speak with my assistant. Press 5 to dial another
extension…". For details on recording your greeting messages, refer to "
Changing or Deleting Your
Personal Greeting Messages" or "
Personal Greetings for Caller ID".
You can create your own personal custom service and allow your callers to access the following features:
178
Operating Manual
1.8.6 Other Features
Transfer to Mailbox:
The system will transfer the caller to your mailbox (or another mailbox you specify here) where he or she
can leave a message.
Transfer to Extension:
The system will transfer the caller to the extension you specify when creating the custom service.
Transfer to Outside:
The system will transfer the caller to the outside telephone number you specify when creating the custom
service. This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator or System Manager.
Transfer to Custom Service:
The system will transfer the caller to the Custom Service you specify here.
Voice Mail Service:
The system will prompt the caller to enter a mailbox number and leave a message.
Automated Attendant Service:
The system will prompt the caller to dial an extension number in order to speak with someone else.
Intercom Paging:
The system will page you using the Intercom Paging feature. Your name will be announced to alert you to
the call.
Repeat Greeting:
The caller can play your greeting message back from the beginning in order to listen to your Personal
Custom Service options once again.
Transfer to Operator:
The system will transfer the caller to the operator, or to your Covering Extension if you have assigned one
Assigning Your Covering Extension").
(refer to "
You can also select what happens when a caller makes no selection (No DTMF Input Operation) while
listening to your greeting, perhaps because the caller is using a rotary/pulse telephone. The caller can either
be transferred to your mailbox or be disconnected.
• The following dialling keys are assigned to the following features by default, and cannot be
changed.
1
End recording
2
Begin recording while listening to personal greeting message
Exit
Operating Manual
179
1.8.6 Other Features
To create your personal custom service
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
6
Enter 461.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
desired dialling key
1
Enter the desired dialling key (0, 3–9)
that you want to assign an option to.
Transfer to a mailbox,
then enter the desired mailbox number.
Transfer to an extension,
then enter the desired extension number.
Transfer to an outside telephone
(may not be available).
• Next enter the outside line access number
and the desired outside telephone number
(including area code if needed).
Transfer to a Custom Service,
then enter the desired Custom Service number.
Activate Voice Mail Service.
Activate Automated Attendant Service
(Call Transfer Service).
Activate paging.
Repeat the greeting.
Transfer to the operator.
Enter 1.
Skip this step if you are creating your
Personal Custom Service for the first time.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
Enter the desired option.
To delete options from your personal custom service
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
6
1
Enter 461.
On-hook.
180
Operating Manual
desired dialling key
Enter the desired dialling key (0, 3–9)
that you want to delete an option from.
3
Enter 3.
1.8.6 Other Features
To select the No DTMF Input operation
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
6
Enter 461.
1
2
3
1
1
1
Enter 1 to select
the No DTMF Input Operation.
Message recording.
Disconnect the caller.
Disconnect the caller when call was received after hours
(message recording for all other times).
Enter 1.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
Enter the desired option.
To confirm the settings for your personal custom service
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
6
Enter 46.
2
Enter 2
to review.
On-hook.
• The System Administrator or the System Manager must enable Transfer to Outside for your
mailbox before it can be used.
• The Transfer to Outside option can be used a maximum of 4 times in your Personal Custom
Service.
• If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of outside telephone
numbers. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
You can receive an alarm at your telephone to remind you of a meeting, appointment or as a wake-up call.
The alarm can occur either once or daily (every day until cancelled) at a preset time. When you go off-hook
to answer, you will hear a special dial tone or prerecorded message.
Operating Manual
181
1.8.6 Other Features
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
9
5
Enter 95.
1
Change the setting.
2
Accept the current setting,
then go on-hook to finish.
3
Cancel (turn off) the Timed Reminder,
then go on-hook to finish.
Enter the desired option.
AM
1
desired time
1
# *
*2
2
Enter the desired time and #.
Once
1
OR
OR
PM
2
Enter 1 for AM,
2 for PM.
2
Daily
Enter 1 for once
or 2 for daily.
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
• *1 Example: To enter 5:00, press 5#. To enter 5:15, press 515#.
• *2 This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24-hour time.
Setting Absent Message Remotely
You can set your absent message by accessing the subscriber service menu. To login to your mailbox from
Remote Access".
an outside telephone, refer to "
To set/cancel
From Outside Telephone
1
Change the setting.
7
2
Accept the current setting,
then go on-hook to finish.
Enter 7.
3
Cancel your absent message,
then go on-hook to finish.
Log in to your mailbox.
Enter the desired option.
absent message no.
Enter an Absent Message Number (1–9).
182
Operating Manual
On-hook.
1.8.6 Other Features
Call-through Service
You can make outside calls by accessing the subscriber service menu (from an outside telephone) and
dialling an outside destination. To login to your mailbox from an outside telephone, refer to "
Remote
Access".
To call an outside party
From Outside Telephone
8
outside line access no.
Enter 8.
Enter the outside line access number
needed for making outside calls.
Log in to your mailbox.
outside telephone no.
#
Dial the outside telephone number and #.
Talk.
• This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator.
Communication Assistant plug-in for Microsoft Outlook
If the Communication Assistant plug-in for Microsoft Outlook is installed to your PC, you can access the
contents of your mailbox from your PC through Microsoft Outlook. Voice messages appear in subscribers’
inboxes as e-mail messages.
With the Outlook plug-in, you can do the following:
• Play back voice messages on a PC or through a telephone
• Record and send voice messages from a PC or telephone
• Forward and reply to messages to another subscriber
• Call back the sender of a message quickly when the message has caller information included
• Export voice message data
• Attach voice messages to other e-mail messages
• For details about using the Outlook Plug-in, refer to the documentation of Communication
Assistant.
IMAP
If your e-mail client supports IMAP4, you can access the contents of your mailbox through an e-mail client
and you can do the following:
• Play back voice messages
• Save voice message data to your PC
• Delete voice messages
Operating Manual
183
1.8.6 Other Features
• For configuring an IMAP account, consult your System Administrator.
UM IMAP Session Controller for Microsoft Outlook
If you will be accessing Unified Messaging data through an IMAP connection, you must install the IMAP
Session Controller software. This software is a plug-in for Microsoft Windows. When installed, it appears in
the notification area. The software changes the selected account in the Outlook user interface from the
Unified Messaging IMAP account to the default Outlook inbox after a specified time period. Doing so
enables multiple users efficiently interact with the PBX through Microsoft Outlook.
To download IMAP Session Controller
You can download the IMAP Session Controller software from Web Maintenance Console:
1. Log in to Web Maintenance Console.
2. On the Edit User screen, click the Unified Message tab.
3. Click Download for Unified Messaging Plug in to access the download site for the IMAP Session
Controller software.
• For details about Web Maintenance Console, refer to "3.2 System Programming Using Web
Maintenance Console".
To install IMAP Session Controller
Double-click UmicSetup.exe, and then follow the on-screen guidance to install the software.
To uninstall IMAP Session Controller
Uninstall this software using the programme uninstall feature in the Control Panel. For details, refer to the
documentation for your operating system.
To configure settings and view information
While this software is running, you can configure settings and view information about the software. Rightclick the icon in the notification area, and then select an item.
Notification area icon
Item
Settings
Description
Language
Select the language to use for the settings dialogue box and the notification area menu.
No Operation Timer
Enter the time period after which the selected account is changed from the Unified
Messaging account to the default Outlook inbox if there has been no user activity.
Timer value: 30 to 600 seconds
(Recommended timer value: 30 to 60 seconds)
184
Operating Manual
1.8.7 Quick Reference
Item
Description
E-Mail Account for UM
Enter your Unified Messaging e-mail account. The maximum size is 256 characters.
If nothing is entered, all of the e-mail accounts using IMAP are assumed to be Unified
Messaging accounts.
You can copy the mail account from Mail Account in the General tab of the Internet Email Settings dialogue box.
• To open the Internet E-mail Settings dialogue box:
– In Outlook 2007, click the Tools menu → Account Settings → Change → More
Settings button.
– In Outlook 2010, click the File menu → Info → Account Settings → Change →
More Settings button.
About
Display the copyright and version of this software.
Exit
Exit this software.
1.8.7 Quick Reference
The flow below includes all top menu options and frequently used features. Only options 1–4 and 0 are
announced in the top menu when accessed. If you press 0 (help menu), you can listen to the whole top
menu (options 1–9).
The help menu may not be available from the top menu depending on the COS settings of your mailbox.
Operating Manual
185
1.8.7 Quick Reference
To Enter a Mailbox
From a Remote
Location, Dial:
#6 + mailbox number
1
Listen to New Messages:
1 Voice Message
# All Messages
2
Send a Message:
Enter Mailbox Number
1 Record Message
2 Add Another Mailbox
3 Review Mailing List
3
Listen to Old Messages:
1 Voice Message
# All Messages
Continued on next page
186
Operating Manual
Main Menu:
You have
new messages.
Password #
1
2
#
1
2
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Listen to New Messages
Send a Message
Listen to Old Messages
Mailbox Management
Set Automated Attendant (AA) status
Message Notification
Change Absent Message
Call-through Service
Other Features
Hang Up
Receive New Message (During or after playback):
1 Repeat Message
1.1 Previous Message
2 Next Message
3 Erase Message
4 Send Reply
5 Transfer Message
6 Message Envelope
7 Rewind (During playback only)
8 Pause/Restart (During playback only)
8.4 Volume Up (During playback only)
8.5 Set Bookmark (During voice message playback only)
8.6 Resume from Bookmark position (Voice messages only)
9 Fast Forward (During playback only)
# Save This Message as New
0 Help
Receive Old Message (During or after playback):
1 Repeat Message
1.1 Previous Message
2 Next Message
3 Erase Message
4 Send Reply
5 Transfer Message
6 Message Envelope
7 Rewind (During playback only)
8 Pause/Restart (During playback only)
8.4 Volume Up (During playback only)
8.5 Set Bookmark (During voice message playback only)
8.6 Resume from Bookmark position (Voice messages only)
9 Fast Forward (During playback only)
0 Help
1.8.7 Quick Reference
Continued from previous page
4
5
1
Mailbox Management:
1 Record Personal Greetings
2 Set Password
3 Enter Owner's Name
4 Set Group Distribution List
5 Record Caller Name/Number
6 Set Personal Custom Service
8 Set Remote Call FWD to Outside
9 Set Numbers for Automatic Log-in and Toll Saver
Set AA Status:
1 Set Call Transfer Status
2 Set Covering Extensions
3 Set Message Reception Mode
4 Set Incomplete Call Handling For No Answer
5 Set Incomplete Call Handing For Busy
6 Set Telephone Number for Transfer
6
Message Notification:
1 Message Waiting Lamp
2 Device Status
3 Assign Telephone Numbers
7
Change Absent Message
8
Call-through Service
Record Personal Greeting:
1 No Answer
2 Busy Signal
3 After Hours
4 Caller ID
5 Temporary
6 Absent Message
1
Set Call Transfer Status:
1 Call Blocking
2 Call Screening
3 Intercom Paging
4 Transfer to Mailbox
5 Transferring to Specified Custom Service
6 All Disable
4
Incomplete Handling Status:
For No Answer
1 Leaving a Message
2 Covering Extension
3 Intercom Paging
4 Set Transferring to Custom Service
5 Operator
6 Return to AA Service Top Menu
5
Incomplete Handling Status:
For Busy
1 Leaving a Message
2 Covering Extension
3 Intercom Paging
4 Set Transferring to Custom Service
5 Operator
6 Return to AA Service Top Menu
Continued on next page
Operating Manual
187
1.8.7 Quick Reference
Continued from previous page
9
Set Other Features:
1 Listen to Deleted Message
2 Set Interview Mailbox
3 Set External Delivery Message
4 Set Remote Call Forwarding
5 Set Timed Reminder
1
188
Listen to Deleted Messages:
1 Voice Message
# All Messages
2
Interview Mailbox Management:
1 Record Question
2 Set Answer Length
3 Erase Question
3
External Message Delivery:
1 Record Message
2 Set a Mailing List
4
Remote Call Forwarding Set:
1 FWD—All Calls
2 FWD—Busy
3 FWD—No Answer
4 FWD—Busy/No Answer
5 FWD to an Outside Line
6 FWD Cancel
Operating Manual
1
2
#
Receive Deleted Message (During or after playback):
1 Repeat Message
1.1 Previous Message
2 Next Message
3 Recover Message
6 Message Envelope
7 Rewind (During playback only)
8 Pause/Restart (During playback only)
8.4 Volume Up (During playback only)
9 Fast Forward (During playback only)
0 Help
1.9 Setting the Telephone According to Your Needs
1.9 Setting the Telephone According to Your Needs
1.9.1 Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
You can receive an alarm at your telephone to remind you of a meeting, appointment or as a wake-up call.
The alarm can occur either once or daily (every day until cancelled) at a preset time. When you go off-hook
to answer, you will hear a special dial tone or prerecorded message.
To set
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
0
12 H * :
hour/minute
1
OR
7
6
0
760.
Enter
0
PM
1
hour/minute
24 H * :
Off-hook.
AM
OR
Enter 1.
Enter hour (01–12) and minute (00–59) and then
0 for AM or 1 for PM.
Or enter hour (00–23) and minute (00–59).
Once
OR
1
Daily
C.Tone
On-hook.
Enter 0 for once
or 1 for daily.
• * Enter the time in the format assigned to your PBX (12-hour or 24-hour).
To cancel
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
7
6
0
0
C.Tone
Enter
Off-hook.
760.
Enter 0.
On-hook.
To stop or answer the ringback
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
OR
Press INTERCOM or off-hook.
Operating Manual
189
1.9.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
To confirm
PT
Press TRANSFER
several times.
• You can also confirm the Timed Reminder by using the soft button.
• The alarm keeps ringing for preprogrammed seconds.
• If you receive an incoming call during ringback, the ringing starts after the ringback
stops.
• If you are having a conversation exceeding alarm ringing period, the ringback will start
after your conversation.
1.9.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
–
Do Not Disturb (DND)
–
Switching FWD/DND Status Using Fixed FWD/DND Button
Do Not Disturb (DND)
You can set this feature to prevent incoming calls from ringing at your extension. This can be useful, for
example, when you are in a meeting or busy.
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
Both Calls
OR
7
1
1
1
Outside Calls
OR
2
Off-hook.
Enter
71.
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as you desire.
Set
OR
0
Cancel
Enter 1 to set
or 0 to cancel.
C.Tone
On-hook.
• When using a proprietary telephone, you can set or cancel Do Not Disturb by pressing the
FWD/DND button (fixed button) instead of " 710".
When using a KX-UT series SIP phone (except KX-UT670), you can also press the
FWD/DND button and then press up or down with the Navigator Key to set or cancel Do Not
Disturb for all calls. For KX-UT670, there is no physical FWD/DND button on the phone. For
details, refer to the documentation for your phone.
190
Operating Manual
1.9.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
• For KX-UT series SIP phones (except KX-UT670), when Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb
is enabled, FWD/DND appears on the display in stand-by mode. For KX-UT670, when Call
Forwarding or Do Not Disturb is enabled, a status icon appears on the display. For details,
refer to the documentation for your phone.
• The FWD/DND button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Both features are not set.
Red on: FWD mode
Flashing red slowly: DND mode
For KX-UT series SIP phones, you can see the current status on the display.
• The system has two modes: (1) FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode and (2) FWD/DND Setting
Mode. Ask your manager what mode your system is in if you are not sure.
For KX-UT series SIP phones, only FWD/DND Setting Mode is supported.
(1) When in FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode:
Pressing the FWD/DND button (fixed button) while in idle status will cycle the setting as
shown below:
FWD
DND
Off
(2) When in FWD/DND Setting Mode:
Pressing the FWD/DND button (fixed button) while in idle status allows you to switch the
FWD/DND status and set the FWD destination (refer to "
Switching FWD/DND Status
Using Fixed FWD/DND Button").
Note
A FWD/DND button (customised button) is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode: the
mode cannot be changed.
• If your extension has set this feature, a calling extension will hear DND tone.
• If this feature is set, the Call Forwarding (FWD) feature does not work.
• Specified extensions can override this feature and call DND extensions (DND Override).
• When making a call using an SDN button to a PDN extension with DND set, this feature will
temporarily be deactivated.
• When intercom calls are set to be handled differently from outside calls (DND set/cancel),
we recommend establishing buttons for both FWD/DND—Outside calls and FWD/DND—
Intercom calls, because:
a.
the light patterns of the FWD/DND—Both calls button (including FWD/DND button
[fixed button]) will indicate the setting for either outside calls or intercoms calls, but not
both.
Note
The DND icon on PS display reflects the setting for outside calls only.
b.
pressing the FWD/DND—Both calls button (including FWD/DND button [fixed button])
will not change the FWD or DND mode for intercom calls and outside calls separately.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit FWD/DND (Both calls, Outside calls, Intercom calls) buttons.
Operating Manual
191
1.9.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
Switching FWD/DND Status Using Fixed FWD/DND Button
Using a proprietary telephone (PT) or KX-UT series SIP phone (except KX-UT670),
you can easily switch the FWD/DND status for outside/intercom calls without
clearing any FWD destination that was set previously.
• For KX-UT670 SIP phone users: There is no physical FWD/DND button on the phone. To set
and clear the FWD/DND status, refer to the documentation for your phone.
To switch the FWD/DND status for outside calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
The current FWD/DND status
for outside calls is displayed.
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Press the fixed FWD/DND
button again to switch the status.
To switch the FWD/DND status for intercom calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
2
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
192
Operating Manual
Enter 2.
The current FWD/DND status
for intercom calls is displayed.
Press the fixed FWD/DND
button again to switch
the status.
1.9.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]/Whisper OHCA)
To set and clear FWD/DND for outside/intercom calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
Outside Calls*
1
OR
Intercom Calls
2
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
0
Enter 1 or 2.
Press STORE.
FWD/DND off
OR
1
DND on
Press STORE
to set.
Enter 0 or 1.
A confirmation tone will
be heard.
• * This step can be omitted.
To set and clear FWD/DND for all calls
KX-UT113/KX-UT123/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248
While on-hook
FWD/DND Off
: FWD/DND off
OR
Do Not Disturb : DND on
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Press UP or DOWN with
the Navigator Key
to select the desired item.
Press ENTER to set.
A confirmation tone will
be heard.
1.9.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Off-hook Call
Announcement [OHCA]/Whisper OHCA)
During a conversation, you can be informed of a call waiting with a tone or voice announcement through
your built-in speaker or handset. (Default: Disable—No call [Intercom calls]/No tone [Outside calls])
Call Waiting Tone:
a waiting tone through the built-in speaker of PT/handset of SLT. To change the tone from PT, refer to
"3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode".
Operating Manual
193
1.9.4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller’s Telephone (Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation [CLIP/COLP])
OHCA:
a voice announcement through the built-in speaker
Whisper OHCA:
a voice announcement through the handset
To set/cancel for intercom calls (Manual Call Waiting)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
No call
OR
1
7
3
1
Tone
OR
2
C.Tone
OHCA
OR
Enter
Off-hook.
731.
3
On-hook.
Whisper OHCA
Enter 0 to 3 as you desire.
To set/cancel for outside calls (Automatic Call Waiting)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
7
3
2
1
Enter
Off-hook.
No tone
OR
Tone
C.Tone
732.
On-hook.
Enter 0 or 1.
• OHCA is only available with certain digital proprietary telephones.
• Whisper OHCA is only available with certain digital proprietary telephones and IP proprietary
telephones. In addition, both you and the other party must use supported telephones.
1.9.4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and
Caller’s Telephone (Calling/Connected Line Identification
Presentation [CLIP/COLP])
CLIP:
When making an outside call, you can present your preprogrammed telephone number to the called party.
COLP:
When receiving an outside call, you can present your preprogrammed telephone number to the calling party.
You can select the telephone number sent, either the number of the line used or the number assigned to
your extension.
If you select "Public", the calling/called party sees the number of the line used (subscriber’s number).
If you select "Your extension", they see the telephone number assigned on your extension.
194
Operating Manual
1.9.5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller’s Telephone (Connected Line Identification
Restriction [COLR])
To show either the number assigned to the outside line or your extension
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
7
2
2
Enter
Off-hook.
7 2.
Public
OR
Your extension
Enter 1 for public or 2
for your extension.
C.Tone
On-hook.
• Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company.
• When you forward a call to an outside party, the CLIP number for that call will be that of the
calling party or of the forwarding extension depending on system programming.
• If you use the ICD Group button to make a call to the other party, the telephone number
assigned to the ICD Group will be used.
1.9.5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on
the Caller’s Telephone (Connected Line Identification Restriction
[COLR])
When receiving an outside call, you can select whether the caller can see your telephone number or not.
To show/prevent
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
7
0
1
Off-hook.
Enter
7 0.
Show
OR
Prevent
C.Tone
Enter 0 to show
or 1 to prevent.
On-hook.
• You can change the mode by pressing a preset COLR button while on-hook (There is no
COLR button on KX-UT series SIP phones).
The COLR button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: shows your telephone number.
Red on: prevents your telephone number being displayed.
• Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR) button.
Operating Manual
195
1.9.6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party’s Telephone (Calling Line Identification
Restriction [CLIR])
1.9.6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called
Party’s Telephone (Calling Line Identification Restriction [CLIR])
When making an outside call, you can select whether the called party can see your telephone number or
not.
To show/prevent
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
7
1
Show
OR
1
Off-hook.
Enter
7 1.
Prevent
C.Tone
On-hook.
Enter 0 to show
or 1 to prevent.
• You can change the mode by pressing a preset CLIR button while on-hook (There is no
CLIR button on KX-UT series SIP phones).
The CLIR button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: shows your telephone number.
Red on: prevents your telephone number being displayed.
• Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) button.
1.9.7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation
(Executive Busy Override Deny)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
7
3
3
0
Off-hook.
Enter
733.
Prevent
OR
Allow
C.Tone
Enter 1 to prevent
or 0 to allow.
• Some extensions may be prohibited from performing this feature.
196
Operating Manual
On-hook.
1.9.8 Turning on the Background Music (BGM)
1.9.8 Turning on the Background Music (BGM)
You can listen to the background music through your telephone speaker while onhook. An external music source, such as a radio, can be connected.
If your extension becomes busy (off-hook, making or receiving a call etc.), the music
stops temporarily. When you go back on-hook, the music starts again.
To select and set/cancel
PT
BGM no.
7
5
1
OR
0
Off-hook.
Enter
751.
Cancel
C.Tone
On-hook.
Enter BGM number
(1 digit) or 0 to cancel.
• System programming may be required for some IP-PT users to listen to background music.
1.9.9 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones (Data Line
Security)
You can protect the line against audible notification tones, such as a call waiting tone during a conversation.
Set this feature if your extension has a data communication device, such as a PC or fax machine connected
to ensure secure data transmission.
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
7
3
0
0
Off-hook.
Enter
730.
Set
OR
Cancel
Enter 1 to set
or 0 to cancel.
C.Tone
On-hook.
1.9.10 Checking the Time Service Status
You can check the current status of the Time Service on the display.
Operating Manual
197
1.9.11 Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring (Parallelled Telephone)
PT
While on-hook
OR
(Time Service
(Day/Night/
Lunch/Break))
Press TRANSFER or Time Service
(Day/Night/Lunch/Break).
• The Time Service (Day/Night/Lunch/Break) button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Day mode
Green on: Lunch mode
Flashing green: Break mode
Red on: Night mode
Flashing red: Holiday mode
• Any extension user except the managers can check the current status by pressing the Time
Service (Day/Night/Lunch/Break) button.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Time Service (Day/Night/Lunch/Break) button.
1.9.11 Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring (Parallelled
Telephone)
In the case where a single line telephone is connected in parallel to your digital
proprietary telephone, you can choose whether the parallelled single line telephone
will ring to an incoming call or not.
(Default: Ring)
DPT
1
3
9
0
Enter
Off-hook.
39.
Ring
OR
No ring
Enter 1 to ring
or 0 not to ring.
C.Tone
On-hook.
• Even if "No ring" is selected, calls can be made and answered on the single line telephone
by lifting the handset.
• If you go off-hook while your parallelled telephone is in use, the call will switch over to
you.
• This feature is not available for the KX-T7665.
198
Operating Manual
1.9.12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a Wired Telephone (Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
1.9.12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a Wired Telephone
(Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
Your PS can be used in parallel with a PT, SLT, or SIP phone.
When in this mode, incoming calls to a wired telephone also ring the paired PS.
To set
PS
4
8
extension no.
1
C.Tone
Press TALK.
Enter
Enter 1.
48.
Press CANCEL.
Enter extension number
of the paired telephone.
To cancel
PS
4
8
0
C.Tone
Press TALK.
Enter
Enter 0.
48.
Press CANCEL.
• Some wired telephones are prohibited from using this feature.
• If you go off-hook while your parallelled telephone is in use, the call will switch over to
you (except SIP phones).
1.9.13 Using Your phone in Parallel with a Wired Telephone
(One-numbered extension)
Two telephones connected to the PBX can be set to share 1 extension number, and both telephones can be
set to ring (One-numbered Extension feature). You can choose whether the sub extension associated with
the main extension will ring when an incoming call is received.
To set
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
4
8
1
extension
phone no.no.
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Enter
48.
Enter 1.
Enter extension number
of the paired telephone.
On-hook.
Operating Manual
199
1.9.14 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension Feature Clear)
To cancel
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
4
8
0
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Enter
Enter 0.
48.
On-hook.
To pickup call during conversation
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
(DSS)
OR
4
1
extension no.
C.Tone
Talk.
Off-hook.
Press lit DSS of the paired telephone.
Or enter 41 and then dial extension
number of the paired telephone.
1.9.14 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension
Feature Clear)
You can reset the settings of the following features on your extension to the default settings with one
operation.
This feature is also known as Station Programme Clear.
• For KX-UT series SIP phone users: You can reset the settings of the following features on
your extension.
– Message Waiting
– Call Forwarding (FWD)
– Timed Reminder
– Do Not Disturb (DND)
– Call Waiting for intercom calls
– Call Waiting for outside calls
– Data Line Security
– Log-in/Log-out
Features
200
Default Setting
Hot Line*1
Off
Message Waiting—(All the messages that have been left by other
extension users)
Off
Operating Manual
1.9.14 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension Feature Clear)
Features
Default Setting
Call Pickup Deny
Call Forwarding (FWD)
*1
Allow
Off
*1
Absent Message
Off
Paging Deny
Allow
Timed Reminder
Cleared
Do Not Disturb (DND)*1
Off
Call Waiting for intercom calls*1
Call Waiting for outside calls*1
Disable (No call)
Disable (No tone)
Executive Busy Override Deny
Allow
BGM
Off
Data Line Security
Off
Parallelled Telephone
The telephone in parallel
rings.
Log-in/Log-out
Log-in
These features may not be reset depending on the system programming.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
7
9
0
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Enter
790.
On-hook.
• For Users in Canada Only:
After performing Extension Feature Clear, the setting of Call Waiting becomes "Enable
(Tone)". In this case, dial tone 2 will be heard when you go off-hook.
Operating Manual
201
1.10 Utilising the Call Centre
1.10 Utilising the Call Centre
1.10.1 Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution Group (Log-in/Logout, Wrap-up)
You can control your status in an incoming call distribution
group. When in the Log-out mode, incoming calls to the
group will not ring at your extension. When you return,
calls will again ring at your extension. (Default: Log-in)
Even if your extension is logged-in, you can have a
specified time period (wrap-up time) when you will not
receive calls after completing a previous call. This time
can be used for you to write a report and so on.
You can also manually select "Not Ready" mode to
temporarily leave a distribution group.
Log-out
Log-in
Talk.
Ready
Wrap-up
To set Log-in/Log-out
ICD Group: Incoming Call Distribution Group
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
7
3
6
1
Enter
Off-hook.
ICD Group
extension no.
Log-out
OR
Log-in
Enter 0 or 1.
736.
Specified
OR
C.Tone
All
Enter ICD Group extension
number or .
202
Operating Manual
On-hook.
Not Ready
1.10.1 Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution Group (Log-in/Log-out, Wrap-up)
PT/PS
ICD Group: Incoming Call Distribution Group
While on-hook
ICD Group
extension no.
(Log-in/Log-out)
Specified
OR
All
Enter ICD Group extension number
or .
Press Log-in/Log-out.
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
While on-hook
(Log-in/Log-out
for all groups)
OR
(Log-in/Log-out
of a specified group)
Press Log-in/Log-out for all groups
or Log-in/Log-out of a specified group.
PT/PS
While on-hook
(Log-in/Log-out
of a specified group)
Press Log-in/Log-out of a specified group.
To enter/leave Not Ready mode
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
7
3
5
0
Off-hook.
Enter
735.
Not Ready
OR
Ready
Enter 1 or 0.
C.Tone
On-hook.
Operating Manual
203
1.10.2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group (Incoming Call Distribution
Group Monitor)
To set/cancel Not Ready mode or to leave Wrap-up mode (To enter Ready mode)
PT/PS/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
While on-hook
(Wrap-up)
Press red or flashing red Wrap-up.*
• * The status will be as follows:
Ready
Not Ready
Not Ready
Ready
Wrap-up
Not Ready
• The Log-in/Log-out of a specified group button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Log-in mode
Red on: Log-out mode
• The Wrap-up button alternates the setting of Wrap-up mode, Not Ready mode or Ready
mode.
The Wrap-up button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Ready mode
Red on: Not Ready mode
Flashing red: Wrap-up mode
• In Wrap-up mode/Not Ready mode, your extension does not receive calls through any
group, even if it belongs to multiple groups.
• The last remaining logged-in extension may not be allowed to log out, depending on system
programming.
• The Supervisor extension can control the Log-in/Log-out status of other extensions.
For more information, refer to "1.10.2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an
Incoming Call Distribution Group (Incoming Call Distribution Group Monitor)".
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Log-in/Log-out button, a Log-in/Log-out of a specified group button or a
Wrap-up button.
1.10.2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming
Call Distribution Group (Incoming Call Distribution Group
Monitor)
–
Monitoring the Status of Waiting Calls
–
Monitoring and Changing the Log-in/Log-out Status of Extensions
The extension assigned as a Supervisor extension can monitor and control the status of other extensions in
an incoming call distribution group. It should have a PT with 6-line display. The display and DSS buttons
show as follows:
204
Operating Manual
1.10.2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group (Incoming Call Distribution
Group Monitor)
Initial Display
ICD Group
extension
no.
739
Monitoring the
Call Status
<Display>
Queuing Monitor
<Display>
Date/Time &
extension no.
<DSS>
Busy Status Monitor
<DSS>
Busy Status Monitor
"EXIT"
"EXIT"
Monitoring the Call Status
and Log-in/Log-out Status
"SPRVS"
<Display>
Queuing Monitor
<DSS>
Log-in/Log-out Monitor
"EXIT"
"LOG"
<Display>
Call Log History
ICD Group: Incoming Call Distribution Group
<DSS>
Busy Status Monitor
Monitoring the Status of Waiting Calls
The Supervisor extension can monitor the status of calls waiting to be answered in the queue. If an
incoming call distribution group has an overflowed call, the display shows the status automatically.
The following information is displayed.
<Queuing Monitor>
• The current date/time
• The ICD Group extension number/name
• The number of waiting calls
• The longest waiting time
<Call Log History>
• The date/time when cleared at last time
• The total number of received calls
• The number of overflowed calls
• The number of unanswered calls
• The average waiting time of queuing calls
To monitor
Display PT
Off-hook.
ICD Group: Incoming Call Distribution Group
7
3
Enter
739.
9
ICD Group
extension no.
Enter ICD Group
extension number.
C.Tone
On-hook.
Operating Manual
205
1.10.2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group (Incoming Call Distribution
Group Monitor)
To clear Call Log History
Display PT
LOG
Press "LOG".
CLEAR
Press "CLEAR".
• The accumulated data is cleared.
"****" shows if the number to be displayed exceeds the maximum displayable digits.
Monitoring and Changing the Log-in/Log-out Status of Extensions
The Supervisor extension can monitor the Log-in/Log-out status of the incoming call distribution group
members by the DSS button light. It can also change their Log-in/Log-out status if needed.
To monitor
Display PT
After viewing the status of waiting calls
SPRVS
Press "SPRVS".
To change the Log-in/Log-out mode
Display PT
(DSS)
Press desired DSS.
• The DSS button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: The extension is not in the group.
Green on: Log-in (Ready) mode
Flashing green: Log-in (Not Ready) mode
Red on: Log-out mode
206
Operating Manual
1.10.3 Forwarding a Waiting Call (Manual Queue Redirection)
1.10.3 Forwarding a Waiting Call (Manual Queue Redirection)
When your incoming call distribution group is busy and other outside calls arrive, the
arriving calls are put in a waiting queue.
Extensions can check the status of the queue with the Hurry-up button light, and
forward the longest waiting call in the queue to a preset destination manually.
This feature is also known as Hurry-up Transfer.
To forward the waiting call
PT/PS
(Hurry-up)
Press red or flashing red Hurry-up.
• The Hurry-up button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: No waiting call.
Red on: Some calls are waiting.
Flashing red: The number of calls exceeds the manual queue redirection level.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Hurry-up button.
1.10.4 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
•
Group Monitor
•
ACD Report
• Note:
The Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control feature cannot be used at the same time as
Hospitality features. (Refer to "1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type Environment
(Hospitality Features)".)
The ACD supervisor can check the conditions of the ICD group and extension lines.
Feature
Description
Group Monitor
The ACD supervisor can monitor the current status of ICD group. The ACD supervisor
can monitor up to 4 ICD groups on the same screen. Furthermore, the ACD supervisor
can monitor up to 16 ICD groups.
ACD Report
The ACD Supervisor can view the following type of reports of call.
User report
Can view reports of each user (extension call or Verification code).
Call charge can also be viewed.
The ACD supervisor and the extension call(s) to be reported must
belong to an identical tenant.
Group report
Can view reports of up to 64 ICD groups
Operating Manual
207
1.10.4 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
Feature
Description
Call report
Can view reports of calls received by up to 64 ICD groups for each
caller.
Charge report
Can view call charge reports of each user (extension call or
Verification code) only.
The ACD supervisor and the extension call(s) to be reported must
belong to an identical tenant.
For how to log in to the Web Maintenance Console, refer to "3.2.1 User Programming".
Group Monitor
The screen of a user specified as an ACD supervisor is displayed as follows. There are 2 modes: Simple
Mode and Standard Mode, and the displayed information is different depending on the mode.
To configure the monitor settings and start monitoring
You can configure the monitor control settings in the Call Management in Web Maintenance Console.
On the left side of the screen, click Users → Call Management → Group Monitor.
Example of Standard Mode
208
Operating Manual
1.10.4 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
Example of Simple Mode
ACD Report
You can specify which items to include in the monitor result report, the style in which the report profile is
displayed, and the output format.
On the left side of the screen, click Users → Call Management → ACD Report.
Operating Manual
209
1.11 Using User-supplied Equipment
1.11 Using User-supplied Equipment
1.11.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
You can talk to a person at the door through the doorphone. Preprogrammed extensions or an outside party
can receive the calls from the doorphone. You can open the door.
–
Doorphone Call
–
Opening a Door (Door Open)
Doorphone Call
To call from the doorphone
Doorphone
C.Tone
Press doorphone
button.
Talk.
To answer a call from the doorphone
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Off-hook.
• For KX-UT series SIP phone users: If the doorphone number and name are stored in the
phonebook of your phone, the doorphone information is displayed on your phone when a call
arrives from the doorphone.
• For KX-UT670 SIP phone users: The video feed from a network camera can be displayed on
your phone’s display when a call arrives from a doorphone and the following settings are
configured on your phone:
– The network camera is registered to a contact.
– The doorphone number is registered to the contact, and "Doorphone" is selected as the
label for the phone number.
For details about the settings, refer to the documentation for your phone.
210
Operating Manual
1.11.2 If an External Relay is Connected
To call the doorphone
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
3
Enter
Off-hook.
1
31.
doorphone no.
C.Tone
Talk.
Enter doorphone
number (2 digits).
• If no one answers a doorphone call within a specified time period, the call is cancelled.
Opening a Door (Door Open)
Some extensions may be prohibited from using this feature.
From a specified extension
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
5
Enter
Off-hook.
5
55.
doorphone no.
C.Tone
Enter doorphone
number (2 digits).
On-hook.
From any extension while talking to the doorphone
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
5
C.Tone
Enter 5.
On-hook.
• The door open will be triggered for a specified time period.
For KX-NTV series doorphones, you can open the door if your extension and the doorphone
are registered at the same site.
1.11.2 If an External Relay is Connected
Preprogrammed extensions can switch on a relay (e.g., alarm) connected to the PBX.
Operating Manual
211
1.11.3 If an External Sensor is Connected
To switch on the relay
PT/SLT/PS
5
Enter
Off-hook.
6
56.
relay no.
C.Tone
Enter relay number
(2 digits).
On-hook.
• The relay will be switched off after a specified time period.
1.11.3 If an External Sensor is Connected
Preprogrammed extensions can receive an alert call from an external sensor (e.g., security alarm)
connected to the PBX.
To answer a sensor call
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
D.Tone
Off-hook.
On-hook.
• If you do not answer a sensor call within a specified time period, the sensor call will stop.
Dial Tone Definitions
• 5.4 What is This Tone?
1.11.4 If a Host PBX is Connected
–
Accessing External Services (External Feature Access [EFA])
Accessing External Services (External Feature Access [EFA])
You can access special features (e.g., Call Waiting) offered by a host PBX or telephone company. This
feature is only effective for an outside call.
212
Operating Manual
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
<Example> To hold the current call and then talk to the new party
PT/PS/KX-UT series
SLT
During a conversation with an outside party
During a conversation with an outside party
OR
desired service
code
(EFA)
6
0
desired service
code
OR
6
0
Press FLASH/RECALL or EFA.
Or press TRANSFER and
then enter 60.
Enter desired
service code.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Enter
60.
Enter desired
service code.
For KX-UT series,
press FLASH/RECALL.
• In this case, the FLASH/RECALL button on a proprietary telephone or KX-UT series SIP
phone must be set to External Feature Access (EFA) mode through system programming.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit an External Feature Access (EFA) button.
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
You or an outside party can access the Voice Processing System from a telephone.
Call Forwarding to Voice Mail (Voice Mail Integration)
–
If your PBX has a Panasonic Voice Processing System connected (e.g., KX-TVM series) using digital
integration, the following features are also available:
–
Screening Calls (Live Call Screening [LCS])
–
Recording a Conversation
• Voice Processing System features are not available for SIP phone users.
Call Forwarding to Voice Mail (Voice Mail Integration)
– To forward your calls to your mailbox
– To transfer a call to a mailbox
– To listen to messages
If you cannot answer calls, you can forward them to your mailbox. You can select the type of incoming calls
(Intercom Calls/Outside Calls/Both Calls) that are forwarded.
Operating Manual
213
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
If your telephone has a Message button, the Message light turns on when a message is left in your mailbox.
You will hear an indication tone* when going off-hook, regardless of whether or not your telephone has a
Message button.
You can also create a Voice Mail Transfer button on your phone to transfer received outside calls to a
mailbox of another extension so that calling parties can leave messages (Voice Mail Transfer). The duration
for recording depends on the Voice Processing System. Using the Voice Mail Transfer button, you can also
perform the following operations with one touch (for digital integration only):
– To forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing
– To transfer your own call to the called extension’s mailbox
– To listen to messages
To forward your calls to your mailbox
PT/SLT/PS
0
Both Calls
OR
7
1
1
Outside Calls
OR
2
Off-hook.
Enter
71.
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as you desire.
0
Cancel
2
All Calls
3
Busy
4
No Answer
5
Busy/No Answer
Enter required number.
For
"Cancel",
For
"Cancel",
go on-hook
go on-hook
directly.0.
directly
after entering
voice mail floating
extension no.
#
Enter voice mail floating
extension number.
Enter #.
C.Tone
On-hook.
To forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing
PT/PS
While on-hook
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Press Voice Mail
Transfer.
214
Operating Manual
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
To transfer a call to a mailbox
PT/PS
During a conversation
(DSS)
OR
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Press Voice Mail
Transfer.
desired
extension no.
Press DSS or dial desired
extension number.
To transfer your own call to the called extension’s mailbox
PT/PS
extension no.
R.B.Tone
OR
OR
B.Tone
(DSS)
Off-hook.
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
OR
Dial extension number
or press DSS.
DND Tone
Press Voice Mail
Transfer.
To listen to messages
PT/SLT/PS
MESSAGE
OR
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Off-hook.
OR
voice mail floating
extension no.
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer, or enter voice mail
floating extension number.
• *Indication tone after going off-hook
1s
• If using a PS in parallel with a PT or SLT (in Wireless XDP Parallel mode), you cannot use
the Voice Mail Transfer button to forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing.
Operating Manual
215
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Voice Mail Transfer button or a Message button.
Screening Calls (Live Call Screening [LCS])
While a caller is leaving a message in your mailbox, you can monitor the call without
answering. If you so desire, you can answer the call while monitoring. There are two
methods available (Default: Hands-free mode).
Hands-free mode:
You can monitor the message automatically, live through the telephone speaker.
Private mode:
You will hear an alarm tone while the caller is leaving a message.
Before operating
• Create a Live Call Screening (LCS) button (Personal Programming).
• Select the mode, either Hands-free or Private (Personal Programming).
• Set the extension PIN (Personal Identification Number).
• Set the Live Call Screening feature.
To set Live Call Screening
PIN: Personal Identification Number
PT/PS
extension PIN
(Live Call
Screening)
Press Live Call
Screening.
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
This is required only when
an extension PIN is stored.
To cancel Live Call Screening
PT/PS
(Live Call
Screening)
Press red Live Call Screening.
Operation Flowchart
The operations in the shaded areas can be done hands-free.
216
Operating Manual
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
PT/PS
Hands-free Mode
Private Mode
(Alarm Tone)
Monitoring (Hands-free)
Monitoring
SP-PHONE
OR
No operation
MONITOR
OR
Monitoring (Handset)
(Live Call
Screening)
Press SP-PHONE, MONITOR or Live Call
Screening.
Off-hook.
Stop
monitoring Answering
SP-PHONE
(Live Call
Screening)
OR
Press Live Call
Screening.
Stop
monitoring
Answering
the call
Stop
monitoring
Answering
the call
On-hook.
Press
Live Call
Screening.
MONITOR
OR
Press
SP-PHONE
or MONITOR.
SP-PHONE
Off-hook.
OR
(Live Call
Screening)
MONITOR
Press SP-PHONE or
MONITOR.
Off-hook.
• The Live Call Screening (LCS) button light shows the feature status as follows:
Off: LCS is off.
Flashing green rapidly: Alerting in the Private mode.
Flashing green slowly: Monitoring.
Red on: LCS is on.
• The manager extension can clear an extension PIN.
• This feature is available for a single line telephone if it is connected to a proprietary
telephone in parallel. (Private mode only)
To answer the call while monitoring, press Recall/hookswitch.
• Only the handset monitoring in the Private mode is available for PS users.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode—Live Call Screening Mode Set
Select the mode, either monitoring the message through the speaker automatically or
receiving, while the caller leaves a message.
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Live Call Screening (LCS) button.
Operating Manual
217
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
Recording a Conversation
You can record a conversation into a mailbox while talking on the phone.
You can select the mailbox each time you record a conversation.
To record into your mailbox (Two-way Record)
PT/PS
During a conversation
To stop recording,
press this button again.
(Two-way
Record)
Press Two-way Record.
To record into another mailbox (Two-way Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(DSS)
OR
(Two-way
Transfer)
another
extension no.
Press Two-way
Transfer.
Press DSS or enter
another extension
number.
To stop recording,
press this button again.
To record into another mailbox with one touch (One-touch Two-way Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(One-touch
Two-way
Transfer)
Press One-touch Two-way Transfer.
• The Two-way Record button light, Two-way Transfer button light or One-touch Two-way
Transfer button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Not recording.
On: Recording the conversation.
218
Operating Manual
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
• Note:
When you record your Two-way telephone conversations, you should inform the other party
that the conversation is being recorded.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Two-way Record button, a Two-way Transfer button and a One-touch Twoway Transfer button.
Operating Manual
219
1.12 Administrative Features
1.12 Administrative Features
1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type Environment
(Hospitality Features)
In a hotel-type environment, an extension assigned as a hotel operator can be used to
view and set the check-in/check-out/cleaned-up (Ready or Not Ready) status of each
guest room extension. When the hotel operator presses a flexible button assigned as
"Check-in", "Check-out", or "Cleaned-up" on his/her extension, the extension will
switch to Room Status Control mode, and the light of the DSS button for each room
extension will show the current room status. This allows the hotel operator to manage
guests and rooms with just a telephone. In addition, the hotel operator can set
automatic wake-up calls for guest rooms.
• Note:
Hospitality features cannot be used at the same time as the Supervisory Monitor (ACD)
Control feature. (Refer to "1.10.4 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control".)
–
Check-in
–
Check-out
–
Setting a Timed Reminder to a Room Extension (Remote Wake-up Call)
–
Cleaned-up
• The hotel operator must be using a 6-line display PT to use the Check-in, Check-out, and
Cleaned-up features.
• While in Room Status Control mode:
a.
The hotel operator’s extension can only check extensions in/out and ready/not ready.
All other operations will be ignored.
b.
The light of each DSS button shows the room status of the corresponding extension as
follows:
Off: Checked-out and Ready
Flashing Red: Checked-out and Not Ready
Red on: Checked-in
c.
The lights of other buttons may not show their normal display.
d.
The hotel operator’s extension is considered to be busy. Callers to that extension will
hear a busy tone.
Check-in
The hotel operator can change the room status of extensions to check-in by using the Check-in button
assigned on his/her extension.
220
Operating Manual
1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type Environment (Hospitality Features)
To check in
Display PT
While on-hook
EXIT
ENTER
extension no.
YES
OR
OR
(Check-in)
(DSS)
Press Check-in.
(Check-in)
Dial extension number and then press
"ENTER", or press desired DSS.
Press "YES".
Press "EXIT"
or Check-in.
• After check-in, Remote Extension Dial Lock is deactivated, and the guest can make outside
calls from the room extension. (Refer to "2.1.1 Extension Control".)
• After check-in, all billing data previously charged to the extension will be cleared
automatically.
• When the room status of extensions is changed, detailed room status information is
recorded automatically. This requires system programming.
<Example>
Date
Time
02/02/00 03:07PM
Ext
1234
CO
Dial Number
Check in
Check-out
The hotel operator can change the room status of extensions to check-out by using the Check-out button
assigned on his/her extension.
Depending on the setting of the PBX, the hotel operator can do the following:
• Record/edit charges for Minibar/Others
• Print out an invoice containing charge information
Operating Manual
221
1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type Environment (Hospitality Features)
To check out a room with/without printing an invoice
Display PT
To check out with an invoice
While on-hook
PRINT
NEXT
ENTER
extension no.
Press "PRINT".
OR
Press "NEXT".
(Check-out)
OR
(DSS)
Press Check-out.
To check out without an invoice
Dial extension number and then press
"ENTER", or press desired DSS.
NEXT
Press "NEXT".
EXIT
YES
OR
(Check-out)
Press "YES".
Press "EXIT"
or Check-out.
To record/edit room charges and check out a room with/without printing an invoice
Display PT
While on-hook
ENTER
extension no.
minibar charge
OR
(Check-out)
(DSS)
Press Check-out.
Dial extension number and then press
"ENTER", or press desired DSS.
Enter minibar charge.
Press Down.
To check out with an invoice
PRINT
NEXT
Press "PRINT".
Press "NEXT".
YES
other charges
OR
To check out without an invoice
Enter other charges.
NEXT
Press "NEXT".
EXIT
OR
(Check-out)
Press "EXIT"
or Check-out.
222
Operating Manual
Press "YES".
1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type Environment (Hospitality Features)
• After check-out, Remote Extension Dial Lock is activated, and outside calls from the room
extension are restricted. (Refer to "2.1.1 Extension Control".)
• After check-out, wake-up call and Call Log information for the room extension are cleared
automatically. In addition, features set on the room extension are reset to the default
settings. For a list of features that are reset, refer to "1.9.14 Clearing Features Set at Your
Extension (Extension Feature Clear)".
• When the room status of extensions is changed, detailed room status information is
recorded automatically. This requires system programming.
<Example>
Date
Ext
Time
02/03/00 08:08AM
CO
1234
Dial Number
Check out
• To print out an invoice, a printer should be connected to the PBX. If the room extension is in
use, an invoice cannot be printed out.
<Example>
****************************************
*
*
Hotel
****************************************
Check in : 01.JAN.00 06:31PM
Check out : 03.JAN.00 07:03AM
Room
: 202 : Mr. Smith
01/01/00
02/01/00
02/01/00
02/01/00
06:52PM
06:07PM
07:30PM
08:45PM
202
202
202
202
01
01
01
01
Telephone
Minibar
Others
Total
Call amount:0012
123456789
012345678901234
0011234567890123
104.30 (Tax
4.00 (Tax
0.00 (Tax
FR
01:24'30
00:10'12
00:06'36
00:03'00
FR00084.50
FR00010.20
FR00006.60
FR00003.00
10.000% =
10.000% =
15.000% =
108.30 (Tax Total
=
001
1234567890
12345
12345
9.48)
0.36)
0.00)
9.84)
Sheet : 002
======= Hotel PBX =======
Tel: +41 3 12 34 56 78 Fax: +41 3 12 34 56 78
E-Mail: 12345678 hotelpbx.ch
• The PBX can store a limited amount of room information. When this storage becomes
almost full, the information of the extension that made the most calls is printed out
automatically. In this case, the printout is similar to the example above, but without
categorised charge information and the total. The PBX can then store new room information.
"Call amount:0012" in the example above indicates that the information of 12 phone calls
has previously been printed out automatically.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Check-in or a Check-out button.
Operating Manual
223
1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type Environment (Hospitality Features)
Setting a Timed Reminder to a Room Extension (Remote Wake-up Call)
The hotel operator can remotely set or cancel a Timed Reminder to a room extension. This allows guests to
request wake-up calls without having to program the extension themselves. The hotel operator can also
confirm the current Timed Reminder setting for a room extension.
To set
PT
extension no.
7
6
1
OR
(DSS)
Off-hook.
Enter
12 H*:
76
0
hour/minute
Dial extension number
or press desired DSS.
AM
OR
1
OR
24 H*:
Enter 1.
.
0
PM
Once
OR
1
hour/minute
Enter hour (01–12) and minute (00–59) and then
0 for AM or 1 for PM.
Or enter hour (00–23) and minute (00–59).
Daily
C.Tone
Enter 0 for once
or 1 for daily.
On-hook.
• * Enter the time in the format assigned to your PBX (12-hour or 24-hour).
To cancel
PT
extension no.
7
6
0
OR
C.Tone
(DSS)
Off-hook.
224
Operating Manual
Enter
76
.
Enter 0.
Dial extension number
or press desired DSS.
On-hook.
1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type Environment (Hospitality Features)
To confirm
Display PT
extension no.
7
6
2
OR
(DSS)
Off-hook.
Enter
C.Tone
76
Enter 2.
.
Dial extension number
or press desired DSS.
The display shows
Timed Reminder
information.
On-hook.
• Timed Reminder can also be set from the room extension. (For information about setting
Timed Reminder, refer to "1.9.1 Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)".) The most recent
setting will be valid no matter which extension made the setting.
• When a Timed Reminder starts, and when it is answered or not answered, detailed Timed
Reminder information is recorded automatically. This requires system programming.
<Example>
Date
Ext
Time
02/02/00 02:45PM
02/02/00 02:47PM
CO
1234
1234
Dial Number
Timed Reminder/Start
Timed Reminder/Answer
• Users of PTs without displays can confirm only whether a Timed Reminder has been set or
not by following the steps shown above. If set, a confirmation tone will be heard.
Cleaned-up
The hotel operator can change the room status of extensions depending on whether the room has been
cleaned or not by using the Cleaned-up button assigned on his/her extension. This allows the hotel operator
to confirm that the room is clean and ready for the next guest.
To change the cleaning status of a room
Display PT
While on-hook
ENTER
extension no.
OR
OR
(DSS)
(Cleaned-up)
(Cleaned-up)
Press
Cleaned-up.
EXIT
Dial extension number and then press
"ENTER", or press desired DSS.
Press "EXIT"
or Cleaned-up.
Operating Manual
225
1.12.2 Recording Information Using Preprogrammed Messages (Printing Message)
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Cleaned-up button.
1.12.2 Recording Information Using Preprogrammed Messages
(Printing Message)
You can record a variety of information from your extension using up to 8 preprogrammed messages.
Message information from all extensions is recorded with the PBX. For example, it is possible to use this
feature as a time card by selecting preprogrammed "sign in" and "sign out" messages.
In a hotel-type environment, this feature can be used to record room information from a room extension.
For a list of preprogrammed messages, consult your dealer.
To record
PT/SLT
Off-hook.
7
6
Enter
761.
parameter
message no.
1
*
C.Tone
Enter message
number (1–8).
Enter parameter
if required.
Enter #.
On-hook.
• * Depending on the content of the selected message, you may be required to enter a
numeric parameter, such as a price or time. Enter the correct number of characters as
required for the message. For information about required parameters, consult your dealer.
<Example>
If "Snack %%.%%" has been programmed as message number 1 (for recording charges for
room snacks consumed), hotel employees would enter data as in the example below using
the room extension:
761
1
0300
message no.
parameter
(Snack charge)
#
• When a preprogrammed message is selected, detailed information is recorded automatically,
as shown below:
Date
Time
02/02/00 10:45AM
Ext
1234
CO
Dial Number
Snack 03.00
• Any charges recorded here are not related to charges that the hotel operator records when
checking out a room.
226
Operating Manual
1.13 Exchanging the Settings between Extensions
1.13 Exchanging the Settings between Extensions
1.13.1 Walking Extension
You can exchange the settings set at another extension with your own settings. This allows you to use your
own settings, including your extension number, on another person’s extension. Settings such as extension
number and One-touch Dialling memory are available at the new extension. It is also possible to exchange
the DSS Console settings along with the extension settings. Walking Extension is useful, for example, when
you move to a new location in the office.
This feature is also known as Walking Station.
To exchange your settings with another extension
PT/SLT
Off-hook.
PIN: Personal Identification Number
7
2
Enter
727.
7
your
extension no.
Dial your extension
number.
extension PIN
D.Tone
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
On-hook.
• An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. Refer to
Assigning an Extension PIN to Your Extension (Extension PIN [Personal Identification
"
Number])" in "3.1.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming)".
• Your previous extension will receive the old settings of your new extension.
• Extension settings can be exchanged between SLT and SLT, PT and PT, or SLT and PT.
• If you are using a KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT560/KX-DT343/KX-DT346
telephone with a Bluetooth wireless headset, and exchange the settings with another
KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT560/KX-DT343/KX-DT346 telephone user, you
cannot use your Bluetooth wireless headset at the other extension.
Bluetooth wireless headsets are registered on extensions themselves. Therefore, you have
to register a Bluetooth wireless headset on each desired extension. For details about
registration, refer to "Bluetooth Registration" in "3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode".
1.13.2 Enhanced Walking Extension
In addition to exchanging the settings between extensions (Walking Extension), you can change the status
of your extension to "Service-in" or "Service-out" (Enhanced Walking Extension).
Service-in: An extension is in use (normal status).
Service-out: Extension Dial Lock (→ 1.6.3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone (Extension
Dial Lock)), Do Not Disturb (DND) (→ 1.9.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])) and Display
Lock (→ 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode) are activated on an extension. When the extension is
set to "Service-out", the extension user cannot do the following:
• Make unauthorised outside calls
• Receive calls
Operating Manual
227
1.13.2 Enhanced Walking Extension
• See their personal speed dialling directory, call log, or SVM log
This feature is useful when:
a.
one person uses the same extension settings at different locations, such as another branch office or at
home
b.
two or more people use the same telephone in turn
<Example (a)> When using extension settings at a different location
Main Office
Service-in
Service-out
Service-out
Extension status
of Telephone A
Extn. No. 101
Service-in
Service-out
Extn. No. 101
Service-out
Extn. No. 102
Service-out
Branch Office
Extn. No. 102
Service-out
Extn. No. 102
Service-out
Service-out
Service-out
Service-in
Extn. No. 101
Service-in
Extension status
of Telephone B
Service-in
In this example, extension user A sets his/her own extension status to "Service-out" at the main office. Then,
he/she can set another extension status to "Service-in" at the branch office to have his/her own extension
settings available at the extension.
<Example (b)> When two users share one telephone
User A
Extn. No. 101
Service-in
Extension
Status
User B
228
Service-out
Extn. No. 101
Service-out
Service-out
Service-in
Extn. No. 102
Service-out
Operating Manual
Extn. No. 101
Service-out
Extn. No. 102
Service-out
Service-in
Service-in
Extn. No. 102
Service-in
1.13.2 Enhanced Walking Extension
In this example, extension users A and B work in shifts and use the same extension in turn. User A sets the
extension status to "Service-out" when he/she finishes work. Then, user B can set the extension status to
"Service-in" and have his/her own settings available at the extension.
To set an extension to Service-out status
PT/SLT
7
2
7
C.Tone
Off-hook.
Enter
727.
Enter #.
On-hook.
To set an extension to Service-in status and have your own settings available
PT/SLT
PIN: Personal Identification Number
Off-hook.
7
2
Enter
727.
your
extension no.
7
Enter
.
Dial your extension
number.
extension PIN
C.Tone
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
On-hook.
• An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. Refer to
Assigning an Extension PIN to Your Extension (Extension PIN [Personal Identification
"
Number])" in "3.1.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming)".
• Extension settings can be exchanged between SLT and SLT, PT and PT, or SLT and PT.
Operating Manual
229
1.14 Using a Telephone with a Display
1.14 Using a Telephone with a Display
1.14.1 Using the Call Log
This is available for display proprietary telephones, portable stations, and KX-UT series SIP phones.
–
Calling with the Incoming Call Log
–
Calling with the Outgoing Call Log
• PS users: Refer to the documentation for your phone.
• KX-UT series SIP phone users: Both outside call information and intercom call information is
recorded automatically in the incoming call log. For details about using the call log, refer to
the documentation for your KX-UT series SIP phone.
• The following PSs can use the incoming call log information in the same way as a wired PT
when they receive a call from other extension (including TIE).
KX-TCA185/KX-TCA285/KX-TCA385
• PSs other than these may not display the same incoming call log information as a PT
connected to the PBX.
• For details about referencing the incoming call log, refer to the PS’s documentation.
Calling with the Incoming Call Log
When you receive a call, including external sensor calls, call information is recorded automatically in the
incoming call log. A preprogrammed number of calls can be logged per extension.
When the call log is full and other call arrives, the oldest call is deleted.
You can modify the logged telephone number.
When the Call Log button light turns on, there is a call which you did not answer.
The following information is logged.
• Caller’s Name
• Date/Time call received
• Answered or Not Answered
Confirmed or Not Confirmed
• Caller’s Phone Number
To confirm the log information with the Call Log button
Display PT
While on-hook
(Call Log)
Press Call Log until
desired party appears.
230
Operating Manual
1.14.1 Using the Call Log
To confirm the log information with the Navigator Key
KX-NT300/KX-NT500/KX-DT300/KX-DT500/KX-T7600
While on-hook
Press Left twice.
Press Up or Down until
desired party appears.
To clear the log information
Display PT
While confirming the log information
(Call Log)
OR
Press Call Log, or Up or Down
until desired party appears.
Press TRANSFER.
To call
Display PT
While confirming the log information
(Call Log)
OR
Press Call Log, or Up or Down
until desired party appears.
Off-hook.
Operating Manual
231
1.14.1 Using the Call Log
To store the caller’s information in personal speed dialling
Display PT
While confirming the log information
(Call Log)
OR
Press Call Log, or Up or Down
until desired party appears.
Press STORE.
• The Call Log button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: No incoming call. Or you have already viewed the call log.
Red on: You have missed calls to view.
• If your call is answered by another extension, the caller’s information is recorded on the
displays of both your extension and the answering extension.
• You can lock your call log display by using an extension PIN (Personal Identification
Number), so that you can prohibit access to your logged information (Display Lock). Refer to
"3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode".
• You can also have a Call Log button for an ICD Group (Incoming Call Distribution Group).
• If a call arrives while you are using the call log, the call log display will be replaced with the
caller’s information.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Call Log button or Call Log for ICD Group button.
Calling with the Outgoing Call Log
You can redial using the outgoing call log.
To call
KX-NT300/KX-NT500/KX-DT300/KX-DT500/KX-T7600
While on-hook
Press Left.
232
Operating Manual
Press Up or Down
until desired name
and/or number*
appears.
Off-hook.
1.14.2 Using the Directories
• The following PSs can use outgoing call log information to other extensions (including TIE)
with same information as a PT connected to the PBX.
KX-TCA185/KX-TCA285/KX-TCA385
• PSs other than these may not display the same outgoing call log information as a PT
connected to the PBX.
• For details about referencing the outgoing call log, refer to the PS’s documentation.
• * When an outside call is made from the Outgoing Call Log, if a name is registered to the
Personal/System Speed Dialling entry, the name is displayed on the LCD of the display PT
making the call.
To call with the REDIAL button
Display PT
While on-hook
REDIAL
REDIAL
Press REDIAL to
display the outgoing
call log.*1
Press REDIAL.
Press Up or Down
until desired name
and/or number*2
appears.
Off-hook.
• This operation is available only for PTs with a display.
• *1 System programming is required for this operation.
• *2 After an outside call is made from the Outgoing Call Log, when another call is made using
the REDIAL button, if a name is registered to the Personal/System Speed Dialling entry, the
name is displayed on the LCD of the display PT making the call.
To store the caller’s information in personal speed dialling
Display PT
When the desired party is displayed
Press STORE.
• You can lock your call log display by using an extension PIN (Personal Identification
Number), so that you can prohibit access to your logged information (Display Lock). Refer to
"3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode".
• If a call arrives while you are using the call log, the call log display will be replaced with the
caller’s information.
1.14.2 Using the Directories
You can call using the directories (Personal Speed Dialling Directory, System Speed Dialling Directory and
Extension Number Directory).
Only personal directories can be stored, edited or deleted on your extension.
Operating Manual
233
1.14.2 Using the Directories
If a call arrives while you are using a directory, the display will be replaced with the caller’s information.
–
Calling with the Directory
–
Storing Names and Numbers
–
Entering Characters
• PS users: Refer to the documentation for your PS.
Calling with the Directory
To select and call
KX-NT300/KX-NT500/KX-DT300/KX-DT500/KX-T7600
While on-hook
Press Right until
desired directory
appears.*1
Press Up or Down
until desired name
and/or number*2
appears.
Off-hook.
• *1 The display order is as follows:
One time: Personal Speed Dialling Directory
Two times: System Speed Dialling Directory
Three times: Extension Number Directory
• *2 If a name is registered to the directory entry, the name is displayed on a display PT’s LCD
when the directory is displayed. When a call is established, if the name of the person who
answered the call is received over the line, it is displayed instead of the name registered in
the directory.
If a name is registered to the directory entry, the name can be searched for by entering the
first 1–6 alphanumeric characters of the name on the directory access screen, and then
pressing ENTER or Select (soft button).
When an outside call is made using a directory, if a name is registered to the directory entry,
the name is displayed on the second line of a display PT’s LCD. The name is not displayed
on a phone with a one line LCD.
• To cancel or exit, press the CANCEL or FLASH/RECALL button.
• You can lock your personal speed dialling directory by using an extension PIN (Personal
Identification Number), so that you can prohibit access to it (Display Lock). Refer to
"3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode".
• Directory entries generally should include name and number. If the name is not registered,
an entry cannot be displayed.
• The System Speed Dialling Directory can be displayed simply by pressing the AUTO DIAL/
STORE button while on-hook.
234
Operating Manual
1.14.2 Using the Directories
Storing Names and Numbers
To store a Personal Speed Dialling Directory item
Display PT
While on-hook
PROG.
phone no.
OR
name
OR
OR
PAUSE
Enter phone number
(max. 32 digits).
Press ENTER
or STORE.
Enter name
(max. 20 characters).
Press ENTER
or STORE.
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
• Telephone numbers and names displayed are stored using the first spare Personal Speed
Dialling memory available.
• For more details, refer to "To store the names and numbers in personal speed dialling" in
"3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode".
Entering Characters
You can enter the following characters. The tables show you the characters available for each button. Table
1 or Table 2 can be programmed.
Note
For NE models, the tables for Option mode differ depending on the system settings. For details, consult
your dealer.
Operating Manual
235
1.14.2 Using the Directories
Table 1 (Standard mode)
236
Operating Manual
1.14.2 Using the Directories
Table 2 (Option mode)
Operating Manual
237
1.14.2 Using the Directories
Table 2 (Option mode for NE model)
238
Operating Manual
1.14.3 Accessing System Features (System Feature Access)
Table 2 (Option mode for Greece)
1.14.3 Accessing System Features (System Feature Access)
You can access a feature with the "Feature Access" menu.
To access "Feature Access" menu and select the feature
KX-NT300/KX-NT500/KX-DT300/KX-DT500/KX-T7600
While on-hook
Press Right Press Up or Down
until the feature appears.
four times.
Features
Refer to
Automatic Callback Busy Cancel
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
Group Call Pickup
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call
Pickup)
Operating Manual
239
1.14.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
Features
Refer to
Directed Call Pickup
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call
Pickup)
Paging
1.7.1 Paging
Doorphone Call
1.11.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
Door Open
1.11.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
External Relay
1.11.2 If an External Relay is Connected
External Background Music
2.1.4 Turning on the External Background Music (BGM)
KX-UT series
While on-hook
Menu
OR
Press "Menu".
OR
Press Up or Down
until the feature appears.*
Features
Refer to
Group Paging
1.7.1 Paging
Directed Call Pickup
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call
Pickup)
Directed Group Call Pickup
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call
Pickup)
Data Line Security
1.9.9 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones (Data Line
Security)
• *For KX-UT670 users:
Tap "Feature access code" instead of pressing Up or Down.
1.14.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/
KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
The KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560 IP-PT and KX-UT248/KX-UT670 SIP phone have flexible
buttons with an LCD screen next to the buttons.
For KX-NT366:
The KX-NT366 IP-PT has 12 flexible buttons, and the telephone’s display shows which feature, telephone
number, or extension number is assigned to each button. You can press the NEXT PAGE key to display 3
other sets (pages) of 12 flexible button assignments. A different feature, telephone number, or extension
number can be assigned to each button in each set. This means that 48 flexible buttons are available.
240
Operating Manual
1.14.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
Page 4
Page 3
Page 1
Page 2
Bank
CO 6
Home
CO 5
Sales
LCS
CO 4
CO 3
PDN
CO 2
For KX-NT553/KX-NT556:
The KX-NT553/KX-NT556 IP-PT has 12 flexible buttons, and the telephone’s display shows which feature,
telephone number, or extension number is assigned to each button. You can press the NEXT PAGE key to
display other sets (pages) of 12 flexible button assignments as below.
Pages
Total Flexible button
KX-NT553
2
24
KX-NT556
3
36
Example: KX-NT556
Page 3
Page 1
Page 2
Bank
CO 6
Home
CO 5
Sales
LCS
CO 4
CO 3
PDN
CO 2
For KX-NT560:
The KX-NT560 IP-PT has 8 flexible buttons, and the telephone’s display shows which feature, telephone
number, or extension number is assigned to each button. You can press the Page key to display 3 other sets
(pages) of 8 flexible button assignments. A different feature, telephone number, or extension number can be
assigned to each button in each set. This means that 32 flexible buttons are available.
Page 4
Headset Company-A
Wrap-up Company-B
Headset Company-A
Log-in
Company-C
Wrap-up Company-B
Log-out
Company-D
S-CO5
Log-in
Company-C
S-CO6
Log-out Company-D
S-CO7
S-CO8
Page 3
Page 1
Bank
Home
Sales-1
Sales-2
Page 2
DN-1
DN-2
DN-3
DN-4
S-CO1
S-CO2
S-CO3
S-CO4
For KX-UT248:
The KX-UT248 SIP phone has 8 flexible buttons, and the telephone’s display shows which feature,
telephone number, or extension number is assigned to each button. You can press the Page keys to display
2 other sets (pages) of 8 flexible button assignments. A different feature, telephone number, or extension
number can be assigned to each button in each set. This means that 24 flexible buttons are available.
Operating Manual
241
1.14.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
Headset Company-A
Wrap-up Company-B
Headset Company-A
Log-in
Company-C
Wrap-up Company-B
Log-out Company-D
Log-in S-CO5
Company-C
Log-out S-CO6
Company-D
S-CO7
S-CO8
Page 3
Page 1
Page 2
Bank
Home
Sales-1
Sales-2
DN-1
DN-2
DN-3
DN-4
S-CO1
S-CO2
S-CO3
S-CO4
For KX-UT670:
The KX-UT670 SIP phone has 24 flexible buttons. Each button can be assigned a feature, telephone
number, extension number, etc., with a custom label for each. You can switch the display between singlerow display and full-screen display. In single-row display, 6 flexible buttons are displayed, and you can press
the Page key to display another row of buttons. In full-screen display, all 24 flexible buttons are displayed at
once.
Row 4
Row 3
Row 1
Row 2
Bank
DN-1
Home
DN-1
Sales-1
DN-3
Sales-2
DN-4
To switch display
KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/
KX-UT248/KX-UT670
OR
OR
OR
OR
Press NEXT PAGE or Page key
to display the desired page.
• For KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560 users:
– When you answer an incoming call or when you seize an outside line, the display
automatically changes to the page that contains the green lit button.
– After customising each button, you can set the displayed text for the button. For details
about customising buttons, refer to "3.1.3 Customising the Buttons".
• For KX-UT248 and KX-UT670 users:
– You can customise the flexible buttons and set the displayed text for each button using
Web Maintenance Console. For details about customising buttons, refer to "Customising
the Flexible Buttons" in "
Editing Settings in Web Maintenance Console" in
"3.2.1 User Programming".
– For the KX-UT248, the display shows a maximum of 10 characters for each button. For
the KX-UT670, you can specify up to 12 characters, but some characters may not be
displayed depending on the characters used.
242
Operating Manual
1.15 Cellular Phone Features
1.15 Cellular Phone Features
1.15.1 Cellular Phone Features
When you are not at your desk or not in the office and receive a forwarded outside call on your cellular
phone, you can use the following features if enabled through system programming.
–
Transferring to an Extension in the PBX
–
Transferring to a Private Network (TIE Line Access)
–
Transferring to an Outside Phone Number
–
Adding Other Parties during a Conversation (Conference)
–
Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
–
Paging and then Transferring a Call
• Some features may not be available for cellular phones, depending on the type of outside
line being used.
Transferring to an Extension in the PBX
To transfer
Cellular Phone
During a conversation
extension no.
D.Tone
Enter #.
Dial extension number.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted.
• When transferring a call from an analogue trunk, you cannot talk to the destination party
after dialling an extension number.
• You cannot transfer a call to a DISA floating extension number.
Transferring to a Private Network (TIE Line Access)
During a conversation, you can make a call to an extension connected to another PBX in a private network
and transfer a call to it.
Operating Manual
243
1.15.1 Cellular Phone Features
To transfer
Cellular Phone
During a conversation
extension no.
*
OR
D.Tone
7
private phone no.
*
Dial extension number or
enter 7 and the dial private phone number.
Enter #.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted.
The party is placed on hold.
• * When transferring a call from an analogue trunk, you cannot talk to the destination party
after dialling an extension number or 7 + private phone number.
Transferring to an Outside Phone Number
During a conversation, you can make a call to an outside phone number and transfer a call to it.
To transfer
Cellular Phone
During a conversation
0
/ 9
OR
D.Tone
Enter #.
The party is placed on hold.
8
outside
phone no.
outside line
group no.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
On-hook.
Enter automatic line access
number or enter outside line group
access number and then outside
This step can be omitted.
line group number.
• When transferring a call from an analogue trunk, you cannot talk to the destination party
after dialling the outside phone number.
244
Operating Manual
1.15.1 Cellular Phone Features
Adding Other Parties during a Conversation (Conference)
To establish a conference call
Cellular Phone
During a conversation
3
extension no.
D.Tone
Enter #.
C.Tone
Dial extension number.
Talk to the
new party.
Enter #.
Enter 3.
Talk with multiple parties.
Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
Cellular Phone
During a conversation
OR
extension no.
D.Tone
Enter #.
Dial extension number.
Talk to the
other party.
Enter #.
Talk to the
original party.
The other party will be on hold.
Operating Manual
245
1.15.1 Cellular Phone Features
Paging and then Transferring a Call
Cellular Phone
During a conversation
3
3
D.Tone
Enter #.
Enter
33.
paging group
no.
C.Tone
Dial paging group
number (2 digits).
The party is placed on hold.
Wait for an
answer.
Talk.
On-hook.
The held party and the paged extension
are connected and start a conversation.
246
Operating Manual
Announce.
Section 2
Manager Operation
This section shows the manager how to control the
other extensions or the PBX.
Operating Manual
247
2.1 Control Features
2.1 Control Features
2.1.1 Extension Control
The manager extension can control the settings of other extensions.
–
Changing the Settings of Other Extensions
Changing the Settings of Other Extensions
To lock/unlock other extensions (Remote Extension Dial Lock)
This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
2
7
8
3
Off-hook.
Enter
78.
Unlock
extension no.
OR
C.Tone
Lock
Enter 2 to unlock
or 3 to lock.
Enter extension
number.
On-hook.
• The manager can use Remote Extension Dial Lock to unlock any extension, whether that
extension was locked remotely (Remote Extension Dial Lock) or from the extension itself
(Extension Dial Lock).
2.1.2 Time Service Mode Control
The manager extension or the preprogrammed extension can change the time mode (Day, Lunch, Break or
Night).
There are two methods (Automatic or Manual) of changing the time modes.
Automatic: enables the time mode for each day of the week to change automatically. You may also change
it manually.
Manual: enables to change a mode manually as follows.
To change the time mode (Day/Night/Lunch/Break)
PT/PS
While on-hook
(Time Service
(Day/Night/
Lunch/Break))
Press Time Service
(Day/Night/Lunch/Break)
until the desired mode
appears.
248
Operating Manual
2.1.3 Restriction Level Control (Dial Tone Transfer)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0 Day
7
8
0
1 Night
2 Lunch
C.Tone
3 Break
Off-hook.
Enter
780.
Enter 0 to 3
as you desire.
On-hook.
To select the time service switching mode (Automatic/Manual)
PT/PS
While on-hook
(Time Service
Switching Mode
(Automatic/Manual))
Press Time Service Switching
Mode (Automatic/Manual).
• Besides the time mode, there is Holiday mode. It can change mode once on a specified
date.
• The Time Service (Day/Night/Lunch/Break) button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Day mode
Green on: Lunch mode
Flashing green: Break mode
Red on: Night mode
Flashing red: Holiday mode
• The Time Service Switching Mode (Automatic/Manual) button light shows the current status
as follows:
Off: Automatic
Red on: Manual
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Time Service (Day/Night/Lunch/Break) button or a Time Service Switching
Mode (Automatic/Manual) button.
2.1.3 Restriction Level Control (Dial Tone Transfer)
The manager extension can change the restriction level, permitting an extension to
make a call.
Operating Manual
249
2.1.4 Turning on the External Background Music (BGM)
PT/PS
During a conversation with an extension
(Toll Restriction/
Call Barring)
C.Tone
On-hook.
Press Toll Restriction/
Call Barring.
The extension can hear the dial
tone and then make a call.
• The restriction level is changed to the preprogrammed level of Toll Restriction/Call Barring
button.
• The restriction level of SIP phones cannot be changed.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Toll Restriction/Call Barring button.
2.1.4 Turning on the External Background Music (BGM)
The manager extension can select and broadcast background music in the office through external speakers.
To select and start/stop the background music
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
external
pager no.
3
5
OR
BGM no.
OR
0
Off-hook.
Enter
35.
Enter external
pager number
(1 digit) or for all.
C.Tone
Enter BGM number
(1 digit) or 0 to stop.
On-hook.
• One-look Network
In a One-look network, pagers are numbered sequentially based on the site number and the pager’s port
(2 digits). For more information, consult your system administrator.
2.1.5 Recording Outgoing Messages (OGM)
The manager extension can record three kinds of greeting messages (OGM) as follows:
250
1.
DISA message: Used to greet and guide callers so that they access an
extension user group or outside party without operator assistance.
2.
Incoming Call Distribution Group message: Used to greet and guide callers to
an incoming call distribution group.
3.
Timed Reminder message: Used for a wake-up call message when the
extension answers the Timed Reminder.
Operating Manual
2.1.5 Recording Outgoing Messages (OGM)
All messages have their own extension numbers. You can select the desired message. You have two
methods for recording a message. One is recorded using the handset, and the other is recorded from an
external BGM (MOH) port.
To record
PT
3
Off-hook.
Enter
OGM floating
extension no.
1
6
Enter 1.
36.
Progress
Tone &
C.Tone
Enter OGM floating
extension number.
C.Tone
Press STORE.
Record
message.
The message
is played back.
On-hook.
When the time limit passes,
it stops automatically.
To play back
PT
3
Off-hook.
Enter
OGM floating
extension no.
Enter OGM floating
extension number.
6
36.
2
Enter 2.
C.Tone
The message
is played back.
On-hook.
Operating Manual
251
2.1.6 Allowing Users to Seize an Unavailable Outside Line (Trunk Busy Out)
To record from an external BGM (MOH) port
PT
3
Off-hook.
Enter
6
36.
OGM floating
extension no.
Progress
Enter OGM floating Tone &
extension number. C.Tone
3
BGM port
no.
Enter 3.
Enter BGM port
number (1 digit).
You hear
the message.
C.Tone
The message
is recorded.
Press CONF.
C.Tone
Press STORE.
When the time limit
passes, it stops
automatically.
The message
is played back.
On-hook.
To clear the message
PT
3
Enter
Off-hook.
OGM floating
extension no.
Enter OGM floating
extension number.
6
36.
Progress
Tone &
C.Tone
0
Enter 0.
On-hook.
• The default of OGM floating extension numbers depends on system programming. For more
information, consult your System Administrator or System Manager.
2.1.6 Allowing Users to Seize an Unavailable Outside Line
(Trunk Busy Out)
When a problem is found on a certain outside line, the PBX automatically makes it unavailable for use
temporarily. The manager can manually enable the outside line and allow users to use it again.
252
Operating Manual
2.1.7 Releasing Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Monitor
To re-enable an outside line
PT/SLT/PS
7
8
5
outside line no.
C.Tone
Enter
Off-hook.
785.
Enter outside line number
(3 digits).
On-hook.
• In some countries/areas, the PBX may not be able to automatically make a faulty outside
line unavailable for use.
2.1.7 Releasing Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Monitor
NDSS buttons can be customised on any extension connected to your PBX. An NDSS
button allows an extension user to monitor another extension connected to another
PBX in a private network. The NDSS button light shows the current status of the
monitored extension in the same way as a DSS button. When it becomes
unnecessary to monitor an extension connected to another PBX, the manager can
stop the PBX from monitoring it. Any NDSS buttons set to monitor that extension will
also stop monitoring.
PT/PS
7
8
4
another PBX
extension no.
OR
C.Tone
(NDSS)
Off-hook.
Enter
784.
Dial another PBX extension
number and then enter #, or
press NDSS.
On-hook.
• To restart monitoring of an extension after performing this operation, go off-hook, press the
corresponding NDSS button, and go on-hook.
Customising Your Phone
• 3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Create or edit a Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) button.
Operating Manual
253
2.2 Configuring Unified Messaging Features
2.2 Configuring Unified Messaging Features
2.2.1 System Manager Features
The System Manager can configure mailboxes, change class of service (COS) settings for subscribers, etc.
–
Logging in to the System Manager’s Mailbox
–
Setting Up Mailboxes
–
Setting Class of Service (COS) Parameters
–
Remote Time Service Mode Setting
–
Changing the Company Greeting and Incoming Call Service Setting
–
Broadcasting Messages
–
Changing the System Manager’s Password
Logging in to the System Manager’s Mailbox
The procedures described in this section require the System Manager to use a telephone, however, many of
these procedures can also be performed using a PC with Web Maintenance Console. For more information,
consult your dealer.
In order to perform these procedures with a telephone, the System Manager must log in before performing
any System Manager tasks. To log in as the System Manager, 3 items of information must be known: the
UM group’s floating extension number to access the Unified Messaging system, the System Manager’s
mailbox number, and the System Manager’s mailbox password.
– The System Manager’s mailbox number is 999 (default) depending on the mailbox number length
specified in system programming.
– The System Manager’s password can be assigned by the System Administrator using Web Maintenance
Console or by the System Manager using his or her extension telephone (refer to "
System Manager’s Password").
Changing the
• Before the System Manager can perform any System Manager tasks, "System Manager
Access from Telephone" must be enabled and "Password for System Manager (Up to 16
numeric digits)" must be set by the System Administrator using Web Maintenance Console.
• After logging in, the system will announce the number of total messages, the number of new
messages, or the length of new messages. These announcements depend on the mailbox
settings and COS settings for the System Manager.
• If there are new messages in the mailbox, the messages will be played automatically. The
System Manager can listen to them continuously without listening to the system prompts.
This feature is only available when "Autoplay New Message" is activated for the System
Manager’s COS.
• If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
System Manager cannot create or edit mailboxes. The system will announce, "Sorry, this
function is not available".
254
Operating Manual
2.2.1 System Manager Features
• For more information on logging in, refer to "Logging in to Your Mailbox for the First Time".
• Manager Service switching
You can switch mailboxes simply by pressing ## from the subscriber service menu, in the
following order:
Subscriber service
Message Manager service
System Manager service
• For KX-UT series SIP phone users:
When using the MESSAGE button, please press the MESSAGE button before going offhook.
Manual log-in
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
#
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
OR
Off-hook.
System Manager’s
mailbox no.
6
Enter #6.
UM group’s floating
extension no.
Enter and System Manager’s
mailbox number (default: 999).
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer, or enter UM group’s
floating extension number.
System Manager password
#
Enter System Manager’s
Mailbox
Enter System Manager password and #.
Remote automatic log-in
From Outside Telephone
Call the Unified Messaging system
from the preprogrammed
outside telephone number
(assigned as a Caller ID number).
System Manager password
#
Enter System Manager’s
Mailbox
Enter System Manager
password and #.
Operating Manual
255
2.2.1 System Manager Features
CAUTION
• It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.
• To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes
known to others, the PBX may be misused.
• Change the password periodically.
Notice
• When disabling the password requirement, ensure that an unauthorised third-party is not
allowed access to your extension.
Setting Up Mailboxes
The System Manager’s primary function is to create mailboxes for new subscribers and to maintain system
organisation by deleting unneeded passwords and mailboxes.
• If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
System Manager cannot create or edit mailboxes. The system will announce, "Sorry, this
function is not available".
Creating and Editing a Mailbox
The System Manager can create and edit subscriber mailboxes by following the steps below.
When creating a new mailbox, or editing a mailbox’s parameters, the following parameters can be set:
• Mailbox Number
• Subscriber’s Name:
The system allows a maximum of 10 seconds for each name. The name should be spoken slowly and
clearly. (We recommend using the subscriber’s last name.)
• Extension Number
• First 4 Letters of the Subscriber’s Last Name:
Enter only the first 4 letters of the owner’s last name.
• First 4 Letters of the Subscriber’s First Name:
Enter only the first 4 letters of the subscriber’s first name.
• Class of Service Number:
Enter any COS number (1–64).
• Interview Mailbox Number:
Interview Mailbox Numbers must not be the same number as an existing mailbox.
• All Calls Transfer To Mailbox (Change Logical Extension Status):
If this parameter is enabled, the extension is considered to be a Logical Extension and therefore calls
directed to the extension via Automated Attendant service are automatically forwarded to the extension
mailbox. The extension does not ring when a call is received.
• Message Waiting Lamp Notification:
If this parameter is enabled, the Message Waiting Lamp of the subscriber’s telephone turns on when a
new message is recorded.
• External Message Delivery:
Allows a subscriber to send a message to several subscribers and non-subscribers (including outside
parties). If enabled, the prompt mode setting determines the language heard when the system calls the
recipient.
• Auto Forwarding:
256
Operating Manual
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Moves or copies unplayed messages from one mailbox to another, after a specified period of time.
To create/edit/delete any mailbox parameter
Log in to the System
Manager’s mailbox.
5
To exit
STEP B
STEP A
1
Enter 51.
1
Enter 1
to assign
or edit.
subscriber's
mailbox no.
Enter the subscriber's
mailbox number.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
Enter
.
Follow system prompts
and set each
parameter below.
Parameters
Subscriber’s Name
Steps
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2. Record the subscriber’s name.
Extension Number
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2. Enter the subscriber’s extension number.
First 4 Letters of the
Subscriber’s Last Name
First 4 Letters of the
Subscriber’s First Name
Class of Service Number
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2. Enter the first 4 letters of subscriber’s last name.
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2. Enter the first 4 letters of subscriber’s first name.
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2. Enter the Class of Service Number (1–64).
Interview Mailbox Number
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2. Enter the Interview Mailbox Number.
All Calls Transfer To
Mailbox (Change Logical
Extension Status)
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
Operating Manual
257
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Parameters
Message Waiting Lamp
Notification
Device Notification for
Unreceived Messages
External Message Delivery
Steps
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
• If set to "Enable", go to "Prompt Mode".
Prompt Mode
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
for Primary.
2
for System.
3
for Caller Select.
• For System, enter the system prompt number (1–8).
2.
Auto Forwarding
1.
4 to accept the current setting, then go to "External Message
Delivery".
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
• If set to "Disable":
a.
The following mailbox settings are skipped.
– Forwarding Mailbox Number
– Forwarding Delay Time
– Forwarding Mode
Forwarding Mailbox
Number
Forwarding Delay Time
b.
The Auto Forwarding parameter is the last parameter to be
entered.
c.
To continue assigning or editing other mailboxes, go back to
STEP B.
d.
To finish, enter
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2. Enter the forwarding mailbox number.
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2. Enter the delay time, and
3.
258
Operating Manual
.
2
to accept.
#
.
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Parameters
Steps
Forwarding Mode
1.
1
to change the current setting (Copy or Move).
2.
2
to accept, then go to "Auto Forwarding".
To delete a mailbox
The System Manager should delete mailboxes that are no longer needed. When another person accesses
the Unified Messaging system, the action is automatically cancelled.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
5
1
2
Enter the mailbox number.
1
to delete the mailbox.
To reset a mailbox password
When a password is forgotten, the System Manager must reset the password before it can be reassigned by
the subscriber.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
5
1
3
Enter the mailbox number.
1
to delete the password.
• The System Manager password cannot be reset here. The System Administrator can reset
the System Manager password using Web Maintenance Console.
• After the password is reset, if the System Administrator has set "Default Password for New
Mailboxes" to "Enable", the password will be set to the default password. If set to "Disable",
the mailbox will have no password.
Setting Class of Service (COS) Parameters
A Class of Service (COS) defines the set of system services available to the mailboxes assigned to it. There
are 66 Classes of Service; they can be assigned to mailboxes by the System Administrator using Web
Maintenance Console or by the System Manager using a telephone. COS No. 65 and No. 66 are assigned
by default to the Message Manager and the System Manager respectively.
• If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
System Manager cannot set COS parameters. The system will announce, "Sorry, this
function is not available".
To set COS parameters
Follow the steps detailed below to set the following Class of Service parameters:
Operating Manual
259
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Log in to the System
Manager’s mailbox.
5
2
Enter 52.
Enter the class of
service number (1–66).
Parameters
Personal Greeting Length*1
Follow system prompts
and set each
parameter below.
class of
service no.
Steps
1.
1
to change the greeting length.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the greeting length (1–360 s).
New Message Retention
Time
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the retention time.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the retention time (a maximum of 30 days or 0: Unlimited).
Saved Message Retention
Time
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the retention time.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the retention time (a maximum of 30 days or 0: Unlimited).
Message Length
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the message length.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the message length (1–60 min or 0: Unlimited).
Total Message Time
Available per Mailbox
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the total message time.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the total message time (1–600 min or 0: Unlimited).
3.
Message Retrieval Order
1.
2.
260
Operating Manual
2
to accept.
1 to change the current setting (LIFO [Last In First Out] or FIFO
[First In First Out]).
2 to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2
to accept.
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Parameters
Prompt Mode
Steps
1.
1
for Primary.
2
for System.
• For System, enter system prompt number (1–8).
Delete Message
Confirmation
Message Envelope
Playback Mode
Caller ID Callback
Play System Prompt after
Personal Greeting*1
Use Call Waiting on Busy*1
Message Cancel for Live
Call Screening*1
Intercom Paging Group*1
2.
3
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
for Before.
2
for After.
3
for Require.
4
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2.
4
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the paging group.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the group number (1–32).
Maximum Number of Caller
IDs for Caller Name
Announcement*1
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the number of announcements that can be programmed by
subscribers (1–30/0: None).
3.
2
to accept.
Operating Manual
261
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Parameters
Mailbox Capacity Warning
Steps
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the warning threshold (1–60 min or 0: None).
Personal Greeting for
Caller ID*1
Caller ID Screen*1
Call Transfer to Outside*1
Subscriber Tutorial*1
Notify of Transfer
Directory Listing*1
Auto Receipt
Autoplay New Message
First Playback Urgent
Messages
Announce Message
Transferred Information
Caller ID Announcement
262
Operating Manual
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
for Normal Mode.
2
for Simplified Mode.
3
to disable.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Parameters
Announce Option Menu
After Erasing Messages
New Message Length
Announcement
Steps
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
Not available for COS No. 65 (Message Manager) and COS No. 66 (System Manager)
*1
Remote Time Service Mode Setting
You can set the time service mode from an outside telephone even when you are away from the office.
To set the time service mode
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
4
3. Enter the tenant number and
4.
1
#
.
to change.
5. Select the desired Time Service mode entry.
1
to set Day mode.
2
to set Night mode.
3
to set Lunch mode.
4
to set Break mode.
Changing the Company Greeting and Incoming Call Service Setting
When the Unified Messaging system answers calls, it greets the callers with a Company Greeting and then
activates an Incoming Call Service. The System Manager or System Administrator can choose:
– The appropriate company greeting for each time mode (Day, Night, Lunch, and Break) of each call
service. The default company greeting is Company Greeting 1. If the Company Greeting 1 is not
recorded, nothing will not be played.
– The desired Incoming Call Service for each time mode of each call service. The default service is Custom
Service 1 for Day/Lunch/Break mode, and Custom Service 2 for Night mode. If the Custom Service is not
recorded, Automated Attendant service will be played.
– The assignment of the Service Group for each Unified Messaging extension number/Trunk.
• If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
System Manager cannot change the Company Greeting and Incoming Call Service Setting.
The system will announce, "Sorry, this function is not available".
Operating Manual
263
2.2.1 System Manager Features
To change the service group setting
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
5
3.
2
3
to change the Service Group setting.
4. Enter the Service Group Number (1–64).
5. Select the desired Time Service period entry.
6.
7.
1
for Day Time service.
2
for Night Time service.
3
for Lunch Time service.
4
for Break Time service.
1
to change the Company Greeting.
2
to change the Incoming Call Service, then go to step 10.
1
to change the setting.
2
to accept.
8. Select the desired setting entry.
1
to change a Company Greeting number.
2
to set the System Greeting, then go to step 13.
3
to disable, then go to step 13.
9. Enter a Company Greeting number (1–32), then go to step 13.
10.
1
to change the setting.
2
to accept.
11. Select the desired setting entry.
1
to set Voice Mail Service, then go to step 13.
2
to set Automated Attendant Service, then go to step 13.
3
to set Custom Service.
4
to set Interview Service.
6
to set Transfer to Mailbox.
12. Enter the Custom Service number (1–200), or the Mailbox number.
13.
264
2
to accept.
Operating Manual
2.2.1 System Manager Features
To change the service group assignment
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
5
3.
1
3
to change the Service Group Assignment.
4. Enter the Unified Messaging extension number.
5.
1
to change the service group, then go to step 6.
2
to accept.
6. Enter the Service Group Number (1–64).
7.
2
to accept.
Broadcasting Messages
The System Manager can deliver a message to multiple subscribers with one operation. Messages can be
sent to all subscribers (Broadcasting Message feature) or to specified subscribers only. When delivering a
message to specified subscribers, the System Manager can receive verification when the recipients listen to
the message.
• The System Manager can set the date and time when a message is delivered. The date can
be set up to one month in advance.
To deliver messages to all mailboxes (Broadcasting Messages)
The Broadcasting Messages feature allows the System Manager to deliver a message to multiple
subscribers with one operation. Broadcast messages have priority over other regular or urgent messages,
but otherwise are treated like regular messages. This feature is useful when informing subscribers about the
current system status such as remaining capacity, requesting that unnecessary messages be erased, etc.
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
2
3.
1
to record a broadcast message.
4.
1
to end recording.
5.
2
to accept.
To deliver messages to specified mailboxes
Use this feature to deliver the same message to one or more subscribers by specifying their mailbox
numbers.
Operating Manual
265
2.2.1 System Manager Features
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
2
2
3. Enter the mailbox number of the intended recipient.
• Enter by name by pressing
4.
2
to accept.
5.
1
to record a message.
#
first. Use a Mailbox Group by specifying its number.
1
• Enter
to add mailbox numbers. Enter
2
cancel message transfer.
6.
1
to end recording.
7.
2
to accept.
8.
1
1
2
to
to send the message immediately, then go to step 13.
9. Enter the desired delivery time, then
10.
to review the mailing list. Enter
to specify the delivery time.
1
• Enter
3
1
for AM.
2
for PM.
#
.
• This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24-hour time.
11. Enter the day of the month for delivery, then
.
#
Example:
• If today is February 16 and you enter
1
7
• If today is February 16 and you enter
5
#
12.
2
to accept.
13.
1
to make the message urgent.
2
to continue.
1
to make the message private.
2
to continue.
14.
#
, the message will be delivered tomorrow.
, the message will be delivered on March 5.
Changing the System Manager’s Password
The System Manager must enter the System Manager password in order to log in before performing any
System Manager tasks. In order to ensure system security, we recommend selecting a long (max. 16 digits)
password that cannot be easily guessed.
• If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
System Manager cannot change the System Manager password. The system will announce,
"Sorry, this function is not available".
266
Operating Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
To change the System Manager’s password
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
3
3.
1
to change the mailbox password.
2
to accept the current setting.
4. Enter the desired password, then
5.
2
#
.
to accept.
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
The Message Manager can maintain the general delivery mailbox, change notification settings, record/
delete prompts, etc.
–
Logging in to the Message Manager’s Mailbox
–
Managing the General Delivery Mailbox
–
Setting Up Message Waiting Notification
–
Customising the Message Manager’s Mailbox
–
Recording Messages
–
Remote Call Forwarding Set
–
Setting the Timed Reminder
–
Day/Night Recording Menu
–
Recording an Emergency Greeting
–
List of Prompts for VM and AA Service
Logging in to the Message Manager’s Mailbox
The procedures described in this section require the Message Manager to use a telephone, however, many
of these procedures can also be performed using a PC with Web Maintenance Console. For more
information, consult your dealer.
In order to perform these procedures with a telephone, the Message Manager must log in before performing
any Message Manager tasks. To log in as the Message Manager, 3 items of information must be known: the
UM group’s floating extension number to access the Unified Messaging system, the Message Manager’s
mailbox number, and the Message Manager’s mailbox password.
– The Message Manager’s mailbox number is 998 (default) depending on the mailbox number length
specified in system programming.
– The Message Manager’s password can be assigned by the System Administrator using Web
Maintenance Console or by the Message Manager using his or her extension telephone (refer to "
Customising the Message Manager’s Mailbox").
Operating Manual
267
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
• Before the Message Manager can perform Message Management (recording Custom
Service Menus, messages, etc.), "Message Manager Access from Telephone" must be
enabled and "Password for Message Manager (Up to 16 numeric digits)" must be set by the
System Administrator using Web Maintenance Console.
• After logging in, the system will announce the number of total messages, the number of new
messages, or the length of new messages. These announcements depend on the mailbox
settings and COS settings for the Message Manager.
• If there are new messages in the mailbox, the messages will be played automatically. The
Message Manager can listen to them continuously without listening to the system prompts.
This feature is only available when "Autoplay New Message" is activated for the Message
Manager’s COS.
• For more information on logging in, refer to "
Logging in to Your Mailbox".
• Manager Service switching
You can switch mailboxes simply by pressing ## from the subscriber service menu, in the
following order:
Subscriber service
Message Manager service
System Manager service
• For KX-UT series SIP phone users:
When using the MESSAGE button, please press the MESSAGE button before going offhook.
Manual log-in
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
#
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Message Manager’s
mailbox no.
6
OR
Off-hook.
Enter #6.
UM group’s floating
extension no.
Enter and Message Manager’s
mailbox number (default: 998).
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer, or enter UM group’s
floating extension number.
Message Manager password
#
Enter Message Manager password and #.
268
Operating Manual
Enter Message Manager’s
Mailbox
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
Automatic log-in
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Off-hook.
OR
Message Manager password
Enter Message Manager’s
Mailbox
#
Enter Message Manager password and #.
UM group’s floating
extension no.
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer, or enter UM group’s
floating extension number.
• This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator for your mailbox.
Remote automatic log-in
From Outside Telephone
Call the Unified Messaging system
from the preprogrammed
outside telephone number
(assigned as a Caller ID number).
Message Manager password
#
Enter Message Manager’s
Mailbox
Enter Message Manager
password and #.
CAUTION
• It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.
• To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes
known to others, the PBX may be misused.
• Change the password periodically.
Notice
• When disabling the password requirement, ensure that an unauthorised third-party is not
allowed access to your extension.
Managing the General Delivery Mailbox
One of the Message Manager’s functions is to check the General Delivery Mailbox for messages and
transfer them to the appropriate mailbox or mailboxes (Mailbox Groups may be used). This can be done at
any time using the telephone.
Operating Manual
269
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
To listen to messages
The Message Manager can monitor the status of the General Delivery Mailbox through his or her mailbox.
He or she can listen to the messages stored in the General Delivery Mailbox and, if necessary, transfer them
to their intended recipients.
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
1
to receive the message.
3. Enter the desired number.
1
to listen to new messages.
2
to listen to old messages.
3
to listen to deleted messages.
4. The system plays each message, identifying the sender and indicating when the message was
recorded.
1 to repeat this message.
1
1
to replay the previous message.
2
to play the next message.
3
to delete this new/old message or recover this deleted message.
4
to reply to this new/old message.
5
to transfer this new/old message.
6
to listen to the message envelope.
• System programming determines if the message envelope is played before each message, after
each message, or only when you press
6
.
7
to rewind a voice message during playback.
8
to pause or restart the message during playback.
8
4
to increase playback volume during playback.
8
5
to set a Bookmark for the voice message during voice message playback.
8
6
to start playback at the Bookmark for the voice message.
9
to fast-forward during playback.
#
to save as new (when the new message is listened).
0
to listen to the entire menu.
To transfer messages
Messages left in the General Delivery Mailbox should be transferred to their intended recipients on a regular
basis. The Message Manager can add his or her own voice comments when necessary. When a message is
transferred, the original message is not deleted from the General Delivery Mailbox; it must be deleted
manually.
270
Operating Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
1. Start with step 1–5 in "To listen to messages" above.
while listening to the message to transfer.
5
2. Enter the destination mailbox number.
3.
2
to accept.
4.
2
to record a comment.
• Enter
4
1
to transfer messages without comment. Enter
3
to add a mailbox number. Enter
to review the Mailing List.
5.
1
to end recording.
6.
2
to accept.
Setting Up Message Waiting Notification
The Unified Messaging system can notify the Message Manager when unplayed messages are waiting in
his or her mailbox by turning on the message waiting lamp and/or calling an external device (i.e.,
telephone).
The Unified Messaging system can also send notification via e-mail if the System Administrator has enabled
this feature.
To set notification by Message Waiting Lamp
The system lights the message waiting lamp on the Message Manager’s extension when a new message is
recorded in the Message Manager’s mailbox.
• Extensions assigned as operators can be called by dialling "9/0 (default)". However, when
setting this feature the extension number (not "9/0 [default]") must be specified. For more
information, consult your System Administrator.
• When a 6-line display PT is used, the number of new (unplayed) messages will be displayed
while the message waiting lamp is lit. If the telephone has a Message button, the Message
light will also turn on when you receive a new message.
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
2
3.
1
to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification Status.
4.
1
to change.
2
to accept.
Setting Notification by External Device
The system calls the preprogrammed telephone number when a new message is recorded in the Message
Manager’s mailbox. Set the following parameters as needed.
To assign notification numbers
A maximum of 3 telephone numbers can be set for message notification.
Operating Manual
271
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
2
3.
3
to assign a telephone number.
4. Enter the desired number.
5.
1
to change the first telephone number.
2
to change the second telephone number.
3
to change the third telephone number.
1
to change.
6. Dial the telephone number.
7.
2
to accept.
8.
1
to change the telephone number.
2
to accept.
3
to review.
4
to add more digits.
5
to insert a pause.
6
to insert a wait for dial tone.
To set device status
For each device, the notification is enabled or disabled according to a preset schedule. The Message
Manager can enable a device according to a schedule. However, the System Administrator must first assign
a destination number to the desired device.
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
2
2
3. Enter the device number (1–6).
• Device number 4, 5, or 6 is used to specify a device number that is "Device No. 1, 2, or 3" for "Email/Text Message Device" in Web Maintenance Console.
• If a telephone number has not been assigned to the selected device number 1, 2, or 3, you cannot
set the device status. Refer to "To assign notification numbers" to assign a telephone number.
4. Select the desired message type.
1
to notify all messages.
2
to notify urgent messages.
5. Select when the device will be used for message notification.
1 for schedule (a notification is sent each time a message is received, but only during the times
programmed by the System Administrator).
2 for continuously.
3
272
for disable (notifications are not sent).
Operating Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
Customising the Message Manager’s Mailbox
The Message Manager can customise the Message Manager’s mailbox by changing the following
parameters.
– The Message Manager’s mailbox password
– The extension numbers of Operator 1, 2, and 3
– Telephone numbers 1 and 2 used for call forwarding destinations when Remote Call Forwarding is set to
an outside line
• If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
Message Manager cannot customise his or her mailbox. The system will announce, "Sorry,
this function is not available".
• Message Manager’s Password:
The Message Manager must enter the Message Manager password in order to log in before performing
any Message Manager tasks. In order to ensure system security, we recommend selecting a long (max.
16 digits) password that cannot be easily guessed.
• Operator’s Extensions:
When callers require help, they can dial the operator call number to be transferred to an operator. A
maximum of 3 operators can be programmed for each time mode; these operators are not necessarily the
same as the operator extensions programmed for the PBX. The extension assigned as Operator 1 for the
day mode is designated as the Message Manager.
• Telephone Numbers 1 and 2 for Remote Call Forward to Outside:
After programming/changing the telephone numbers used for Remote Call Forward to Outside, the
Message Manager must reset the remote call forwarding setting (refer to "
Remote Call Forwarding
Set"), even if it was already enabled. Telephone numbers set here will not be effective until remote call
forwarding is reset. If you do not reset remote call forwarding, calls will be forwarded to the old telephone
numbers.
Operating Manual
273
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
To customise the message manager’s mailbox
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
3
3.
1
to change the password.
2
to accept.
4. Enter the password, then
5.
2
.
#
to accept.
6. Enter the desired number.
1
to change or assign the operator’s extension.
2
to accept.
3
to delete, then go to step 9.
• Operator 1’s extension number cannot be deleted.
7. Dial the extension number.
8.
2
to accept.
9. Repeat steps 6–8 to assign or to delete the extension number for the Day, Night, Lunch and Break
Modes for each operator.
10. Enter the desired number.
1
to change or assign the telephone number 1 setting.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to step 13.
11. Dial the telephone number (
0
–
9
,
[max. 32 digits]).
• Make sure you begin the telephone number with an outside line access number (to seize an
outside line).
12.
2
to accept.
13. Enter the desired number.
1
to change or assign the telephone number 2 setting.
2
to accept the current setting.
14. Dial the telephone number (
15.
2
0
–
9
,
[max. 32 digits]).
to accept.
Recording Messages
The Message Manager is responsible for recording various system messages (menus, voice labels, system
prompts, and system caller names) and is also responsible for maintaining the following:
• Company Greetings:
A maximum of 32 company greetings for business/non-business and lunch/break hours as well as
holidays can be selected, recorded, or deleted as necessary.
• Company Name
• Custom Service Menus:
274
Operating Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
A maximum of 200 custom service menus can be recorded. These menus guide callers to the services
they require without the need for a human operator.
• Voice Labels:
A maximum of 20 Mailbox Groups can be created by the System Administrator. Each list can have a
voice label.
• System Prompts:
The Message Manager can change system prompts by recording new prompts and restoring them.
• Multilingual Selection Menu:
With this menu, callers can select the language they prefer for voice guidance. For example, the Message
Manager can record a menu that announces:
"For English, press 7."
"For French, press 8."
• The System Caller Names:
A maximum of 200 Caller ID numbers can be registered by the System Administrator. The Message
Manager is responsible for recording a name for each Caller ID number.
• On Hold Announcement Menu:
With this menu, callers in a queue can listen to the announcement or music while they are on hold.
• If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
Message Manager cannot record any messages. The system will announce, "Sorry, this
function is not available".
Operating Manual
275
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
To record menus and voice labels
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
4
to record messages.
3. Enter the desired number to record.
1
for Company Greetings.
2
for Company Name.
3
for Custom Service Menus.
4
for Voice Labels for Mailbox Groups.
5
for System Prompts.
6
for Multilingual Selection Menu.
7
for System Caller Names.
8
for On Hold Announcement Menu.
4. For the item selected in step 3, follow these steps:
a. For Company Greetings: Enter the Company Greeting Number (1–32).
b. For the Company Name: Go to step 5.
c. For Custom Service Menus: Enter a Custom Service Number (1–200).
• Enter
0
to record the Custom Service exit prompt.
d. For Voice Labels: Enter the number of the Mailbox Group to be labelled. (The System
Administrator assigns list numbers.)
e. For the Multilingual Selection Menu: Go to step 5.
f. For the On Hold Announcement Menu: Go to step 5.
5.
1
to change the message.
• If a message has not yet been recorded, go to step 7.
6.
1
to record a message.
2
to erase the current message, then go to step 3 or 4.
7.
1
to end recording.
8.
2
to accept.
9. Repeat steps 4–8 to record other Company Greetings, Custom Service Menus, and/or Voice Labels.
276
Operating Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
To record system prompts
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
4
to record messages.
5
3. Enter the system prompt number you want to change.
4. To change specific prompts, go to step 5.
To change all prompts one after another without reviewing the current recording, go to step 6.
5. To change specific prompts:
a.
1
b. Enter the prompt number you want to change (refer to "
List of Prompts for VM and AA
Service").
c. The system plays the prompt number and its prompt. If a prompt has not yet been recorded, the
system plays the system prompt. If a prompt is turned off, "The prompt is now turned off" will play
before the prompt.
d.
1
to record.
e.
1
to end recording.
f.
2
to accept.
g. Repeat steps 5b to 5f to record other prompts.
6. To change all prompts one after another.
a.
2
b. Enter the prompt number you want to change.
c.
1
to change.
d.
1
to end recording.
e.
2
to accept.
f. The system plays the next prompt number.
g. Repeat steps 6c to 6f to record other prompts.
• It is possible to restore the original system prompts. Consult your System Administrator
about this feature.
To record system caller names
Before recording System Caller Names, the associated telephone numbers must first be programmed using
Web Maintenance Console. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Operating Manual
277
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
4
3.
7
to modify system caller names.
4. Enter the Caller ID List Number (1–200).
• Guidance is "Caller Name Announcement number".
• Enter
5.
to go to step 3.
to change the name.
1
• If a name has not yet been recorded for this Caller ID number, go to step 6.
• Enter
2
to accept or
6.
1
to end recording.
7.
2
to accept.
3
to erase the current name, then go to step 4.
8. Repeat steps 4–7 to record names for other Caller ID List numbers.
Remote Call Forwarding Set
The Message Manager can program his or her extension from a remote location to forward various types of
calls to the desired extension or an outside telephone. There are 6 forwarding settings available:
• FWD All:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number.
• FWD Busy:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when the line is busy.
• FWD No Answer:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when there is no answer.
• FWD Busy or No Answer:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when the line is busy or there is no answer.
• FWD to Outside:
Forwards all incoming calls to telephone number 1 or 2 (preprogrammed in the Mailbox Setting), or to any
other telephone number.
• FWD Cancel:
Cancels the forwarding setting.
• This feature is not available when the Message Manager’s extension (assigned for Operator
1 in the Day Mode) is "default". In this case, it should be changed to the operator’s extension
number. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
• In order to use the FWD to Outside option, the ability to forward calls to trunks must be
enabled through system programming.
• Before setting Remote Call Forwarding to Outside, you should first store up to 2 destination
telephone numbers (refer to "
278
Operating Manual
Customising the Message Manager’s Mailbox").
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
To assign Remote Call Forwarding set
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
5
3. Select the desired forwarding setting.
1
for FWD All.
2
for FWD Busy.
3
for FWD No Answer.
4
for FWD Busy or No Answer.
5
for FWD to Outside, then go to step 6.
6
for FWD Cancel, then go to step 9.
4. Enter the extension number.
5.
2
to accept the extension number, then go to step 10.
• Enter
1
to change the extension number, then go to step 4.
6. Enter the desired number.
1
for telephone number 1, then go to step 8.
2
for telephone number 2, then go to step 8.
3
for another telephone number.
• Before you can forward your calls to telephone number 1 or 2, you should first store the telephone
numbers you plan on using with this feature.
7. Enter the telephone number (
0
–
9
,
). (max. 32 digits)
• Make sure you begin the telephone number with an outside line access number (to seize an
outside line).
8.
2
to accept, then go to step 10.
• Enter
9.
2
1
to change the telephone number, then go to step 6.
to accept.
10. The new settings are transmitted to the system. If the setting has been completed properly, you will
hear: "Call forwarding accepted" or "Call forwarding is cancelled" as appropriate.
• If the system announces, "Call forwarding not accepted. Please check the destination
number.", the forwarding setting has not been completed properly, possibly because a
nonexistent extension number has been entered as the destination. For more information,
consult your System Administrator.
Setting the Timed Reminder
The Message Manager can set or cancel the Timed Reminder. The telephone will ring at the set time
according to the set mode (Once/Daily).
Operating Manual
279
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
• This feature is not available for PSs.
• This feature is not available when the Message Manager’s extension (assigned for Operator
1 in the Day Mode) is "default". In this case, it should be changed to the operator’s extension
number. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
To set/cancel
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
6
3. Enter the desired number.
1
to change the setting.
2
to accept, then go on-hook to finish.
3
to cancel (turn off), then go on-hook to finish.
4. Enter the desired time, then
#
.
5. Enter the desired number.*
1
for AM.
2
for PM.
6. Enter the desired number.
7.
1
to set once.
2
to set daily.
2
to accept.
• * This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24-hour time.
The time format (12 or 24 hour) is determined by the "Position of "AM/PM" in Time Stamp"
setting. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Day/Night Recording Menu
A Day and Night Menu can be recorded as "Custom Service 1–2" directly from the top menu.
To record
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
7
for Custom Service 1 Menu (Day).
8
for Custom Service 2 Menu (Night).
3.
1
to change the message.
4.
1
to record a message.
5. Record the message.
280
6.
1
to end recording.
7.
2
to accept.
Operating Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
• This feature is not available when the "Quick Menu and Greeting Recording" setting is
disabled for the Message Manager’s mailbox. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
• Direct Service Access
If Direct Service Access is set in Mailbox Settings, you can access this feature directly by
dialling a specific Unified Messaging extension number from your extension. Automatic login
must be enabled to use Direct Service Access (refer to "Automatic log-in"). For details about
these Unified Messaging extension numbers, consult your System Administrator.
Recording an Emergency Greeting
An emergency greeting can be recorded as "Company Greeting 1" directly from the top menu. The
emergency greeting can be used in times such as when the company must be closed due to bad weather.
To record
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
9
3.
1
to change the message.
4.
1
to record a message.
5. Record the greeting.
6.
1
to end recording.
7.
2
to accept.
• This feature is not available when the "Quick Menu and Greeting Recording" setting is
disabled for the Message Manager’s mailbox. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
• Direct Service Access
If Direct Service Access is set in Mailbox Settings, you can access this feature directly by
dialling a specific Unified Messaging extension number from your extension. Automatic login
must be enabled to use Direct Service Access (refer to "Automatic log-in"). For details about
these Unified Messaging extension numbers, consult your System Administrator.
List of Prompts for VM and AA Service
There are over 1000 system prompts in the Unified Messaging system. These prompts can be customised
by re-recording them to change their content, or can be recorded in various languages. The maximum
length of a prompt is fixed at 6 minutes.
When recording prompts in other languages, most often it is not necessary to record all prompts contained
in the Unified Messaging system; recording over 1000 system prompts is a big undertaking. When a caller is
connected to AA service or VM service, most likely he or she will only hear a small selection of the following
prompts. Therefore, it is necessary only to record (or modify) the prompts that callers will hear.
Please change prompts to suit the application. For example, prompt no. 1211 could be re-recorded to
announce, "Thank you for calling ABCD Travel", instead of "Welcome to the Unified Messaging System".
It is possible to record the prompts you wish to modify on your computer in .wav format and upload them to
the Unified Messaging system. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Operating Manual
281
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
Prompts Common to VM and AA Services
Prompt No.
Modifiable Prompts
363
Good afternoon
364
Good evening
365
Good morning
1211
Welcome to the Unified Messaging System
973
To enter by name, press the hash sign and 1
974
To enter by name, press the pound sign and 1
221
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the person’s last name
326
For 'Q', press 7
327
For 'Z', press 9
693
Sorry, there are no more matching names
701
Sorry, this name cannot be found
392
Incorrect entry
842
To call the operator, press 0
90
Calling the operator
599
Please wait a moment
1201
Welcome to the general delivery mailbox
596
Please leave a message at the tone
966
To end recording, hang up or press 1 for more features
1026
To pause and restart recording, press 2
1060
To review, press 1
818
To accept, press 2
979
To erase and try again, press 3
829
To add, press 4
978
To erase and exit, press
1018
To make this message private, press 1
558
Otherwise, press 2
733
Thank you for calling
VM Prompts
Prompt No.
282
Modifiable Prompts
593
Please enter your party’s mailbox number
219
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the person’s first name
220
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the person’s first or last name
1019
To make this message urgent, press 1
Operating Manual
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
AA Prompts
Prompt No.
Modifiable Prompts
592
Please enter your party’s extension
1224
You have a call
690
Sorry, no one is available to answer the call
1006
To leave a message, press 1
971
To enter another extension, press
698
Sorry, this line is busy
388
If you would like to hold, press 1
847
To cancel holding, press 2 now. Otherwise, I’ll try your party again.
Operating Manual
283
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
284
Operating Manual
Section 3
Customising Your Phone & System
This section shows you how to customise your
individual telephone or PBX according to your needs.
Find the desired setting and program as necessary.
Operating Manual
285
3.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming)
3.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal
Programming)
3.1.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming)
You can customise your telephone features. For example, you can change the initial settings or button
features according to your needs.
–
Assigning an Extension PIN to Your Extension (Extension PIN [Personal Identification Number])
• If you change your desk and extension, refer to "1.13.1 Walking Extension".
Assigning an Extension PIN to Your Extension (Extension PIN [Personal
Identification Number])
You can assign a password to each extension.
The following features require an extension PIN.
1.
Screening calls (Live Call Screening [LCS])
2.
Prohibiting other people from seeing your personal speed dialling directory, call log, SVM log, and from
playing back the voice messages in your message box (Display Lock)
3.
Using the same settings as your extension at other extensions (Walking Extension)
4.
Remote Control Operation (Walking COS)
5.
Extension Dial Lock Clear
To set
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Off-hook.
#
Enter #.
286
Operating Manual
PIN: Personal Identification Number
7
9
Enter
799.
same
extension PIN
Enter same extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
extension PIN
1
9
Enter 1.
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
#
C.Tone
Enter #.
On-hook.
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
To cancel
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
7
Off-hook.
Enter
PIN: Personal Identification Number
9
0
9
799.
Enter 0.
stored
extension PIN
C.Tone
Enter stored
extension PIN.
On-hook.
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers your
password (extension PIN).
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a.
Keeping your PIN secret.
b.
Selecting a complex, random PIN that cannot be easily guessed.
c.
Changing your PIN regularly.
• Valid numbers for an extension PIN are "0" through "9".
• If the wrong extension PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times, the PIN is locked.
• If you forget your extension PIN or your extension PIN is locked, your manager can clear the
extension PIN and extension PIN lock.
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
You can programme features using the programming mode for a PT or PS.
–
Setting Features
–
Clearing Features
• To exit at any time, lift the handset.
• To enter the programming mode when using a PS, refer to the documentation for your PS.
• For KX-UT series SIP phone users: You cannot programme the following features using a
KX-UT series SIP phone. These features are programmed via Web Maintenance Console.
For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Setting Features
The default settings are shown in bold letters. For later reference, place a check mark in the boxes below to
indicate your customised setting.
Notice
The default value may vary depending on country/area.
Operating Manual
287
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
To enter the programming mode
To programme
To exit
PROG.
PROG.
OR
programming
input
selection &
parameter
OR
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
Item
PAUSE
Follow
programming
input.
0
Display Contrast
Selection*1
Preferred display contrast
level from the 4 levels
available
Display Switching Mode
Would you like the call
duration to be shown
automatically on the display
when answering an outside
call?
288
Operating Manual
Press ENTER
or STORE.
Follow Selection Press ENTER Press PROGRAM
& Parameter.
or PAUSE.
or STORE.
Programming
Input
Your extension information
Display Language
Selection
Which display language do
you prefer?
OR
0
0
0
The display shows your PT or PS’s extension
number.
<Example>
Ext 101
1
Light
2
Little Light
3
Little Dark
4
Dark
1
English
2
2nd Language
3
3rd Language
4
4th Language
5
5th Language
1
2
0
Selection & Parameter
0
No—Manual (The display
keeps showing all of the
outside caller’s information
unless you change it to the call
duration manually.)
1
Yes—Automatic (The first
line of the display will
change to the call duration
automatically when you
answer an outside call.)
3
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Item
Display Backlight
Selection*1*2
Would you like to turn on the
display backlight of the
telephone?
Self Labelling Display
Contrast
Preferred display contrast
level from the 4 levels
available for Self Labelling
(KX-NT366/KX-NT553/
KX-NT556 only)
Hot Line
Would you like to dial a
preset number simply by
going off-hook?
Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
Should you prevent your
number being displayed on
the called party’s telephone?
Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP)
Which number should be
displayed on the called and
calling party’s telephone?
Programming
Input
0
0
1
1
1
1
4
Selection & Parameter
0
Yes—Automatic
1
Yes—always On
2
No—always Off
1
Light
2
Little Light
3
Little Dark
4
Dark
5
1
desired no. (max. 32 digits)
Available characters: 0–9, , #, P (Pause)
0
Do not use
1
Use
2
0
No—Allows your number
to be displayed
1
Yes—Prevent your number
being displayed
0
Caller ID assigned to your
extension
1
Caller ID assigned on the
outside line being used
3
4
Operating Manual
289
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Item
Preferred Line Assignment
—Outgoing
Which do you prefer to seize
when you go off-hook to
make calls?
Programming
Input
1
9
Selection & Parameter
0
No line
1
An idle outside line
2 +
The CO line no.
assigned to the
flexible button
or
(CO)
3
or
(PDN)
The longest ringing line
(when multiple calls arrive)
1
2
0
Intercom (On a PDN
extension, an idle PDN button
is selected when going offhook.)
No line
0
Preferred Line Assignment
—Incoming
Which line do you prefer to
answer when you go offhook?
A CO/ICD Group button
2 +
The CO line no.
assigned to the
flexible button
or
A CO/ICD Group button
(CO)
3
(PDN)
0
Alternate Receiving—Ring/
Voice*1
How do you prefer to receive
an intercom call?
Parallelled Telephone*1*3
Should the single line
telephone in parallel ring?
290
Operating Manual
2
2
A PDN button
Ringing (Tone Call)
1
Directly—The party’s voice
is heard without ringing.
2
Ring only—Prohibiting the
caller switching to the voice
mode.
0
No—The telephone will not
ring.
1
Yes—The telephone will
ring.
1
2
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Item
Forced Answerback
Selection*1
Do you prefer to answer a
call without going off-hook
regardless of the AUTO ANS
button status?
Live Call Screening Mode
Set*1
Which service do you prefer
when a calling party is
recording a message in your
mailbox?
LCS Mode Set (After
Answering)
Would you like to keep
recording after answering the
call in the LCS mode?
Automatic Call Waiting*4
Would you prefer to
automatically hear a call
waiting tone when you
receive a call while already
on the phone?
Manual Call Waiting
How would you prefer to
receive call waiting
notifications for intercom
calls?
Call Waiting Tone Type
Selection
Which type of call waiting
tone do you prefer?
Absent Message
Would you like to show a
message on the caller’s
telephone display?
Programming
Input
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
Selection & Parameter
0
No—Disable
1
Yes—Enable
3
0
You can monitor the
message through the telephone
speaker. (Hands-free mode)
1
Only an alarm tone is
heard. (Private mode)
0
No—Stop recording
1
Yes—Keep recording
0
No—Off
1
Yes—On
0
No call (Off)
1
Tone (BSS)
5
6
0
1
2
Voice announcement
through the built-in speaker
(OHCA)*5
3
Voice announcement
through the handset (Whisper
OHCA)*6
0
Tone 1
1
Tone 2
0
No—Off
2
0
message no. (1–
8)
9
Personal Absent Message
Creating your personal
message
4
1
Yes—Shows the selected
message.
Yes—Shows your personal
message.
message (max. 16 characters)
Operating Manual
291
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Item
Programming
Input
5
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND)
To forward or refuse some or
all of your incoming calls
0
Selection & Parameter
0
Off
1
Do Not Disturb (DND)
+ desired
no.
(max. 32 digits)
All—Forward all calls
+ desired
no.
(max. 32 digits)
Busy—Forwarded when
your extension is busy.
+ desired
no.
(max. 32 digits)
No Answer—Forwarded
when you do not answer.
+ desired
no.
(max. 32 digits)
Busy/No Answer—
Forwarded when you do not
answer or when your extension
is busy.
2
/
(for both calls)
3
5
1
(for outside calls)
5
2
(for intercom
calls)
4
5
FWD N/A Timer
To set the timer for "No
Answer" and "Busy/No
Answer"
292
5
Call Pickup Deny
Should you prohibit other
people from picking up your
calls?
6
Headset Operation*1*3
Do you use the headset?
6
Executive Busy Override
Deny
Do you prohibit other people
from joining your
conversation?
6
Paging Deny*1
Would you like to prohibit
paging announcements?
6
Key Pad Tone Set*1
Do you prefer to hear the key
pad tone?
6
Operating Manual
(0–120) seconds
(Default: 15 seconds)
3
0
No—Allow
1
Yes—Deny
0
No—Headset off
1
Yes—Headset on
0
No—Allow
1
Yes—Deny
0
No—Allow
1
Yes—Deny
0
No—Off
1
Yes—On
0
1
2
3
4
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Item
Programming
Input
Selection & Parameter
Background Music (BGM)*1
Do you want background
music through your
telephone speaker while onhook?
6
Bluetooth Registration*7
To register a Bluetooth
wireless headset on your
extension*8
6
6
Pass key (max. 16 digits)
Bluetooth Removal*7
To cancel the registration of a
Bluetooth wireless headset
on your extension*8
6
7
Confirm that the ID of your Bluetooth wireless
headset is displayed.
Extension PIN (Personal
Identification Number)
To set your extension PIN or
change the stored extension
PIN
Extension Dial Lock
To prevent other people from
using your telephone
Display Lock*1
To prevent other people from
seeing your personal speed
dialling directory, call log,
SVM log, and from playing
back the voice messages in
your message box
No—Off
0
9
5
0
1
+ BGM no.
(1 digit)
extension PIN
(max. 10 digits) +
ENTER/STORE +
same extension
PIN
To set an extension PIN
stored extension
PIN +
new extension
PIN
(max. 10 digits) +
ENTER/STORE +
same extension
PIN
To change the stored extension
PIN
extension PIN
(max. 10 digits)
+
9
1
extension PIN
(max. 10 digits)
+
2
To unlock
0
extension PIN
(max. 10 digits)
+
1
9
Yes—On
To lock
To unlock
0
extension PIN
(max. 10 digits) +
To lock
1
Operating Manual
293
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Programming
Input
Item
One-touch Dialling
Assignment Mode
Selection
Do you prefer to set the Onetouch dialling only?
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
Selection & Parameter
0
No—Normal (Any Flexible
buttons can be modified.)
1
Yes—Only One-touch
dialling buttons can be
modified. However, to modify
them, there is no need to enter
"2" before the number.
#
Not available for a PS.
Only available for KX-T7633/KX-T7636/IP-PTs (except KX-NT265/KX-NT321)/KX-DT343/KX-DT346/KX-DT543/KX-DT546
telephones.
Not available for the KX-T7665.
This setting applies to both outside and intercom calls. For intercom calls, this feature must be enabled through system
programming.
Only available for certain digital proprietary telephones.
Only available for IP-PTs and certain digital proprietary telephones.
Only available for KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT560/KX-DT343/KX-DT346 telephones.
Registering and cancelling a Bluetooth wireless headset may take time. Please avoid any interruption during that time by, for
example, going off-hook.
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers your
password (extension PIN).
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a.
Keeping your PIN secret.
b.
Selecting a complex, random PIN that cannot be easily guessed.
c.
Changing your PIN regularly.
• After the programme number is entered, the programme title is displayed.
The programming screen can be changed with the Navigator Key (Up or Down).
• You can select the parameter with the Navigator Key (Up or Down) instead of entering a
number.
294
Operating Manual
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
To store the names and numbers in personal speed dialling
PROG.
1
0
personal speed
dialling no.
OR
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
phone no.
Enter phone number
(max. 32 digits).
Enter personal speed
dialling number (2 digits).
Enter 10 and then press ENTER.
Or press STORE.
OR
Press ENTER
or STORE.
name
Enter name*
(max. 20 characters).
OR
Press ENTER
or STORE.
PROG.
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
• * To enter characters, refer to "
Entering Characters".
Operating Manual
295
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
To edit the names and numbers of personal speed dialling
PROG.
1
0
personal speed
dialling no.
OR
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
Enter 10 and then press ENTER.
Or press STORE.
Enter personal speed
dialling number (2 digits).
To erase a number or character
CLEAR
Press Left or Right
to select a desired part.
Press "CLEAR".
OR
To insert a number or character
Press ENTER
or STORE.
number/character
Press Left or Right
to select a desired part.
Enter a number or
character.
It will be inserted in front
of the selected part.
Clearing Features
You can clear or change to features as follows:
Features
296
Default Setting
Display Switching Mode
Automatic
Hot Line
Off
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
Allow
Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Caller ID assigned on your
extension
Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing
Intercom
Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming
The longest ringing line
Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
Ringing (Tone Call)
Parallelled Telephone
Paired SLT will ring
Forced Answerback Selection
Disable
Live Call Screening Mode Set
Hands-free mode
LCS Mode Set (After Answering)
Stop recording
Operating Manual
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Features
Default Setting
Automatic Call Waiting
Off
Manual Call Waiting—Intercom Calls
Off (No call/No tone)
Call Waiting Tone Type Selection
Tone 1
Absent Message
Off
Personal Absent Message
Cleared
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—Intercom/Outside
Calls
Off
FWD N/A Timer
15 seconds
Call Pickup Deny
Allow
Headset Operation
Headset off
Executive Busy Override Deny
Allow
Paging Deny
Allow
Key Pad Tone Set
On
Background Music (BGM)
Off
Data Line Security
Off
Connected Line Identification Restriction [COLR]
Allow
Log-in/Log-out
Log-in
Message Waiting
Off
Timed Reminder
Cleared
To change the above features back to their default settings
PROG.
PROG.
OR
OR
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
OR
PAUSE
Enter ##.
Press ENTER
or STORE.
Press ENTER
or STORE.
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
• If you do not desire that the Call Waiting, FWD/DND or Hot Line to be cleared by this feature,
please ask your dealer.
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
You can customise the flexible buttons and/or programmable feature (PF) buttons on PTs, Add-on Key
Modules, and PSs. They can then be used to make or receive outside calls or as feature buttons.
Operating Manual
297
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
• To enter programming mode when using a PS, refer to the documentation for your PS.
• The buttons in the table below can only be set on certain flexible buttons, as follows:
– Flexible buttons on PTs/Add-on Key Modules/PSs: all buttons can be set.
– Flexible buttons on DSS Consoles: all buttons except CTI and Primary Directory Number
(PDN) buttons can be set.
– Programmable feature (PF) buttons: only the One-touch Dialling button can be set.
• For KX-UT series SIP phone users: You cannot customise the flexible buttons with the
following method from your phone. You can customise the flexible buttons using Web
Maintenance Console. For details, refer to "Customising the Flexible Buttons".
To enter the programming mode
To programme
To exit
To continue
PROG.
PROG.
programming
input
OR
OR
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
PAUSE
Follow
programming input.
Press desired
flexible button.
Button
Press ENTER
or STORE.
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
Programming Input
Loop-CO (L-CO)
Group-CO (G-CO)
#
+ Outside line group no. (2 digits)
Single-CO (S-CO)
0
+ Outside line no. (3 digits)
Direct Station Selection
(DSS)
1
+ Extension no.*12
One-touch Dialling*1
2
Incoming Call Distribution
Group (ICD Group)
Message
+ Desired no. (max. 32 digits)
3
0 + Incoming call distribution group extension no. (+
+ delayed ringing time [0–7])*3
4
0
4
no.
0
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND)—Both
calls
4
1
FWD/DND—Outside calls
4
2
FWD/DND—Intercom calls
4
3
Group FWD—Both calls
4
4
Message for Another
Extension
298
*2
Operating Manual
#
+ Extension no./Incoming call distribution group extension
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Button
Programming Input
Group FWD—Outside calls
4
5
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
Group FWD—Intercom calls
4
6
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
Account
4
8
Conference
4
9
Terminate
5
0
External Feature Access
(EFA)
5
1
Call Charge Reference
5
2
Call Park
5
3
Call Park (Automatic Park
Zone)
5
3
Call Log*4
5
4
Call Log for ICD Group*4
5
4
Log-in/Log-out
5
5
Log-in/Log-out of a specified
group
5
5
Log-in/Log-out for all groups
5
5
Hurry-up
5
6
Wrap-up
5
7
System Alarm*4
5
8
Time Service (Day/Night/
Lunch/Break)
5
9
Answer*4
6
0
Release*4
6
1
Toll Restriction/Call Barring
6
2
+ Toll Restriction/Call Barring Level (1–7)
ISDN Service*6
6
3
+ Desired no. (max. 32 digits)
Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
6
4
Connected Line Identification
Restriction (COLR)
6
5
ISDN-Hold
6
6
+ Parking zone no. (2 digits)
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
+ 0/1/2/3*5 (+
#
+ Tenant no.)
Operating Manual
299
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
Button
Headset*4*7
6
7
Time Service Switching
Mode (Automatic/Manual)
6
8
(+ Tenant no.)
Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)*8
6
9
+ Another PBX extension no.
CTI
7
0
Primary Directory Number
(PDN)
7
1
Secondary Directory Number
(SDN)
7
2
Check-in*4
8
0
Check-out*4
8
1
Cleaned-up*4
8
2
+ Extension no. +
#
+ delayed ringing time (0–7)*9
Two-way Record*10
9
0 + UM group’s floating extension no.*11/Voice mail floating
extension no.
Two-way Transfer*10
9
1 + UM group’s floating extension no.*11/Voice mail floating
extension no.
One-touch Two-way
Transfer*10
9
1 + UM group’s floating extension no.*11/Voice mail floating
extension no. + # + Extension no./Incoming call distribution group
extension no.
Live Call Screening (LCS)*10
Voice Mail Transfer*10
300
Programming Input
Operating Manual
9
2
9
4 + UM group’s floating extension no.*11/Voice mail floating
extension no.
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
• *1 " ", "#", FLASH/RECALL, PAUSE, Secret (INTERCOM) and TRANSFER can also be
stored.
If you do not want to display the stored number when making a call, press the Secret
(INTERCOM) button before and after the numbers you wish to conceal.
If you store an outside party’s number, you should first store a line access number.
If you need to enter an account code, you can enter the specified account code before the
line access number.
<Example>
SECRET
49
1234
Account code feature no. Account code
#
0/9
[ 123 4567 ]
Account code delimiter
Automatic line
access number
Phone number
• *2 For a PF button, "2" is not required to enter before the desired number.
• *3 Depending on the settings of your PBX, you may be required to enter delayed ringing time
(0: Immediate, 1: 1 ring, 2: 2 rings, 3: 3 rings, 4: 4 rings, 5: 5 rings, 6: 6 rings, 7: No ring). In
this case, you can automatically join a new ICD Group by creating a button for that group.
• *4 This button is not available for a PS.
• *5 0: Day/Night/Lunch/Break, 1: Day/Night/Break, 2: Day/Night/Lunch, 3: Day/Night
• *6 Availability of this button depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company.
Refer to "1.2.5 Accessing the ISDN Service (ISDN Service Access)".
• *7 This button is not available for the KX-T7665.
• *8 The button may not be available depending on the networking method in use or the
settings of the PBX.
• *9 It is possible to set delayed ringing for each SDN button.
• *10 This button is used for the integrated voice mail features.
• *11 The UM group’s default floating extension number is 500.
• To exit at any time, lift the handset.
• For KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560 users: After customising a flexible button,
you can set the displayed text for Self Labelling. To enter characters, refer to "
Characters".
Entering
• *12 You can set a Unified Messaging port extension number as an extension number for the
DSS button.
• You can select the parameter with the Navigator Key (Up or Down) instead of entering a
number.
Operating Manual
301
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
To specify the ringing tones for each CO, ICD Group, PDN, SDN, or INTERCOM
button (DPT/IP-PT only)
To continue
(CO)
OR
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
(ICD Group)
OR
OR
(PDN)
(PDN)
OR
OR
(SDN)
(SDN)
PROG.
Press
PROGRAM.
PROG.
tone type no.
R.Tone
OR
OR
INTERCOM
INTERCOM
Press CO, ICD Group,
PDN, SDN, or
INTERCOM.
OR
Enter tone type
number.*
Press ENTER or
STORE.
Press
PROGRAM.
Press CO, ICD Group,
PDN, SDN, or
INTERCOM.
• * Available tone types vary depending on the telephone you are using:
– KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT500 series/KX-DT300 series (except
KX-DT321)/KX-DT500 series/KX-T7600 series (except KX-T7665): Tone types "01" to
"30" (01–20: tone, 21–30: melody) are available.
– KX-NT265/KX-NT321/KX-DT321/KX-T7665: Only tone types "01" to "08" are available.
It is possible to enter a tone type number from "09" to "30", but you will hear tone type
"01".
– Other telephones: Only tone types "01" to "08" are available.
It is possible to enter a tone type number from "09" to "30", but you will hear tone type
"02".
• Only one ringing tone can be selected for all PDN buttons on your extension.
To clear the button
To continue
PROG.
PROG.
2
OR
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
302
Operating Manual
OR
PAUSE
Press desired
flexible button.
Enter 2.
Press ENTER or
STORE.
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
3.2 System Programming Using Web Maintenance Console
3.2 System Programming Using Web Maintenance
Console
3.2.1 User Programming
You can edit your personal information as well as limited extension and mailbox settings using Web
Maintenance Console. (You can view menus and setting items, but you can edit only a limited number of
items.)
In addition, you can download the UM IMAP Session Controller for Microsoft Outlook. For details, refer to
"
IMAP" in "1.8.6 Other Features".
–
Accessing Web Maintenance Console for the First Time
–
Logging in to Web Maintenance Console
–
Edit User Screen
–
Editing Settings in Web Maintenance Console
–
Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager
–
Logout
• The contents and design of the software are subject to change without notice.
Accessing Web Maintenance Console for the First Time
This step is required only when accessing Web Maintenance Console for the first time.
• For the IP address of the PBX, login name, and password, ask your System Administrator.
• If the configuration of the Web browser or PC changes, the certificate may need to be
installed again. Once a certificate has been installed, Web Maintenance Console will be
displayed after step 2.
1. Launch your Web browser and input the IP address of the PBX followed by the Web Maintenance
Console port number into the address bar, and then press Enter.
2. If you connect to Web Maintenance Console using TLS, a security alert window is displayed. Follow the
prompts to install a security certificate. The procedure may vary according to your browser.
Logging in to Web Maintenance Console
After establishing a connection to Web Maintenance Console, the login window is displayed, and a login
name and password must be entered.
Operating Manual
303
3.2.1 User Programming
• If you attempt to log in, but enter an incorrect password three times, you may not attempt to
log in again for a 5 minute period.
CAUTION
• For security, change the password the first time that you programme the PBX.
• It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers or characters be used for
maximum protection against unauthorised access.
• To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes
known to others, the PBX may be misused.
• Change the password periodically.
Edit User Screen
The Edit User screen is displayed when you login to Web Maintenance Console.
On this screen, you can edit various user settings.
To finish editing, click OK.
Editing Settings in Web Maintenance Console
Changing Your User Name and Displayed Language
You can change your account’s first name, last name, and displayed language in the User Information tab
of the Edit User screen. The information entered in First Name and Last Name are displayed on your
telephone.
304
Operating Manual
1.
In the User Information tab, edit your First Name
(max. 20 characters) and Last Name (max. 20
characters), and select the displayed language from
the Change Language drop-down list.
2.
Click OK.
3.2.1 User Programming
Changing Your Contact Information
You can change your extension PIN and contact information (home number, mobile number, fax number,
and e-mail address) in the Contact tab of the Edit User screen. E-mail address(es) specified in Email 1–3
in the Contact tab are used for e-mail notifications of missed outside calls.
1.
In the Contact tab, edit Extension PIN (max. 10
digits), Fax, Phone (Home), Phone (Mobile), and
Email 1–3.
Note
Click Edit to edit the extension PIN.
Entry for the extension PIN is hidden and
displayed as dots "·".
2.
Click OK.
Changing Your Mailbox Password
You can change your mailbox password in the Unified Message tab of the Edit User screen.
1.
In the Unified Message tab, click Edit for Mailbox
Password.
To change your message client password, click Edit
for Mailbox Password (Message Client).
2.
Enter a password in Enter new password, and then
re-enter it in Confirm new password.
Note
Entry for the password is hidden and displayed as
dots "·".
3.
Click OK.
Registering a Prompt to the Mailbox
You can display, play, record or delete the following prompts:
• Mailbox Owner Name (refer to "
• Personal Greetings (refer to "
Changing or Deleting Your Subscriber (Owner) Name")
Changing or Deleting Your Personal Greeting Messages")
– No Answer Greeting, Busy Signal Greeting, After Hours Greeting, Caller ID Greeting*1, Temporary
Greeting and Absent Message
• Interview Mailbox Questions*2 (refer to "
• Personal Caller ID Name*1 (refer to "
Interview Mailbox")
Personal Caller Name Announcement")
• Personal Distribution List Voice Label*2 (refer to "
*1
*2
Personal Group Distribution Lists")
This feature may be disabled depending on your COS settings.
This feature may be disabled depending on your system programming settings or mailbox settings.
Operating Manual
305
3.2.1 User Programming
1.
In the Unified Message tab, click Prompt
Registration.
2.
In the Prompt Registration box, select a tab for the
desired type of prompt.
To record a prompt
Select a Prompt No., and click Play/Record.
When "Record from extension" is selected:
a.
Specify the extension number of the telephone
used for recording, then click Connect.
b.
When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
c.
Click Record, Stop, or Play to record or play a
system prompt.
d. Click Disconnect.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
a.
Click Browse. The Open dialogue box appears.
b.
Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files
you wish to import.
c.
Select the desired WAV file.
d.
Click Open to import the file.
e.
Click OK.
To start and stop prompt playback
a.
Select the desired prompt.
b.
Click Play/Record.
c.
Click Play or Stop.
To delete a specific prompt
a.
Select the desired prompt.
b.
Click Delete.
c.
Click OK.
Customising your mailbox setting
You can change your mailbox setting in the Unified Message tab of the Edit User screen.
1.
306
Operating Manual
In the Unified Message tab, click Advanced setting.
3.2.1 User Programming
2.
The Mailbox Settings box appears.
The following items are editable.
Mailbox Parameters
Item
Mailbox Password
Description
Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox. If a default
password is programmed by an administrator, that password will be
assigned automatically when creating all mailboxes.
To change a password for a mailbox:
1. Click Edit.
2. In the window that appears, enter the new password (4–16 characters
in length) and then enter it again to confirm it.
3. Click OK
Mailbox Password
(Message Client)
Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox when using a client
software program. If a default password is programmed by an
administrator, that password will be assigned automatically when creating
all mailboxes.
To change a password for a mailbox:
1. Click Edit.
2. In the window that appears, enter the new password (4–16 characters
in length) and then enter it again to confirm it.
3. Click OK.
Covering Extension
Enter a desired extension number you want to assign for transferring to
your Covering Extension in the box (1–8 digits).
Interview Mailbox
Enter an interview mailbox number you want to assign for your mailbox in
the box (2–8 digits [the maximum number of digits may be less than 8,
depending on system programming]).
All Calls Transfer to
Mailbox
Select Yes or No.
If Yes is selected, calls are automatically forwarded to your mailbox.
Operating Manual
307
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Call Transfer Sequence
(Selection), Call Transfer
Sequence (Other)
Description
Specifies the Call Transfer Sequence used by the mailbox. Allows each
mailbox to be assigned its own Call Transfer Sequence (Personal Transfer
Sequence).
1. Select System or Other.
2. If "Other" is specified, enter a maximum of 16 characters consisting of
0–9,
, # and special codes:
• D: Disconnecting
• F: Flash (Recall)
• R: Ringback Tone Detection
• T: Dial Tone Detection
• ,: Dial Pause (default 1 s)
• ;: Dial Pause (default 3 s)
• X: Extension Dialling
• 0–9,
No Answer Time
(Selection), No Answer
Time (Other)
, #: Dial Code
Specifies the length of time that the Unified Messaging system waits
before handling unanswered calls to the extension.
1. Select System or Other.
2. If "Other" is selected, specify 10–60 s.
Call Transfer Status
Determines how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when it
reaches your extension.
1. Click Edit.
2. Select the setting from the following items.
• None: Rings your extension.
• Call blocking: Handles the call according to the Incomplete Call
Handling for No Answer setting for your extension. Your extension
will not ring.
• Call screening: The caller is prompted to record his or her name.
The Unified Messaging system then calls you and plays back the
caller name. You can choose whether to answer the call.
• Intercom Paging: Pages you by intercom.
• Transfer to Mailbox: Transfers the caller to the mailbox.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller
to the specified Custom Service.
• Transfer to specified telephone number 1–5: Transfers the caller
to one of the specified telephone numbers in numerical order of
priority.
3. Click OK to finish.
308
Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Incomplete Call Handling
for No Answer
Description
Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when there is
no answer.
1. Click Edit.
2. Select the setting from the following items.
More than one option can be selected.
• Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message.
• Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a
covering extension.
• Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages you by
intercom.
• Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
• Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to top menu and try
another extension.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller
to the specified Custom Service.
3. Click OK to finish.
Incomplete Call Handling
for Busy
Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when the
extension is busy.
1. Click Edit.
2. Select the setting from the following items.
More than one option can be selected.
• Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message.
• Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a
covering extension.
• Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages you by
intercom.
• Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
• Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to top menu and try
another extension.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller
to the specified Custom Service.
3. Click OK to finish.
Call Transfer Anytime in
Incomplete Handling
Menu
Specifies whether callers can input an extension number to transfer their
call while the Automated Attendant service is playing an Incomplete Call
Handling menu.
Advanced Call Transfer Setting
Item
Advanced Call Transfer
Setting
Description
By combining the settings for Call Transfer and Incomplete Call Handling,
you can create call handling "scenarios" for your extension. Up to 20
scenarios can be created, and a scenario can be assigned to each absent
message in Scenario Setting.
Operating Manual
309
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Description
1. Click Edit for creating scenarios.
2. Select a Scenario number (1–20) from the drop-down list.
3. Type the scenario name in the Scenario Name box.
4. Assign the following options in each section. Click OK when finished.
Call Transfer Status
Determines how the Unified Messaging system will handle a call in the
selected scenario.
Selection
Determines how the Unified Messaging system will handle a call in the
selected scenario.
Select the setting from the following items.
• None: Rings your extension.
• Call blocking: Handles the call according to the Incomplete Call
Handling for No Answer setting for your extension. Your extension
will not ring.
• Call screening: The caller is prompted to record his or her name.
The Unified Messaging system then calls you and plays back the
caller name. You can choose whether to answer the call.
• Leave a Message: Transfers the caller to the mailbox.
• Intercom Paging: Pages you by intercom.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller
to the specified Custom Service.
VIP Filter
If "Leave a Message" is selected for Selection and "Enable" is
selected for this setting, calls from certain phone numbers will be
transferred directly to your extension or specified telephone number.
• Telephone Number 1, 2, 3: Specifies the telephone numbers that
the VIP Filter setting will be applied to. When a call is received from
any of the numbers specified here, the call will be transferred
immediately to the destination specified in Transfer to (Selection).
• Transfer to (Selection): Specifies the transfer destination for calls
transferred according to the VIP Filter setting.
– Extension: The call is transferred to your extension.
– Other: The call is transferred to the telephone number that is
specified in Transfer to (Other).
Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu
Select a Custom Service from the drop-down menu if "Transfer to
specified Custom Service Menu" is selected for Selection.
310
Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Description
Transfer to specified telephone number - 1
If "None" or "Call screening" is selected for Selection, specifying a
telephone number here will transfer the caller to that telephone
number.
Enter a maximum of 32 characters consisting of 0–9, , and #.
Note
If "Call screening" is selected, the transfer destination will hear the
call screening prompt before the call is transferred.
Transfer to specified telephone number 2, 3, 4, 5 (Selection/Other)
If "None" or "Call screening" is selected for Selection, and the call
could not be transferred to the number specified in Transfer to
specified telephone number - 1, the call will be transferred according
to these settings for this scenario, in numerical order of priority.
Note
If "Call screening" is selected, the transfer destination will hear the
call screening prompt before the call is transferred.
1.
Select Other, Extension, or Covering Extension.
2.
If "Other" is specified, enter a maximum of 32 characters
consisting of 0–9, , and #.
Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer
Specifies how the scenario handles a call when there is no answer.
More than one option can be selected.
• Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message.
• Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering
extension.
• Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages you by
intercom.
• Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
• Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to top menu and try another
extension.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to
the specified Custom Service.
Operating Manual
311
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Description
Incomplete Call Handling for Busy
Specifies how the scenario handles a call when the destination is busy.
More than one option can be selected.
• Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message.
• Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering
extension.
• Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages you by
intercom.
• Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
• Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to top menu and try another
extension.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to
the specified Custom Service.
Scenario Setting
You can select scenarios set in Advanced Call Transfer Setting.
A scenario can be set temporarily, or scenarios can be selected for use
according to the Absent Message setting of your extension.
• Current Scenario: The scenario that is assigned to the absent
message currently set at your extension is displayed here.
• Temporary Scenario: Setting a scenario here will use that scenario
indefinitely. A scenario set here will be used regardless of your
extension status. Selecting "None" will remove the setting.
• Absent Message 1–9: The selected scenario will be used when the
corresponding Absent Message is set at your extension.
Notification Parameters
Item
Description
Message Waiting Lamp
If set to "Enable", the Message Waiting Lamp of your telephone turns on
when a new message is recorded.
Telephone Device—
Device No. 1, 2, 3
Specifies the Message Waiting Notification schedule for each device.
The following parameters can be specified for devices 1, 2, and 3.
Click Edit for the extension to change, set Device Notification for
Unreceived Message to "Yes", and set program the settings, then click
OK to finish.
Only Urgent Messages
Specifies if notifications will be sent only for messages designated as
urgent.
312
Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Description
Dial Number [0-9 * # T X , ;]
Assigns a telephone number to Device 1, 2, or 3. You can also specify the
number to be dialled by entering it from your telephone, allowing you to
set this feature on a case by case basis.
Enter a maximum of 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes:
• ,: Dial Pause (default 1 s)
• ;: Dial Pause (default 3 s)
• T: Dial Tone Detection
• X: Callback Number Entry Code
• 0–9,
, #: Dial Code
Note
If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of
outside telephone numbers.
No. of Retries
Specifies the number of times the Unified Messaging system will try to
send notification if the device is busy or if there is no answer.
Busy Delay Time (min)
Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified Messaging system waits before
retrying message notification when the called device is busy.
No Answer Delay Time (min)
Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified Messaging system waits before
retrying message notification when the called device does not answer.
Use Mode
Specifies if and how each device is used for message notification. You can
also specify the use mode from your telephone:
• Not use: The selected device is not used for message notification.
• Continuously: The device is called whenever a message is recorded in
the mailbox. If Only Urgent Messages is set to "Yes", the device is
called whenever an urgent message is recorded in the mailbox.
• Scheduled: The selected device is called only during the selected
times.
Time Frame: If Scheduled is selected here, follow the steps below to
specify the time frame:
1. Click a day (Sunday – Saturday) tab.
2. Click Enable Time Frame No. 1 or 2.
3. Enter the start and end times in the "Start At (HH:MM)" and "End At
(HH:MM)" fields.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each day to be programmed, and then Click
OK.
Telephone Device—
Device Notification Timer
—Device Start Delay Time
(0-120 min)
Specifies the length of time the system waits after a new message is
received before sending message waiting notification.
Operating Manual
313
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Description
Telephone Device—
Device Notification Timer
—Device Interval Time
between Device 1, 2, 3
and Next Device
Specifies how long the PBX waits after sending Message Waiting
Notification to Device 1, 2, or 3 before sending notification to the next
device.
E-mail/Text Message
Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3
You can be notified by e-mail when a new message is recorded in your
mailbox.
Click Edit for the extension to schedule, program the settings, and click
OK to finish.
Note
You can be notified by e-mail when an outside call is missed. For
details, refer to "Changing Your Contact Information" in "3.2.1 User
Programming".
User Name
Specifies the name of the user of the device.
E-mail Address
Specifies the e-mail address of the device.
Only Urgent Messages
Specifies if Message Waiting Notifications will be sent only for urgent
messages.
Title Order
Specifies the format of the title of the notification.
Title String
Specifies the text string to be included as part of the title of the notification.
Callback Number
Specifies the callback number to be included in the notification (max. 32
digits).
Send Wait Time [0-120 min]
Specifies the delay between the message being left and the sending of the
Message Waiting Notification.
Attach Voice File
Specifies whether to attach a voice file of the voice message to the
notification e-mail.
314
Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Description
Use Mode
Specifies if and how each device is used for message notification:
• Not use: The selected device is not used for message notification.
• Continuously: The device is called whenever a message is recorded in
the mailbox. If Only Urgent Messages is set to "Yes", the device is
called whenever an urgent message is recorded in the mailbox.
• Scheduled: The selected device is called only during the selected
times.
Time Frame: If Scheduled is selected here, follow the steps below to
specify the time frame:
1. Click a day (Sunday – Saturday) tab.
2. Click Enable Time Frame No. 1 or 2.
3. Enter the start and end times in the "Start At (HH:MM)" and "End At
(HH:MM)" fields.
4. To specify if sent voice message is deleted from the Unified Message
system after they are sent by e-mail, select "Yes" for Delete After
Send (Voice File) or Delete After Send (Fax File).
5. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each day to be programmed, and then Click
OK.
External Message Delivery
Item
Description
External Message
Delivery Active
If set to "Yes", you are able to utilise the External Message Delivery
feature.
External Message
Delivery Prompt Mode
When an external message is delivered, the receiver will be greeted by
the system in the specified language.
If set to "Primary", the default language will be used. If set to "Selective",
the receiver has a choice of prompts.
Auto Forwarding
Item
Description
Auto Forwarding Active
If set to "Yes", the Unified Messaging system automatically forwards
messages that have not been played for a specified length of time to
another mailbox.
Auto Forwarding Mailbox
Number
Specifies the mailbox to which the messages will be forwarded.
Note
A Mailbox Group number cannot be specified as a destination.
Auto Forwarding Delay
Time
Specifies the length of time in hours and minutes that the system waits
before forwarding unplayed messages.
The maximum delay time is 99 h, 59 min.
Note
The delay time must be shorter than the New Message Retention
Time, or else messages will be deleted before being forwarded.
Operating Manual
315
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Description
Auto Forwarding Mode
Specifies if forwarded messages are to be retained in the original mailbox.
When set to "Copy", copies of the messages are retained in the original
mailbox after forwarding. When set to "Move", messages are forwarded to
the receiving mailbox and are not retained in the original mailbox.
Auto Forwarding Mode Message Remains New
Specifies if the forwarded messages remain marked as new.
This setting is available only when Auto Forwarding Mode is set to
"Copy".
Auto Forwarding Expires
Specifies the date and time of day for when forwarding of messages will
expire.
Personal Custom Service
Item
Personal Custom Service
Description
Specifies the Personal Custom Service.
Note
• Make sure to add an outside line access number when you store an
outside telephone number.
• If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of
outside telephone numbers.
Follow the steps below to edit a Personal Custom Service.
1. Click Edit.
2. For each Key, specify an Assigned Operation.
3. For each Assigned Operation that is specified, specify a Value from
the following.
• Transfer to specified mailbox: Allow the caller to leave messages
in a specified mailbox.
• Transfer to specified extension: Transfers the caller to a specified
extension.
• Transfer to Voice Mail Service: Allows the caller to access Voice
Mail Service.
• Transfer to Automated Attendant Service: Allows the caller to
access Automated Attendant Service.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller
to the Custom Service specified here.
• Transfer to operator: Connects the caller to an operator.
• Transfer to outside (specified number): Transfers the caller to a
specified outside telephone number. Enter the Outside Numbers list
index (1-4).
• Page the party: Pages you.
• Repeat greeting: Repeats the greeting.
• None: No operation assigned.
4. Click OK when finished.
316
Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Outside Numbers
Description
Specifies the outside telephone numbers that can be used for the
"Transfer to outside (specified number)" operation in the Personal
Custom Service settings.
1. Click Edit.
2. Enter Outside Number #1–#4: Max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9,
, #,
and special codes:
• T: Dial Tone Detection
• ,: Dial Pause (default 1 s)
• ;: Dial Pause (default 3 s)
• 0–9,
, #: Dial Code
3. Click OK when finished.
No DTMF Input Operation
Specifies the operation taken when no DTMF input (a caller does not dial
anything) is received after the Personal Greeting:
• Recording: The caller will be guided to leave a message.
• Disconnect (All Day): The line will be disconnected, regardless of the
time of day.
• Disconnect (Only After Hours): The line will be disconnected only
after hours.
No DTMF Input Operation
Wait Time
Specifies the duration of time to wait for DTMF input before the action set
in No DTMF Input Operation is performed (0–10 s).
Personal Distribution List
Item
List 1–4 Members
Description
Personal Distribution Lists are used to send the same messages to
several mailboxes in a single operation. A maximum of 4 lists can be
maintained with each list containing a maximum of 40 mailboxes.
Specifies the mailbox numbers that belong to the list.
Follow the steps below to edit list members.
1. Click Edit for a Personal Distribution List (1–4) Members item.
2. Under Subscribers To Add, click the checkbox in No. for each
mailbox to add, referring to the mailbox numbers and mailbox owners’
names.
3. Click Add.
4. Click OK.
Follow the steps below to remove members from a list.
1. Click Edit for Personal Distribution Lists (1–4) Members item.
2. Under Distribution, click the checkbox in No. for each mailbox to add,
referring to the mailbox numbers and mailbox owners’ names.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK.
Operating Manual
317
3.2.1 User Programming
Remote Call
Item
Remote Call Telephone
Number 1, 2 [0–9, *]
Description
Specifies the telephone numbers of destinations to which callers are
forwarded when you set Remote Call Forwarding. 2 telephone numbers
can be specified per mailbox.
Make sure you begin the telephone number with an outside line access
number (to seize an outside line).
Note
This feature may be disabled by system programming for your
mailbox.
Automatic Login
item
Description
Auto Login Extension
When this item is set to "Enable", you are able to access your mailbox
directly without entering the mailbox number. You can automatically log in
from your extensions, by calling from an outside telephone whose number
is stored as a Caller ID number, or by dialling a telephone number
assigned to a specified DID number or trunk. When logging in from
outside telephones, the Toll Saver feature is also available.
Auto Login Extension
Password Entry
Requirement
Specifies if a password is required for the Automatic Login Extension
feature.
Notice
If this is set to "No", ensure that unauthorised third-parties are not
allowed access to that mailbox.
Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2
Specifies the telephone number from which you can automatically be
logged in from. When Caller ID information is received that matches one
of these numbers, the caller (you) is automatically logged in to the
mailbox. Note that this telephone number must be unique for each
mailbox.
Auto Login Caller ID
Password Entry
Requirement
Specifies if a password is required for entry when automatic login is
performed using the Caller ID of the number set in Auto Login Caller ID 1
or Auto Login Caller ID 2.
Notice
If this is set to "No", ensure that unauthorised third-parties are not
allowed access to that mailbox using the number assigned to Auto
Login Caller ID 1 or Auto Login Caller ID 2.
318
Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
item
Auto Login Toll Saver
Description
Allows you to call the Unified Messaging system and know whether or not
new messages have been recorded in your mailbox by the number of
rings you hear before the Unified Messaging system answers your calls.
Toll Saver is available under the same conditions as Automatic Login; you
can use Toll Saver when calling from an outside telephone whose number
is stored as a Caller ID number, or by dialling a telephone number
assigned to a specified DID number or trunk:
• Disable: Disables the Toll Saver feature.
• DID: Toll Saver functions when the system receives the preprogrammed
DID number from the PBX.
• Caller ID: Toll Saver functions when Caller ID information is received
that matches one of the preprogrammed numbers (Caller ID 1 or 2).
• Trunk: Toll Saver functions when the system receives a call on the
preprogrammed trunk.
Direct Service
Item
Direct Service UM
Extension
Description
Specifies which features can be directly accessed by dialling a Unified
Messaging extension number:
• Record No Answer Greeting: You can record the greeting played
when there is no answer.
• Record Busy Greeting: You can record the greeting played when their
extension is busy.
• Record After Hours Greeting: You can record the greeting played
when the system is in night mode.
• Record Temporary Greeting: You can record a greeting that is used
exclusively until you disable it.
• Change Day Main Menu: Change the Day Main Menu greeting. Only
the Message Manager may make this change.
• Change Night Main Menu: Change the Night Main Menu greeting.
Only the Message Manager may make this change.
• Change Emergency Greeting: Change the Emergency Greeting. Only
the Message Manager may make this change.
Note
Automatic Login must be enabled for extensions to use this Direct
Service Access.
Announce Number of Messages
Item
Description
Subscriber Service - All
New Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new
messages in your mailbox when you log in.
Subscriber Service - All
Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of all messages in
your mailbox when you log in.
Operating Manual
319
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Description
Subscriber Service - New
Voice Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new voice
messages in your mailbox when you log in.
Subscriber Service - New
Urgent Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new
messages marked as urgent in your mailbox when you log in.
Receiving Message
Service - All New
Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new
messages in your mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages.
Receiving Message
Service - All Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number all messages in your
mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages.
Receiving Message
Service - New Voice
Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new voice
messages in your mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages.
Receiving Message
Service - New Urgent
Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new urgent
messages in your mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages.
Message Client
Item
Message Client Display
Language
Description
Specifies the language of information generated by the UM system for the
mail (IMAP) client.
Changing Forward/Do Not Disturb Setting
You can change your extension’s Forward/Do Not Disturb settings for outside and intercom calls in the
Telephony Feature tab of the Edit User screen.
1.
In the Telephony Feature tab, set Forward/Do Not
Disturb as follows:
• For Outside Calls:
To specify the forward type, select the desired type
from the For external calls drop-down list, then
enter the telephone number or select Phone
(Home)*1 or Phone (Mobile)*1 to specify the forward
destination.
• For Intercom Calls:
To specify the forward type, select the desired type
from the For internal calls drop-down list, then
enter the telephone number or select Phone
(Home) *1 or Phone (Mobile)*1 to specify the forward
destination.
These phone numbers are set in the Contact tab of the
Edit User screen.
*1
Note
To apply settings to both outside and intercom
calls, click For both internal calls and external
calls.
When you select this, the setting of For external
calls is applied to both outside and intercom calls.
320
Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
2.
Click OK.
Storing names and numbers in personal speed dialling
You can set frequently dialled numbers using two-digit speed dialling numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100
Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed at your extension for your personal use.
1.
In the Telephony Feature tab, click Speed Dialling
View/Edit.
2.
The available speed dialling numbers are shown in
sets of 20. Select the desired set from Index.
3.
Enter the name of the Personal Speed Dialling number
to call in Speed Dialling - Personal Name (max. 20
characters).
4.
Enter the number to be dialled by the Personal Speed
Dialling number in Speed Dialling - Personal Number
(max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , #, T [Transfer], [ ]
[Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]).
5.
Click OK.
Customising the Flexible Buttons
You can customise the flexible buttons on PTs, Add-on Key Modules, PSs, and KX-UT133/KX-UT136/
KX-UT248/KX-UT670 SIP phones. They can then be used to make or receive outside calls or as feature
buttons.
Button
1.
In the Telephony Feature tab, click Flexible Button
View/Edit.
2.
To set the flexible buttons, specify each button on the
Flexible Button screen.
Follow the table below to set each parameter. When
you finish, click OK.
Steps
Loop-CO (L-CO)
Select Loop CO from Type.
To specify the ring tone, select the ring tone type from Optional Parameter
(Ringing Tone Type Number).
Group-CO (G-CO)
Select Group CO from Type.
Then specify the outside line group number in Parameter Selection.
To specify the ring tone, select the ring tone type from Optional Parameter
(Ringing Tone Type Number).
Single-CO (S-CO)
Select Single CO from Type.
Then specify the outside line number in Parameter Selection.
To specify the ring tone, select the ring tone type from Optional Parameter
(Ringing Tone Type Number).
Direct Station Selection
(DSS)
Select DSS from Type.
Then enter the extension number in Extension Number.
Operating Manual
321
3.2.1 User Programming
Button
Steps
Select One-touch from Type.
Then enter the desired number in Dial (max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9,
#, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]).
,
Note
• If you store an outside party’s number, you should first store a line
access number.
If you need to enter an account code, you can enter the specified
account code before the line access number.
One-touch Dialling
<Example>
SECRET
49
1234
#
0/9
[ 123 4567 ]
Account code
feature no.
Account
code
Account code
delimiter
Automatic line
access number
Phone number
• For KX-UT series SIP phone users:
Use only 0–9, , and # for One-touch Dialling buttons. If characters
other than these are stored, they will be considered invalid. Only the
digits up to an invalid character will be sent when using that Onetouch Dialling button.
322
Incoming Call Distribution
Group (ICD Group)
Select ICD Group from Type.
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
To specify the ring tone, select the ring tone type from Optional Parameter
(Ringing Tone Type Number).
Message
Select Message Waiting from Type.
Message for Another
Extension
Select Message Waiting from Type.
Then enter the extension number or incoming call distribution group
extension number in Extension Number.
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND)—Both
calls
Select FWD/DND (Both) from Type.
FWD/DND—Outside calls
Select FWD/DND (External) from Type.
FWD/DND—Intercom calls
Select FWD/DND (Internal) from Type.
Group FWD—Both calls
Select Group Fwd (Both) from Type.
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
Group FWD—Outside calls
Select Group Fwd (External) from Type.
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
Group FWD—Intercom
calls
Select Group Fwd (Internal) from Type.
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
Account
Select Account from Type.
Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Button
Steps
Conference
Select Conference from Type.
Terminate
Select Terminate from Type.
External Feature Access
(EFA)
Select EFA from Type.
Call Charge Reference
Select Charge from Type.
Call Park
Select Call Park from Type.
Then select Specific from Parameter Selection.
Specify the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in Optional
Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number).
Call Park (Automatic Park
Zone)
Select Call Park from Type.
Then select Automatic from Parameter Selection.
Call Log
Select Call Log from Type.
Call Log for ICD Group
Select Call Log from Type.
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
Log-in/Log-out
Select Log-in/Log-out from Type.
Then select None from Parameter Selection.
Log-in/Log-out of a
specified group
Select Log-in/Log-out from Type.
Then select Incoming Group from Parameter Selection.
And, enter the Incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
Log-in/Log-out for all
groups
Select Log-in/Log-out from Type.
Then select All from Parameter Selection.
Hurry-up
Select Hurry-up from Type.
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
Wrap-up
Select Wrap-up from Type.
System Alarm
Select System Alarm from Type.
Time Service (Day/Night/
Lunch/Break)
Select Time Service from Type.
Then in Parameter Selection, select which time modes will be switched
manually.
In Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number), select the Time
Table (tenant number) to be used for changing time modes in Automatic
Switching mode.
Answer
Select Answer from Type.
Release
Select Release from Type.
Toll Restriction/Call Barring
Select TRS Level Change from Type.
Then select the Toll Restriction/Call Barring Level (1–7) from Parameter
Selection.
Operating Manual
323
3.2.1 User Programming
Button
Steps
Select ISDN Service from Type.
Then enter the desired number in Dial (max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9,
#, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]).
ISDN Service
,
Note
Availability of this button depends on the ISDN service of your
telephone company.
Refer to "1.2.5 Accessing the ISDN Service (ISDN Service Access)".
Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
Select CLIR from Type.
Connected Line
Identification Restriction
(COLR)
Select COLR from Type.
ISDN-Hold
Select ISDN Hold from Type.
Headset
Select Headset from Type.
Time Service Switching
Mode (Automatic/Manual)
Select Time Service - Automatic/Manual from Type.
Then in Parameter Selection, select the Time Table (tenant number) to be
used when Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.
Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)
Select NDSS from Type.
Then enter the another PBX extension number in Dial (max. 16 digits
consisting of 0–9).
Note
The button may not be available depending on the networking method
in use or the settings of the PBX.
324
CTI
Select CTI from Type.
Primary Directory Number
(PDN)
Select PDN from Type.
Secondary Directory
Number (SDN)
Select SDN from Type.
Then enter the extension number in Extension Number.
In Parameter Selection, specify the delayed ringing setting for calls
arriving at an SDN button.
To specify the ring tone, select the ring tone type from Optional Parameter
(Ringing Tone Type Number).
Check-in
Select Check In from Type.
Check-out
Select Check Out from Type.
Cleaned-up
Select Cleaned Up from Type.
Two-way Record
Select Two-way Record from Type.
Then enter the UM group’s or the voice mail group’s floating extension
number in Extension Number. (The UM group’s and the voice mail
group’s default floating extension number is 500.*1)
Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Button
*1
Steps
Two-way Transfer
Select Two-way Transfer from Type.
Then enter the UM group’s or the voice mail group’s floating extension
number in Extension Number. (The UM group’s and the voice mail
group’s default floating extension number is 500.*1)
Specify the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record
conversations using One-touch Two-way Transfer in Ext No. of Mailbox.
(For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a
boss.) If the cell is left empty, the extension user must specify the number
of an extension each time.
One-touch Two-way
Transfer
Select Two-way Transfer from Type.
Then enter the UM group’s or the voice mail group’s floating extension
number in Extension Number. (The UM group’s and the voice mail
group’s default floating extension number is 500.*1)
Enter extension number or incoming call distribution group extension
number to Ext No. of Mailbox.
Live Call Screening (LCS)
Select LCS from Type.
Voice Mail Transfer
Select Voice Mail Transfer from Type.
Then enter the UM group’s or the voice mail group’s floating extension
number in Extension Number. (The UM group’s and the voice mail
group’s default floating extension number is 500.*1)
DN
Select DN from Type.
The UM group’s default floating extension number depends on system programming. For more information, consult your System
Administrator or System Manager.
• Rows whose Key Location field is coloured can be customised.
• The number of available flexible buttons is displayed in Available Keys on the screen.
• This feature is available only for DPTs and IP-PTs.
• For KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560 users: You can set the text displayed for
each flexible button for the phone’s Self Labelling feature in Label Name on the Flexible
Button screen.
• For KX-UT248 and KX-UT670 users: You can set the text displayed (a maximum of 10
characters) for each flexible button for the phone’s Self Labelling feature in Label Name on
the Flexible Button screen.
Changing Your Password
You can change your password for the Web Maintenance Console in the Login Account tab of the Edit
User screen.
1.
In the Login Account tab, Password (4–16
characters in length) can be edited.
Note
Entry for the password is hidden and displayed as
dots "·".
2.
Click OK.
Operating Manual
325
3.2.1 User Programming
Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager
If you are designated as a supervisor for Automatic Two-way Recording, you can set the recording for
extensions you are supervising and listen to the recorded conversations as messages through Web
Maintenance Console. Calls to and from specified extensions can be automatically recorded to a mailbox.
For each targeted extension, the following types of calls can be recorded:
• Intercom (internal) calls
• Outside (external) calls
• Incoming ICD group calls only (i.e., when recording outside calls, limit recording to incoming ICD group
calls only)
You can receive an e-mail notification when Automatic Two-way Recording is used. The recorded
conversation can also be sent as an attachment to the e-mail. Consult your System Administrator for more
information.
• This screen is accessible only by users designated as Automatic Two-way Recording
supervisors.
• Forwarded calls and calls retrieved from being on hold will also be automatically recorded.
However, conference calls will not be recorded.
• Recording will automatically stop when the mailbox reaches its capacity. Delete older
messages in order to use this feature again.
• If the enabled extension has a Two-way Record button assigned to it, the button will flash
during recording. However, that button cannot be used to cancel this feature.
• An extension whose conversation is being recorded cannot be the target of the following
features:
– Executive Busy Override
– Whisper OHCA
Note
You should inform the other party that the conversation will be recorded.
Editing Recording Settings
On this screen, a user designated as a supervisor may change Automatic Two-way Recording settings for
extensions they are supervising. Information for each extension, including the extension’s supervisor, UM
Group number, and Automatic Two-way Recording destination mailbox is displayed. You can specify which
types of calls will recorded for each extension.
1. On the left side of the screen, click Users → Automatic Two-way Recording → Edit a Recording.
2. For an extension, click the setting for Internal call, External Call, or ICDG Incoming Only.
• Internal call: Extension-to-extension calls are recorded.
• External Call: Calls with outside parties are recorded.
• ICDG Incoming Only: Only calls that are received by the extension through an incoming call
distribution group are recorded.
Note
To set ICDG Incoming Only to "On", External Call must first be set to "On".
3. Select On or Off for that setting.
4. Click OK when finished.
326
Operating Manual
3.2.1 User Programming
Viewing and Playing Messages
Users designated as supervisors can view and play messages recorded using the Automatic Two-way
Recording feature.
1. On the left side of the screen, click Users → Automatic Two-way Recording → Record List.
2. Select a UM group number from the Select a Destination UM-Group No. drop-down list.
3. Click List View to display a list of the Automatic Two-way Recording mailboxes of the selected UM
group.
4. Select one or more mailboxes, and click OK.
5. Messages recorded in the selected mailbox(es) will be displayed. You can filter the list of messages
displayed or play a message.
To filter the list of messages:
Specify any number of the following conditions, and then click Search to display the messages that
match those conditions.
• Mailbox: Specify an Automatic Two-way Recording mailbox, or select ALL.
• Extension: Specify an extension to view all calls that were recorded using Automatic Two-way
Recording for that extension, or select ALL.
• Status: Specify the status for the recorded messages in the mailbox.
• Internal/External: Specify whether the recorded conversations were intercom calls or external calls,
or specify both.
• Call Type: Specify whether the recorded conversations were incoming calls or outgoing calls, or
specify both.
– If Internal/External is set to "Internal" or "Both", Call Type will be set to "Both".
– If Internal/External is set to "External", Call Type can be set to "Incoming", "Outgoing", or "Both".
• Phone Number: Specify the phone number of the party calling the recorded extension.
• Caller Name: Specify the name of the party that called the recorded extension (may not be available
for all recorded messages).
• Length: Specify the length of the recorded conversations.
• Period: Specify a time period in which calls were recorded.
To play a message:
For playback on the PC:
1. Select the check box of a message to play.
2. At the bottom of the screen, select PC.
3. Click the
(play) button.
The message will be downloaded as an audio file for playback on the PC being used to connect to
Web Maintenance Console.
For playback using the supervisor’s designated extension:
1. In the Mailbox filter, select the mailbox whose messages you want to display, and then click Search.
2. Select the check boxes for one or more messages to play.
3. At the bottom of the screen, select Phone.
4. Click the
(play) button.
Operating Manual
327
3.2.1 User Programming
Note
If ALL has been selected for the Mailbox filter, the
specific mailbox to enable the
(play) button.
(play) button will be disabled. Select a
5. In the window that appears, enter the extension number in Specify Extension of the extension at
which to play back the messages, and then click Connect.
6. Go off-hook when the extension rings to establish a call with the UM message playback system.
7. During the call, click Play to listen to the currently selected message. If multiple messages were
selected in step 2, you can click Prev and Next to cycle through and listen to the selected
messages.
8. When you are finished listening to messages, click Disconnect or go on-hook.
Logout
(logout) button to end the programming session and
To logout of Web Maintenance Console, click the
return to the Login screen. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically backed up from the
PBX to the System Memory.
1. Click the
(logout) button.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
2. Click Yes.
• If the computer running the Web browser that is connected to Web Maintenance Console is
shut down, or the Web browser is closed, any changes that have not been saved will be lost.
Always end your programming session by clicking the
(logout) button. For more
information, consult your System Administrator.
328
Operating Manual
Section 4
Customising Extensions and the System–for
Managers
This section shows managers how to customise the
PBX’s extension and system settings according to their
needs. Find the desired setting and program as
necessary.
Operating Manual
329
4.1 Manager Programming
4.1 Manager Programming
4.1.1 Programming Information
The manager can programme the following items.
• Call Charges
• Other Extensions Control
Available Extension
The extension assigned as a manager
Required Telephone
A Panasonic Proprietary Telephone with display (2 lines or more)
(e.g., KX-NT343, KX-NT546, KX-DT346, KX-DT546, KX-T7636)
Manager Password
To enter programming mode, the manager password (max. 10 digits) is required. (Default: 1234)
CAUTION
• The PBX has a default password preset. For security, change the password the first time that you
programme the PBX.
• It is strongly recommended that a password of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access. For a list of numbers and characters that can be used in the
Entering Characters".
password, refer to "
• To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known to others,
the PBX may be misused.
• Change the password periodically.
Conditions
The programming extension must be idle, on-hook and holding no calls.
4.1.2 Manager Programming
Changing Call Charges and Extension Control
To enter the programming mode
PROG.
OR
330
Operating Manual
PROG.
To continue
1
manager
password
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM Enter
or PAUSE.
To exit
To programme
1.
Enter manager
password.
OR
programming
input
Follow
programming
input.
PAUSE
Press
HOLD.
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
4.1.2 Manager Programming
Item
Programming Input
Changing the manager password.
0
0
+
+ Password (max. 10 digits) +
Viewing extension call charges.
0
1
+
+ Extension no.
Clearing extension call charges.
0
1
+
+ Extension no. +
Setting the budget for extension call
charges.
0
2
+
+ Extension no. + Charge* +
Viewing call charges for each verification
code.
0
3
+
+ Verification code
Clearing call charges for each verification
code.
0
3
+
+ Verification code +
Setting the budget for each verification
code.
0
4
+
+ Verification code + Charge* +
Viewing call charges for each outside line.
0
5
+
+ Outside line no. (3 digits)
Assigning a charge rate for each outside
line group.
0
6
+
+ Outside line group no. (2 digits) +
+
+
Charge rate* +
Clearing all charges.
0
7
+
+
Printing the total call charge.
0
8
+
+
Locking/unlocking other extensions.
(Remote Extension Dial Lock)
9
0
+
+ Extension no. +
0
1
(to lock)/
(to unlock) +
Clearing the PIN and PIN lock for
extensions.
9
1
+
+ Extension no. +
Clearing the PIN and PIN lock for
verification codes.
9
2
+
+ Verification code +
9
3
+
+ Verification code + PIN (max. 10
Setting the verification code PIN.
digits) +
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers your
password (verification code PIN).
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a.
Keeping your PIN secret.
b.
Selecting a complex, random PIN that cannot be easily guessed.
c.
Changing your PIN regularly.
• * To enter a decimal point, press
.
Operating Manual
331
4.1.2 Manager Programming
332
Operating Manual
Section 5
Appendix
This section provides the List of Operations by
Telephone Type, the Troubleshooting, the Feature
Number Table and Tone List. Check the
Troubleshooting section before consulting your dealer.
Operating Manual
333
5.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
5.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
The features that each type of telephone supports are marked with a ü. Features without a ü for a certain
telephone type are not supported for that telephone type.
• Some operations of these features may not be supported by a certain telephone type. For
details, refer to the each section’s operations.
Telephone Type
SIP phone
Features
PT
PS
SLT
KX-UT
series
NonKX-UT
series
Calling Another Extension
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Calling an Outside Party
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Making a Call to a Private Network (TIE
Line Access)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Using an Account Code (Account Code
Entry)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
With a One-touch Button (One-touch
Dialling)
ü
ü
Using Numbers Stored at Your Extension
(Personal Speed Dialling)
ü
Using Numbers Stored in the PBX
(System Speed Dialling)
ü
To a Preset Number by Going Off-hook
(Hot Line)
Using a Preprogrammed Number (Quick
Dialling)
1.2.1 Basic Calling
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
1.2.3 Redial
ü*1
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is
No Answer
Reserving a Busy Line (Automatic
Callback Busy)
334
Operating Manual
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
Telephone Type
SIP phone
Features
KX-UT
series
NonKX-UT
series
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
PT
PS
SLT
Setting Callback on an ISDN Line
(Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber
[CCBS])
ü
ü
ü
Sending a Call Waiting Notification (Call
Waiting)
ü
ü
ü
Leaving a Message Waiting Indication/
Calling Back the Caller Who Left an Indication
(Message Waiting)
ü
ü
ü
Joining an Existing Call (Executive Busy
Override)
ü
ü
ü
Monitoring Another Extension (Call
Monitor)
ü
ü
ü
To an Extension Refusing the Call (DND
Override)
ü
ü
ü
1.2.5 Accessing the ISDN Service (ISDN Service
Access)
ü
ü
1.2.6 Alternating the Calling Method (Alternate
Calling—Ring/Voice)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.2.9 Setting Your Telephone from Another
Extension or through DISA (Remote Setting)
ü
ü
ü
1.3.1 Answering Calls
ü
ü
ü
1.3.2 Answering Hands-free (Hands-free
Answerback)
ü
ü
Answering a Call from Another
Telephone (Call Pickup)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Answering a Call from Another
Telephone (Call Pickup Group Monitor)
ü*2
Denying Other People the Possibility of
Picking Up Your Calls (Call Pickup Deny)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions
Using Your Calling Privileges at Another
Extension (Remote COS Access)
ü
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another
Telephone (Call Pickup)
Operating Manual
335
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
Telephone Type
SIP phone
Features
KX-UT
series
NonKX-UT
series
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.4.2 Holding a Call
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.4.3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call
Splitting)
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
ü
ü
ü
ü
Adding Other Parties during a
Conversation (Conference)
ü
ü
ü
ü
Leaving a Conference (Unattended
Conference)
ü
ü
Leaving a Conference (Leaving Threeparty Conference)
ü
ü
ü
ü
Letting a Third Party Join Your Call
(Privacy Release)
ü
ü
Adding a Third Party during a
Conversation Using the ISDN Service (Threeparty Conference [3PTY]—by ISDN)
ü
ü
1.4.6 Mute
ü
ü
1.4.7 Letting Other People Listen to the
Conversation (Off-hook Monitor)
ü
ü
1.4.8 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)
ü
ü
PT
PS
SLT
1.3.4 Answering a Call via an External Speaker
(Trunk Answer From Any Station [TAFAS])
ü
ü
ü
1.3.5 Using the ANSWER/RELEASE Button
ü
1.3.6 Identifying Malicious Calling Parties
(Malicious Call Identification [MCID])
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Transferring to an Outside Party Using
the PBX Service
ü
Transferring a Call Using the ISDN
Service (Call Transfer [CT]—by ISDN)
Transferring to an Outside Party Using
the SIP Service
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
Transferring to an Extension in the PBX
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
336
Operating Manual
ü
ü
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
Telephone Type
SIP phone
Features
SLT
KX-UT
series
NonKX-UT
series
ü
ü
ü
PT
PS
ü
ü
Forwarding Your Calls (Call Forwarding
[FWD])
ü
ü
Remote FWD Settings Using Group FWD
Button
ü
FWD/DND Settings Using Fixed
FWD/DND Button
ü
Forwarding Your Calls Using ISDN
Service (Call Forwarding [CF]—by ISDN)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
To lock
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
To unlock
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
To make an outside call while your extension
is locked
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.5.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/
Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
1.6.2 Showing a Message on the Caller’s
Telephone Display (Absent Message)
ü*3
1.6.3 Preventing Other People from Using Your
Telephone (Extension Dial Lock)
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Simplified
Voice Message [SVM])
Recording a Normal Greeting Message
Recording a Greeting Message for Each
Time Mode
Redirecting Your Calls to Your Message
Box
Leaving Voice Messages
Listening to Voice Messages Left by
Callers
Accessing Your Message Box from an
Outside Telephone
Accessing the Message Box of Another
Extension from Your Extension
1.7.1 Paging
Operating Manual
337
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
Telephone Type
SIP phone
Features
PT
PS
SLT
KX-UT
series
NonKX-UT
series
Group Paging
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Paging and then Transferring a Call
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
To answer
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
To allow/deny a paging announcement
(Paging Deny)
ü
1.7.2 Answering/Denying a Paging
Announcement
ü
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
Conference Mode
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Broadcast Mode
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Join After Time Out
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.8 Using the Unified Messaging Features*4*5
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.9.1 Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.9.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb
[DND])
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Switching FWD/DND Status Using Fixed
FWD/DND Button
338
ü
ü
ü
ü*3
1.9.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Offhook Call Announcement [OHCA]/Whisper
OHCA)*6*7
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.9.4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the
Called Party and Caller’s Telephone (Calling/
Connected Line Identification Presentation [CLIP/
COLP])
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.9.5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being
Displayed on the Caller’s Telephone (Connected
Line Identification Restriction [COLR])
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.9.6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed
on the Called Party’s Telephone (Calling Line
Identification Restriction [CLIR])
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.9.7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your
Conversation (Executive Busy Override Deny)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.9.8 Turning on the Background Music (BGM)
ü
Operating Manual
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
Telephone Type
SIP phone
Features
PT
PS
SLT
KX-UT
series
NonKX-UT
series
1.9.9 Protecting Your Line against Notification
Tones (Data Line Security)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.9.10 Checking the Time Service Status
ü
1.9.11 Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring
(Parallelled Telephone)
ü*8
ü
ü
ü
1.9.12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a Wired
Telephone (Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
ü
1.9.13 Using Your phone in Parallel with a Wired
Telephone (One-numbered extension)
ü
1.9.14 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension
(Extension Feature Clear)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.10.1 Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution
Group (Log-in/Log-out, Wrap-up)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.10.2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status
of an Incoming Call Distribution Group (Incoming
Call Distribution Group Monitor)
Monitoring the Status of Waiting Calls
ü*9
Monitoring and Changing the Log-in/Logout Status of Extensions
ü*9
1.10.3 Forwarding a Waiting Call (Manual Queue
Redirection)
ü
ü
Doorphone Call
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Opening a Door (Door Open)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.11.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
1.11.2 If an External Relay is Connected
To switch on the relay
1.11.3 If an External Sensor is Connected
To answer a sensor call
1.11.4 If a Host PBX is Connected
Accessing External Services (External
Feature Access [EFA])
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
Call Forwarding to Voice Mail (Voice Mail
Integration)
Operating Manual
339
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
Telephone Type
SIP phone
Features
Screening Calls (Live Call Screening
[LCS])
Recording a Conversation
PT
PS
ü
ü
ü
ü
SLT
KX-UT
series
NonKX-UT
series
1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type
Environment (Hospitality Features)
Check-in
ü*9
Check-out
ü*9
Setting a Timed Reminder to a Room
Extension (Remote Wake-up Call)
Cleaned-up
ü*9
1.12.2 Recording Information Using
Preprogrammed Messages (Printing Message)
ü
ü
1.13.1 Walking Extension
ü
ü
1.13.2 Enhanced Walking Extension
ü
ü
1.14.1 Using the Call Log
ü
ü
1.14.2 Using the Directories
ü
ü
ü
1.14.3 Accessing System Features (System
Feature Access)
ü*10
ü
1.14.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/
KX-NT556/KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
ü*11
ü*12
2.1.1 Extension Control
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
2.1.2 Time Service Mode Control
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
2.1.3 Restriction Level Control (Dial Tone
Transfer)
ü
ü
2.1.4 Turning on the External Background Music
(BGM)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
2.1.5 Recording Outgoing Messages (OGM)
ü
2.1.6 Allowing Users to Seize an Unavailable
Outside Line (Trunk Busy Out)
ü
ü
ü
2.1.7 Releasing Network Direct Station Selection
(NDSS) Monitor
ü
ü
2.2 Configuring Unified Messaging Features*13
ü
ü
ü
ü
3.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal
Programming)
340
ü
Operating Manual
ü
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
Telephone Type
SIP phone
Features
PT
PS
SLT
KX-UT
series
NonKX-UT
series
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
ü
ü
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
ü
ü
Assigning an Extension PIN to Your
Extension (Extension PIN [Personal
Identification Number])
4.1 Manager Programming
Changing Call Charges and Extension
Control
*1
*2
ü
Only available for the KX-UT133, KX-UT136, KX-UT248, and KX-UT670.
Available telephones are as follows:
•
IP-PTs (except models with a single line display)
•
*3
*4
DPTs (except models with a single line display)
Not available for the KX-UT670.
"
Live Call Screening (LCS)" and "
*5
"
Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)" is only available for PTs, SLTs and SIP phones.
*6
OHCA is only available for certain DPTs.
Whisper OHCA is only available for IP-PTs and certain DPTs.
Only available for DPTs.
Only available for Display PTs.
Only available for the KX-NT300 series, KX-NT500 series, KX-DT300 series, KX-DT500 series, and KX-T7600 series.
Only available for the KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560.
Only available for the KX-UT248 and KX-UT670.
*7
*8
*9
*10
*11
*12
*13
"
Recording Your Conversation" are only available for PTs and PSs.
Setting the Timed Reminder" is only available for PTs, SLTs and SIP phones.
Operating Manual
341
5.2 Troubleshooting
5.2 Troubleshooting
5.2.1 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Problem
The telephone does not work properly.
Remedy
•
•
Confirm with your manager that your
settings are correct.
If the problem persists, consult your dealer.
The telephone does not respond when buttons
are pressed.
• The telephone is locked.
Some features do not work.
• System management may restrict certain
Unlock your telephone.
(
1.6.3 Preventing Other People from Using
Your Telephone (Extension Dial Lock),
2.1.1 Extension Control)
features.
Consult your manager.
• The feature numbers have changed.
Confirm the revised number and try again.
342
Even though following the manual instructions,
none of the operations work when using a
proprietary telephone.
• The Intercom line was not seized. The seized
The parallelled single line telephones do not
ring.
• "No ring" may be selected.
My proprietary telephone does not have a
feature button.
• Some models do not have the feature
Operating Manual
line, when going off-hook, was changed by
personal setting. (
3.1.2 Settings on the
Programming Mode)
In the manual, going off-hook means an
Intercom line is seized.
If the setting has been changed, press the
INTERCOM or PDN button after going off-hook
and follow the instructions.
Change the setting to ring. (
1.9.11 Setting
the Parallelled Telephone to Ring (Parallelled
Telephone))
button.
Change a flexible button to the desired
button. (
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons)
Enter the specified feature number instead
of the feature button. (
1.1.5 Before
Operating the Telephones)
5.2.1 Troubleshooting
Problem
A reorder tone is audible or "Restricted" is
displayed.
Remedy
• The telephone is locked.
Unlock your telephone.
(
1.6.3 Preventing Other People from Using
Your Telephone (Extension Dial Lock),
2.1.1 Extension Control)
• Toll restriction is activated.
Consult your manager or dealer.
• An account code is required.
(
1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions,
Using an Account Code (Account Code Entry)
in 1.2.1 Basic Calling)
I cannot make an outside call using the Onetouch Dialling button or speed dialling.
• A line access number was not stored.
I cannot remember the feature numbers.
•
If the feature numbers have been changed
from the default values, write the new feature
numbers in the table in "5.3.1 Feature Number
Table".
•
Ask your dealer to change the feature
numbers for easier use.
A line access number is required for
outside calls. (
1.2.1 Basic Calling,
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons)
While talking to an outside party, the line is
disconnected.
• The time limit has run out.
Redialling does not function.
• The dialled number was more than 32 digits.
(
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer),
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation)
Consult your dealer to extend the time
limit, if necessary.
(
I cannot have a conversation using the
Bluetooth headset.
1.2.3 Redial)
•
Make sure that the headset is properly
registered to the module.
•
Make sure that the headset is properly
charged according to the manual of the
headset.
•
Remove the wired headset from the
headset jack. Priority is given to the wired
headset when both are connected.
I cannot register, de-register, or confirm the ID of
the Bluetooth headset.
•
Make sure that the module is properly
installed in the IP-PT/DPT.
The PC and fax machine communication failed.
• An indication tone may have interrupted
communication. (
1.9.9 Protecting Your
Line against Notification Tones (Data Line
Security))
Operating Manual
343
5.2.1 Troubleshooting
Problem
Remedy
I do not want to show my telephone number to
the calling or called party’s telephone.
• (
I want to show my telephone number to the
calling or called party’s telephone.
• (
I cannot send a call waiting tone to the dialled
extension.
• The other party has not set the Call Waiting
1.9.5 Preventing Your Telephone Number
Being Displayed on the Caller’s Telephone
(Connected Line Identification Restriction
[COLR]), 1.9.6 Preventing Your Number Being
Displayed on the Called Party’s Telephone
(Calling Line Identification Restriction [CLIR]))
1.9.4 Displaying Your Telephone Number
on the Called Party and Caller’s Telephone
(Calling/Connected Line Identification
Presentation [CLIP/COLP]))
feature.
Sending a Call Waiting Notification
(
(Call Waiting), 1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting,
1.9.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Offhook Call Announcement [OHCA]/Whisper
OHCA))
• The other party has set Data Line Security.
(
1.9.9 Protecting Your Line against
Notification Tones (Data Line Security))
I forgot the password.
• Ask the manager to assist you.
(
2.1.1 Extension Control)
The background music started suddenly.
•
I do not want to display a number which is
stored in memory.
•
I want to confirm my extension number.
• (
The date and time are not correct.
• Set the date and time by system
Turn off the music.
(
1.9.8 Turning on the Background Music
(BGM), 2.1.4 Turning on the External
Background Music (BGM))
Conceal the number.
(
Storing Names and Numbers,
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons)
Your Extension Number in 1.1.5 Before
Operating the Telephones)
programming.
Consult your dealer.
The visibility of the display is poor.
•
(
Change the Display contrast level.
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode)
I want to specify the ringing tones.
• (
The MESSAGE button light has lit up.
• Another extension left you a message
To specify the ringing tones for each CO,
ICD Group, PDN, SDN, or INTERCOM button
(DPT/IP-PT only), 3.1.3 Customising the
Buttons)
waiting indication or someone left a
message in your mailbox while you were on
the phone or away from your desk.
344
Operating Manual
5.2.1 Troubleshooting
Problem
An SDN button on my extension does not work.
Remedy
• A PDN button is not assigned on the
extension corresponding to your SDN
button.
Create a PDN button on the desired
extension. (
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons)
I cannot use the secondary Ethernet port.
•
If you are using a KX-NT500 series
telephone, check whether ECO mode is
enabled (
Display in 1.1.5 Before
Operating the Telephones). If it is enabled, ask
your dealer to disable ECO mode. For other
types of IP-PTs, contact your dealer.
Operating Manual
345
5.3 Feature Number Table
5.3 Feature Number Table
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Numbers listed below are the default settings. There are flexible feature numbers and fixed feature
numbers. If you change the flexible feature numbers, fill in your assigned numbers (new) in the list for future
reference.
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
1.2.1 Basic Calling
To call an operator (Operator Call)
9/0
( )
To select an idle outside line
automatically (Automatic Line Access)
0/9
( )
To select an idle outside line in the
specified outside line group
automatically (Outside Line Group
Access)
8
( )
Making a Call to a Private
Network (TIE Line Access)
7
( )
private phone no.
Using an Account Code (Account
Code Entry)
49
( )
account code + # + outside phone no.
30
( )
personal speed dialling no. (2 digits) +
phone no. + #
outside phone no.
outside line group no. (2 digits) + outside
phone no.
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
Using Numbers Stored at Your
Extension (Personal Speed Dialling)
– To store
– To dial
+ personal speed dialling no. (2 digits)
( )
Using Numbers Stored in the PBX
(System Speed Dialling)
– To dial
To a Preset Number by Going Offhook (Hot Line)
system speed dialling no. (3 digits)
( )
740
( )
– To store
2 + phone no. + #
– To set
1
– To cancel
0
1.2.3 Redial
Redialling the Last Number You
Dialled (Last Number Redial)
346
Operating Manual
#
( )
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or
There is No Answer
To cancel callback ringing (Automatic
Callback Busy Cancel)/To cancel
(CCBS Cancel)
Leaving a Message Waiting
Indication/Calling Back the Caller Who
Left an Indication (Message Waiting)
46
( )
70
( )
For an extension leaving a message
waiting indication
– To leave/cancel
1/0 + extension no.
For an extension receiving a message
waiting indication
– To call back
2
– To clear
0 + your extension no.
1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions
Using Your Calling Privileges at
Another Extension (Remote COS
Access)
To call with a verification code
(Verification Code Entry)
47
( )
extension no. + extension PIN + phone
no.
+ verification code + verification code
PIN + phone no.
1.2.8 To Access Another Party Directly
from Outside (Direct Inward System
Access [DISA])
Calling through DISA
– To an extension
(In All Security Mode only)
– To an outside party
(In Trunk Security Mode/All Security
Mode only)
1.2.9 Setting Your Telephone from
Another Extension or through DISA
(Remote Setting)
your extension no./( + verification
code) + extension PIN/verification code
PIN + extension no.
your extension no./( + verification
code) + extension PIN/verification code
PIN + outside phone no.
your extension no. + extension PIN +
feature no.
– From another extension
– Through DISA
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at
Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
Answering a Call from Another
Telephone (Call Pickup)
Operating Manual
347
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
– Group
40
( )
group no. (2 digits)
– Directed
41
( )
extension no.
Denying Other People the
Possibility of Picking Up Your Calls
(Call Pickup Deny)
720
( )
– To deny
1
– To allow
0
1.3.4 Answering a Call via an External
Speaker (Trunk Answer From Any
Station [TAFAS])
– Calls through an external speaker
1.3.6 Identifying Malicious Calling
Parties (Malicious Call Identification
[MCID])
42
external pager no.
7 3
( )
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
Transferring a Call Using the
ISDN Service (Call Transfer [CT]—by
ISDN)
62
( )
phone no.
Transferring to an Outside Party
Using the SIP Service
– Blind Transfer
61
( )
phone no. + #
1.4.2 Holding a Call
To hold (Call Hold)/To retrieve a call
(Call Hold Retrieve)
50
( )
To retrieve a call (Call Hold Retrieve)
– Specified with a held line number
53
( )
outside line no. which is held (3 digits)
– Specified with a holding extension
51
( )
extension no. which has a held call
number
Holding in a System Parking Zone
(Call Park)
52
( )
– To set
parking zone no. (2 digits)/
– To retrieve
stored parking zone no. (2 digits)
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
Answering Call Waiting in the
PBX
348
Operating Manual
50
( )
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
Answering Call Waiting from the
Telephone Company
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
60
( )
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
Adding a Third Party during a
Conversation Using the ISDN Service
(Three-party Conference [3PTY]—by
ISDN)
phone no. + TRANSFER button + 3
62
( )
1.6.1 Forwarding Calls
Forwarding Your Calls (Call
Forwarding [FWD])/
1.9.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not
Disturb [DND])
– Both Calls
– Outside Calls
– Intercom Calls
– To set the timer for "No Answer" and
"Busy/No Answer"
710
( )
711
( )
712
( )
713
( )
0 (Cancel)/
1 (Do Not Disturb [DND])/
2 (All calls) + phone no. + #/
3 (Busy) + phone no. + #/
4 (No Answer) + phone no. + #/
5 (Busy/No Answer) + phone no. + #/
7 (Follow Me) + your extension no./
8 (Follow Me Cancel) + your extension
no.
00–99 (second)
To set/cancel (Call Forwarding [FWD]
for your Incoming Call Distribution
Group)
– Both Calls
– Outside Calls
– Intercom Calls
Forwarding Your Calls Using
ISDN Service (Call Forwarding [CF]—
by ISDN)
714
( )
715
( )
716
( )
1 (Set) + ICD Group extension no. +
phone no. + #/
0 (Cancel) + ICD Group extension no.
7 5
( )
– To set
outside line no. + # + multiple subscriber
no. + # + 2 (Unconditional)/3 (Busy)/4
(No Reply) + phone no. + #
– To cancel
outside line no. + # + multiple subscriber
no. + # + 0
– To confirm
outside line no. + # + multiple subscriber
no. + # + 1
Operating Manual
349
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
1.6.2 Showing a Message on the
Caller’s Telephone Display (Absent
Message)
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
750
( )
– To set
1–9 (+ parameter) + #
– To cancel
0
1.6.3 Preventing Other People from
Using Your Telephone (Extension Dial
Lock)
77
( )
– To lock
1
– To unlock
0 + extension PIN
– To make an outside call while your
extension is locked
47
( )
your extension no. + extension PIN +
phone no.
38
( )
1
1.6.4 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in
Simplified Voice Message [SVM])
Recording a Normal Greeting
Message
– To record
– To play back
2
– To clear
0
Recording a Greeting Message
for Each Time Mode
– To record
8 + 0 (Day)/1 (Night)/2 (Lunch)/3 (Break)
+1
– To play back
8 + 0 (Day)/1 (Night)/2 (Lunch)/3 (Break)
+2
– To clear
8 + 0 (Day)/1 (Night)/2 (Lunch)/3 (Break)
+0
To leave a voice message directly to
another extension’s message box
# + 6 + extension no.
Listening to Voice Messages Left
by Callers
3
Redirecting Your Calls to Your
Message Box
350
– Both Calls
710
( )
0 (Cancel)/
– Outside Calls
711
( )
2 (All Calls) + floating extension no. for
the SVM feature*1 + #/
Operating Manual
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
– Intercom Calls
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
712
( )
3 (Busy) + floating extension no. for the
SVM feature*1 + #/
4 (No Answer) + floating extension no.
for the SVM feature*1 + #/
5 (Busy/No Answer) + floating extension
no. for the SVM feature*1 + #
33
( )
paging group no. (2 digits)
1.7.1 Paging
Group Paging
1.7.2 Answering/Denying a Paging
Announcement
– To answer
43
( )
– To deny
721
( )
– To allow
1.7.3 Making a Conference Group Call
1
0
32
( )
– To call and start a conversation
conference group no. (1 digit) + entry
code + #
– To call and make an announcement
conference group no. (1 digit) + entry
code + #
Join After Time Out
– To make a conference group call
conference group no. (1 digit) + entry
code + #
with an entry code
– To join a conversation with an entry
# + conference group no. (1 digit) + entry
code + #
code
1.8.5 Transferring Calls
Voice Mail Transfer
– Both Calls
– Outside Calls
– Intercom Calls
1.9.1 Setting the Alarm (Timed
Reminder)
710
( )
711
( )
712
( )
0 (Cancel)/
2 (All calls)/
3 (Busy)/
4 (No Answer)/
5 (Busy/No Answer)
+ UM group’s floating extension no.*2 + #
760
( )
– To set
12H: 1 + hour/minute + 0 (AM)/1 (PM)
+ 0 (once)/1 (daily)
24H: 1 + hour/minute + 0 (once)/1 (daily)
– To cancel
0
Operating Manual
351
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
1.9.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call
Waiting/Off-hook Call Announcement
[OHCA]/Whisper OHCA)
– For intercom calls
(No call/Tone/OHCA/Whisper
OHCA)
– For outside calls
(No tone/Tone)
1.9.4 Displaying Your Telephone
Number on the Called Party and
Caller’s Telephone (Calling/Connected
Line Identification Presentation [CLIP/
COLP])
732
( )
0 (No call)/1 (Tone)/2 (OHCA)/3
(Whisper OHCA)
0 (No tone)/1 (Tone)
7 2
( )
– Public
1
– Your extension
2
1.9.5 Preventing Your Telephone
Number Being Displayed on the
Caller’s Telephone (Connected Line
Identification Restriction [COLR])
7 0
( )
– To show
0
– To prevent
1
1.9.6 Preventing Your Number Being
Displayed on the Called Party’s
Telephone (Calling Line Identification
Restriction [CLIR])
7 1
( )
– To show
0
– To prevent
1
1.9.7 Preventing Other People from
Joining Your Conversation (Executive
Busy Override Deny)
733
( )
– To prevent
1
– To allow
0
1.9.8 Turning on the Background Music
(BGM)
751
( )
– To set
BGM no. (1 digit)
– To cancel
0
1.9.9 Protecting Your Line against
Notification Tones (Data Line Security)
352
731
( )
730
( )
– To set
1
– To cancel
0
Operating Manual
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
1.9.11 Setting the Parallelled
Telephone to Ring (Parallelled
Telephone)
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
39
( )
– Ring
1
– No Ring
0
1.9.12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a
Wired Telephone (Wireless XDP
Parallel Mode)
48
( )
– To set
1 + paired wired extension no.
– To cancel
0
1.9.13 Using Your phone in Parallel
with a Wired Telephone (Onenumbered extension)
48
( )
– To set
1 + paired wired extension no.
– To cancel
0
To pickup the call
41
( )
1.9.14 Clearing Features Set at Your
Extension (Extension Feature Clear)
790
( )
paired wired extension no.
1.10.1 Leaving an Incoming Call
Distribution Group (Log-in/Log-out,
Wrap-up)
Log-in
736
( )
Log-out
To enter/leave Not Ready mode
1.10.2 Monitoring and Controlling the
Call Status of an Incoming Call
Distribution Group (Incoming Call
Distribution Group Monitor)
1 + ICD Group extension no./
0 + ICD Group extension no./
735
( )
1 (Not Ready)/0 (Ready)
ICD Group extension no.
*3
739
( )
1.11.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is
Connected
Doorphone Call
31
( )
doorphone no. (2 digits)
Opening a Door (Door Open)
55
( )
doorphone no. (2 digits)
56
( )
relay no. (2 digits)
1.11.2 If an External Relay is
Connected
1.11.4 If a Host PBX is Connected
Operating Manual
353
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
Accessing External Services
(External Feature Access [EFA])
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
60
( )
service code
710
( )
711
( )
712
( )
0 (Cancel)/
2 (All Calls)/
3 (Busy)/
4 (No Answer)/
5 (Busy/No Answer)
+ voice mail floating extension no. + #
1.11.5 If a Voice Processing System is
Connected
Call Forwarding to Voice Mail
(Voice Mail Integration)
– Both Calls
– Outside Calls
– Intercom Calls
1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a
Hotel-type Environment (Hospitality
Features)
Setting a Timed Reminder to a
Room Extension (Remote Wake-up
Call)
*4
76
( )
– To set
12H: 1 + extension no. + hour/minute + 0
(AM)/1 (PM) + 0 (once)/1 (daily)
24H: 1 + extension no. + hour/minute + 0
(once)/1 (daily)
– To cancel
0 + extension no.
– To confirm
2 + extension no.
1.12.2 Recording Information Using
Preprogrammed Messages (Printing
Message)
1.13.1 Walking Extension
761
( )
message no. (+ parameter) + #
727
( )
your extension no. + extension PIN
727
( )
#
1.13.2 Enhanced Walking Extension
– To set an extension status to
Service-out
– To set an extension status to
+ your extension no. + extension PIN
Service-in
2.1.1 Extension Control
To lock/unlock other extensions
(Remote Extension Dial Lock)
*5
354
– To unlock
782
( )
extension no.
– To lock
783
( )
extension no.
Operating Manual
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
*6
2.1.2 Time Service Mode Control
Default
(New)
780
( )
– Day/Night/Lunch/Break
2.1.4 Turning on the External
Background Music (BGM)
*5
Additional digits/buttons
0/1/2/3
35
( )
– To start
external pager no. + BGM no. (1 digit)
+ BGM no. (1 digit)
– To stop
external pager no. + 0
+0
2.1.5 Recording Outgoing Messages
(OGM)
*5
36
( )
– To record
1 + OGM floating extension no.*7
– To play back
2 + OGM floating extension no.*7
– To record from an external BGM
3 + BGM port no. (1 digit) + OGM
floating extension no.*7
(MOH) port
– To clear
0 + OGM floating extension no.*7
*5
2.1.6 Allowing Users to Seize an
Unavailable Outside Line (Trunk Busy
Out)
785
( )
2.1.7 Releasing Network Direct
Station Selection (NDSS) Monitor
784
( )
*5
outside line no. (3 digits)
another PBX extension no. + #
3.1.1 Customising Your Phone
(Personal Programming)
Assigning an Extension PIN to
Your Extension (Extension PIN
[Personal Identification Number])
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
799
( )
– To set
1 + extension PIN + # + same extension
PIN + #
– To cancel
0 + stored extension PIN
The default floating extension number (591) for the SVM feature depends on system programming. For more information, consult
your System Administrator or System Manager.
The UM group’s default floating extension number depends on system programming. For more information, consult your System
Administrator or System Manager.
Supervisor only
Hotel operator only
Manager only
Manager and preprogrammed extension user only
The default of OGM floating extension numbers depends on system programming. For more information, consult your System
Administrator or System Manager.
Feature
(While busy, DND or call tone is heard/after dialling)
Default
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
Operating Manual
355
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature
(While busy, DND or call tone is heard/after dialling)
Sending a Call Waiting Notification (Call Waiting)
Default
1
To an Extension Refusing the Call (DND Override)
Joining an Existing Call (Executive Busy Override)
Leaving a Message Waiting Indication/Calling Back the Caller Who
Left an Indication (Message Waiting)
Monitoring Another Extension (Call Monitor)
Reserving a Busy Line (Automatic Callback Busy)/
Setting
Callback on an ISDN Line (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber
[CCBS])
3
4
5
6
1.2.6 Alternating the Calling Method (Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice)
Feature
(While dialling or talking)
Fixed Number
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
Adding Other Parties during a Conversation (Conference)
3
1.11.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
From any extension while talking to the doorphone
356
Operating Manual
5
5.4 What is This Tone?
5.4 What is This Tone?
5.4.1 What is This Tone?
While on-hook
Ring Tones
The following tones are
programmable allowing
recognition of call type (Outside,
Intercom or Doorphone).
Tone 1
1s
Tone 2
1s
Tone 3
1s
Tone 4
1s
When going off-hook
Dial Tones
Tone 1
Normal
1s
• For KX-UT series SIP phone users: Tone 1 will be heard when any of the following features are set.
– Absent Message
– Call Pickup Deny
– Call Waiting
– Extension Dial Lock
– Executive Busy Override Deny
Operating Manual
357
5.4.1 What is This Tone?
Tone 2
1s
• When there are messages that
have previously been listened to
and no new messages recorded
by the SVM feature.
• When any of the following
features are set:
– Absent Message
– Background Music
– Call Forwarding
– Call Pickup Deny
– Call Waiting
– Do Not Disturb
– Extension Dial Lock
– Executive Busy Override Deny
– Hot Line
– Timed Reminder
• For KX-UT series SIP phone users: Tone 2 will be heard when any of the following features are set.
– Display Lock
– Call Forwarding
– Do Not Disturb
Tone 3
1s
• When answering an external
sensor call
(Not available for KX-UT series SIP
phones)
• After pressing TRANSFER or
Recall/hookswitch to hold a call
temporarily (e.g., Call Splitting)
• While a called PS is being
searched
• When Account Code Entry is
performed
• When answering a Timed
Reminder call with no message
Tone 4
Message waiting indication was
received.
358
Operating Manual
1s
5.4.1 What is This Tone?
When you make calls
Busy Tone
Reorder Tone
The outside line you tried to seize
is not assigned or denied.
1s
1s
Ringback Tones
Tone 1
1s
Tone 2
(Not available for KX-UT series SIP
phones)
1s
Do Not Disturb (DND) Tone
(Not available for KX-UT series SIP
phones)
The dialled extension is refusing
incoming calls.
1s
While off-hook
Indication Tones
Tone 1
Call waiting tone
15 s
Tone 2
A call is on hold longer than the
specified time
15 s
When talking to an outside party
Warning Tone
This tone is sent 15, 10 and 5
seconds before the specified time
for disconnection.
For KX-UT series SIP phones, this
tone is sent only once 15 seconds
before the specified time for
disconnection.
1s
Operating Manual
359
5.4.1 What is This Tone?
When setting the features or programming
Confirmation Tones
Tone 1
1s
• The feature setting was set
successfully.
• A call is received in Voice-calling
mode.
Tone 2
1s
• Before receiving a page through
an external speaker
• You receive a call in Hands-free
mode.
• You established a call with a
KX-UT series SIP phone that
has Hands-free Answerback
enabled.
Tone 3
1s
• Before the following features
activate:
– Retrieving a held call
– Picking up another call
– Paging/Answering a paging
announcement
– Answering the call through a
speaker
• You establish a call with an
extension in the following cases:
– The called extension has
hands-free Answerback
enabled and is not a KX-UT
series SIP phone.
– Voice-calling mode
• When making a call to or from a
doorphone.
Tone 4
Establishing or leaving a
conference
Tone 5
A call has been put on hold.
360
Operating Manual
1s
1s
5.5 Revision History
5.5 Revision History
5.5.1 PFMPR Software File Version 004.01xxx
Changed Contents
• 2.2.2 Message Manager Features
• 3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
5.5.2 PFMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx
Changed Contents
• Feature Highlights
• 1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the SIP Service
• 2.1.4 Turning on the External Background Music (BGM)
• 3.2.1 User Programming
Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager
• 4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
ACD Report Analysis
5.5.3 PFMPR Software File Version 004.2xxxx
Changed Contents
• Feature Highlights
• 1.1.5 Before Operating the Telephones
• 1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
• 1.14.1 Using the Call Log
• 1.14.2 Using the Directories
• 4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
5.5.4 PFMPR Software File Version 004.3xxxx
Changed Contents
• Feature Highlights
• 3.2.1 User Programming
5.5.5 PFMPR Software File Version 004.4xxxx
Changed Contents
• 2.2.2 Message Manager Features
Operating Manual
361
5.5.6 PFMPR Software File Version 004.6xxxx
5.5.6 PFMPR Software File Version 004.6xxxx
Changed Contents
• 3.2.1 User Programming
Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager
5.5.7 PFMPR Software File Version 006.0xxxx
Changed Contents
• 1.10.4 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
• 1.12.1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel-type Environment (Hospitality Features)
362
Operating Manual
Note
Operating Manual
363
For Future Reference
Please print, record, and retain the following information for future reference.
Note
The serial number of this product can be found on the label affixed to the unit. You should record the
model number and the serial number of this unit as a permanent record of your purchase to aid in
identification in the event of theft.
MODEL NO.
SERIAL NO.
DATE OF PURCHASE
NAME OF DEALER
DEALER'S ADDRESS
DEALER'S TEL. NO.
Panasonic Corporation
1006, Oaza Kadoma, Kadoma-shi, Osaka 571-8501, Japan
http://www.panasonic.com/
© Panasonic Corporation 2014
PNQX6954SA DD0714AH8107
Download PDF
Similar pages